Part 1 Teaching Design
第一部分 教学设计
Period 1 A sample lesson plan for reading
(THE ROAD TO MODERN ENGLISH)
Introduction
In this period, after the warming up, students will first be guided to answer the question Why do people learn English？Then they will be helped to read an exposition （说明文）entitled THE ROAD TO MODERN ENGLISH. It’s about the development of the English language and the causes for its varieties in use today.
Examples of “Warming Up” designs are presented in this book for teachers’ reference. Computer and overhead projector may be used to aid the teaching and learning.
Objectives
To help students get to know about English development
To help students better understand “learning English”
To help students understand and use some important words and expressions
To help students identify examples of Indirect Speech (II): request & commands in the text
Focus
Words
base, command, request, recognize
Expressions
because of, come up, at present, make use of, such as, play a part (in)
Patterns
…because of that, English began to b spoken in many other countries.
Actually all languages change and develop…
The latter gave a separate identity to American English spelling.
Aids
Multimedia facilities, tape-recorder, photos, diagrams
Procedure
1. Warming up
⑴Warming up by listing
Good morning, class. We have been learning English for several years. But how many English-speaking countries are there in the world? Now let’s make a list of them on the blackboard.
English
Countries
Explanation
Mother tongue
the United Kingdom
the United States of America
Canada
Australia
South Africa
Ireland
New Zealand
The people in these countries are native speakers of English. In total, for more than 375 million people English is their mother tongue.
Second language
India
Pakistan
Nigeria
the Philippines
These people speak the language of their own country at home but the language of the government, schools, newspapers, and TV is English.
Foreign language
China
Germany
France
etc.
The number of people who learn English as a foreign language is more than 750 million.
⑵Warming up by answering questions about English
Good morning, class. Today we shall start learning Unit 2 English around the world. But how much do you know about English?
●What is Standard English?
Standard English is the form of English that most people in Britain use, and that is not limited to one area or group of people.
●What is a dialect?
A dialect is a variety of a language spoken only in one area, in which words, or grammar are slightly different from other forms of the same language.
●Do we have standard Chinese? What is it?
In China there’re so many dialects that the government encourages the whole nation to speak Putonghua, which is regarded as standard Chinese.
⑶Warming up by giving reasons
Unit 2 English around the world is what we are going to learn today. We are all learning English now because English is so popular in the world. But do you know why it is so? How many reasons could you giving for the spread of English around the world?
English is one of the official languages of the Olympic Games and the United Nations.
English dominates international websites and provides nearly all of the new computer terminology.
Tourism and trade from Western Europe and North America has contributed to the spread of English.
Satellite TV, radio programs like Joy FM, CDs and, of course, Hollywood films all broadcast English into China. Also, a number of Chinese films include English subtitles.
2．Pre-reading
We are learning English here. But why are we learning it? Could you suggest to the class as many reasons as you can think of, why people in the world learn English?
for work, as a hobby, to learn about other people, to travel, to read literature in the original, to read research papers, to meet foreigners, to surf the Internet, to pass exams, etc.
Go on with your reasons. I shall write your suggestions on the board as you make them.
3. Skimming the text for general ideas
Now we go to page 9 to skim the text for the main idea of each paragraph.
Paragraph 1: The spread of the English language in the world
Paragraph 2: Native speaker can understand each other even if they don’t speak the same kind of English.
Paragraph 3: English changes and develops when cultures meet and communicate with each other.
Paragraph 4: By the 19th century English is settled.
Paragraph 5: English is spoken as a foreign language or second language in South Asia.
4. Reading and filling
Read the text to complete the chart below.
Time
English is influenced by…
AD 450-1150
German
1150-1500
French
In the 1600’s
Shakespeare, who make use of a wider vocabulary than ever before
By the 19th century
Samuel Johnson, Noah Webster
Now
Languages in South Asia, in Singapore, in Malaysia, in Africa and in China
5. Reading and copying
Next we shall go over the text once more. This time try find and copy all the useful expressions down in your notebook.
Useful expressions
at the end of…, make voyages, speak English as…, in the next century, change over time, communicate with…, be based on…, at present, become less like…, rule England, enrich the English language, make use of…, move to…, later in the 18th century, give a separate identity to…, have a very large number of…, fluent English speakers, become the language for…, develop one’s own identity, increase rapidly
6. Making a diagram of the text and retell the text
We shall try to read for the organization of the text and make a diagram of the text organization.
7. Learning about language points
even if=even though: in spite of the fact; no matter whether: He likes to help us even if he is very busy.
communicate with: exchange information or conversation with other people: He learnt to use body language to communicate with deaf customers.
actually =in fact: used when you are adding new information to what you have just said: We’ve known for years. Actually, since we were babies.
Only time will tell: to say that something can only be known in the future: Will China’s national football team enter for the next finals of the World Cup? Only time will tell.
8. Closing down by doing exercises
To end this period you are to finish the following tow exercises.
Fill in the blanks to complete the summary of the text.
British English, 1_____ as Standard English or Oxford English, underwent 2 _____ as the colonization 3 _____ North American and the creation 4 _____ the United States occurred. British English words changed 5 _____ American English words, such 6 _____ centre to center, metre to meter, theatre to theater, favour 7 _____ favor, honour to honor, labour to labor, neighbour 8 _____ neighbor, cheque to check, connexion 9 _____ connection, gaol to jail, the storey of a house 10 _____ story, and tyre for tire. Since 1900, words 11 _____ consistent spelling but different meanings 12 _____ British English to American English include: 13 _____ let for to rent, dual carriageway 14 _____ divided highway, lift for elevator, amber for yellow, 15 _____ ring for to telephone, zebra crossing for pedestrian crossing, and pavement for sidewalk.
（Keys: 1known 2 changes 3 of 4 of 5 into 6 as 7 to 8 to 9 to 10 to 11 with 12 from 13 to 14 for 15 to）
Work out the structure and vocabulary questions.
I think Shanxi has the _____ number of coal miners.
So why has Mr Li changed _____ time?
All people change when thoughts communicate _____ one another.
His report is based more on facts _____ present day situation.
He became less like a father, and _____ like a friend because those who worked for him were all women.
One big change in his life happened _____ he got the job.
Chinese English has become one of the world _____.
Now this company has had its _____ identity.
The writer made use of a _____ vocabulary than anyone else.
However, even on TV and the radio you will notice differences in the _____ people behave.
(Keys: 1 largest, 2 over, 3 with 4 than, 5 more, 6 when, 7 Englishes, 8 own, 9 wider, 10 way)
Period 2 A sample lesson plan for Learning about Language
(Indirect Speech and Indirect Speech: requests & commands)
Introduction
In this period students will be helped by the teacher first to discover useful words and expressions, and then to discover and use useful structures. Direct & Indirect Speech is again presented in systematic details.
Objectives
To help students better their speaking by reading aloud the text to the tape
To help students understand and use indirect speech to express requests and commands
To help students learn to use some useful words and expressions
Procedures
1. Warming up by reading the text aloud to the tape
To begin with we shall read the text learned yesterday to the tape. Try to make your reading aloud as native-like as possible.
2. Building your word power
下列形容词既可作前置定语又可作后置定语, 但意义不同
the present person如今的人
the person present 当时在场的人
a concerned look关切的神情
the comrades concerned有关的同志
the given time特定的时间
the time given给予的时间
a long and involved explanation复杂难懂的解释
the person involved牵涉/卷入（到某事中）的人
the responsible person（褒义）可靠的人
the person responsible （贬义）需要（尤其指为坏事）承担责任的人
[词义辨析] request, demand, require
request意为“恳求；请求”，指通过正式手续突出要求，口气和缓，态度礼貌。常用request sb.to do sth.;
All I requested of you was that you came early. 我对你的唯一要求就是早点来。
He requested his father to leave here.
demand主语是人时，表示坚决要求，坚持要做某事；主语是物时，指迫切需要。常用demand of sb. to do sth.; 不说demand sb. to do sth.。
The workers are demanding better pay. 工人们要求提高工资。
The girl demanded of Mary to give her the book.
Civil rights fighter demands that blacks will be treated equally. (Language Study) 民权战士要求黑人被公平对待。
require表示按照法规、权力提出的要求或命令，指客观需要，含缺此不可之意。常用require to do/ doing(这里动名词的主动形式表示被动)
I have done all that is required by law. 我已做了法律规定的一切。
The baby requires/ needs/ wants to be looked after.
= The baby requires/needs/wants looking after.
demand, request, require后面跟宾语从句时，从句后谓语动词都要用虚拟语气，即should加动词原形。
The teacher requested that all of us (should) attend the meeting.
【相关链接】：be in (great) demand (迫切)需求
3. Learning about direct and indirect speech
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
simple present He said, “I go to school every day.”
simple past He said (that) he went to school every day.
simple past He said, “I went to school every day.”
past perfect He said (that) he had gone to school every day.
present perfect He said, “I have gone to school every day.”
past perfect He said (that) he had gone to school every day.
present progressive He said, “I am going to school every day.”
past progressive He said (that) he was going to school every day.
past progressive He said, “I was going to school every day.”
perfect progressive He said (that) he had been going to school every day,
future (will) He said, “I will go to school every day.”
would + verb name He said (that) he would go to school every day.
future (going to) He said, “I am going to school every day.”
present progressive He said (that) he is going to school every day.
past progressive He said (that) he was going to school every day
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
auxiliary + verb name He said, “Do you go to school every day?” He said, “Where do you go to school?”
simple past He asked me if I went to school every day.* He asked me where I went to school.
imperative He said, “Go to school every day.”
infinitive He said to go to school every day.
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
can He said, “I can go to school every day.”
could He said (that) he could go to school every day.
may He said, “I may go to school every day.”
might He said (that) he might go to school every day.
might He said, “I might go to school every day.”
?
must He said, “I must go to school every day.”
had to He said (that) he had to go to school every day.
have to He said, “I have to go to school every day.”
should He said, “I should go to school every day.”
should He said (that) he should go to school every day.
ought to He said, “I ought to go to school every day.”
ought to He said (that) he ought to go to school every day.
4. Discovering useful structures by learning to offer commands
In groups of four, think of at least three commands your teachers and parents usually give. You may follow these steps.
Choose one who is to give the first command.
Ask another person in your group to tell somebody what you said.
The third person will change the request or command from direct into indirect speech.
Change role so that each person gets the chance to give commands and turn them into indirect speech.
Example:
T: Please don’t talk in class.
S1: What did our teacher tell us? / What did our teacher say?
S2: He told/asked us not to talk in class. / She said not to talk in class.
5. Finding out differences
What are the differences between the request and command?
The replies are given and you are to give a request or a command. Write the sentence down in the blank.
★ A: _______________________________________
B: I’ll go and collect some wood right now, master.
★ A: _______________________________________
B: Of course I’ll be happy to collect your shopping for you.
★ A:__________________________________________
B: Yes. I’ll shut the door at once, Mr. Zhang.
★ A:_________________________________________
B: No, I won’t get your coat if you talk to me like that.
★ A:_________________________________________
B: Sorry. I’ll get that book for you right now.
6. Looking back
高考单选题中的“交际用法”
1. Would you take this along to the office for me? （2006浙江）
A. With pleasure. B. That’s right. C. Never mind. D. Don’t mention it.
21. — Andrew won't like it, you know.
— _____ ? I don't care what Andrew thinks! （2006广东B）
A. So what B. So where C. So why D. So how
35. — Excuse me, Sir, is the swimming pool open all day?
—_____Only from 6:00 pal to 10:00 pm. （2006广东B）
A. That's right. B. Yes, of course C. Sorry, I am not sure D. Sorry, I'm afraid not
28. —It took me ten years to build up my business, and it almost killed me.
—Well, you know what they say. _________. (2006江苏)
A. There is no smoke without fire B. Practice makes perfect
C. All roads lead to Rome D. No pains, no gains
9. －I’m thinking of the test tomorrow. I’m afraid I can’t pass this time.
－ _____! I’m sure you’ll make it. (2006天津）
A. Go ahead B. Good luck C. No problem D. Cheer up
35.―You know who came yesterday?
―Yao Ming? We had a basketball match.
―_____ He came and watched the game. (2006湖北）
A. You guessed it! B. How did you know that? C. Well done! D. That was good news!
26.－These books are too heavy for me to carry.
－_____ . （2006辽宁）
A. You may ask for help B. I will give you a hand C. I will do you a favor D. I’d come to help
Keys: AADDDAB
7. Closing down by going over the learned expressions
To end this period we shall sum up all the expressions learned so far from this unit.
Language chunks from Unit 2 English around the world
in/on a team, the number of/a number of, over time, communicate with, be based on, make use of, have one’s own identity, Only time can tell, solve a problem, believe it or not, no such a…, all over the world, at the top(bottom) of, to this day, sum up, Pardon?, beg your pardon, go abroad, encourage sb. to do sth., work on, feel like sth., from time to time, English-speaking countries, from one…to another, do business, on the air, make notes, fight against, keep…a secret, even though, save time(money), a form of…
Period 3 A sample lesson plan for Using Language
(STANDARD ENGLISH AND DIALECTS)
Introduction
Language is learned to be used in and for communication. So in this period we shall have the students read, listen, write and speak in English, making use of the focused words, expressions, structures and topic ideas covered in this unit.
Objectives
To help students read about STANDARD ENGLISH AND DIALECTS
To help students listen to dialects in English
To help students act out conversation and write their own
To help students brainstorm for reasons why we learn English and make a poster about learning English
Procedures
Warming up by making a list
There is not a single English in the world. There are varieties of Englishes. That is, there are many different dialects of English in the world. We are going to make a list of dialects of the English language.
International English or World English
Commonwealth English, Native American English, North American English
Mid-Atlantic English, South Asian English, East Asian English
2. Reading
⑴Reading for main ideas
Turn to page 13. We are going to read the text quickly to find the topic sentence for each paragraph.
Para. 1: There is no such a thing as Standard English.
Para. 2: English has many dialects whose words and expressions are different from “standard English”.
Para. 3: Geography plays a part in making dialects.
⑵Going to the details
Do you have any difficulties with the structure and the words in the passage?
Now we shall talk about them in detail.
Language focus
believe it or not: used when you are going to say something that is true but surprising: Believe it or not, John cheated in the exam.
there is no such a …as: used to say that a particular person or thing does not exist: These days there is no such a thing as a job for life.
standard English: the form of English that most people in Britain use, and that is not limited to one area or group of people
dialect: a variety of a language spoken only in one area, in which words, or grammar are slightly different from other forms of the same language
play a part/role in: be one of the causes that make something happen: Besides dieting, exercising plays an important part in losing weight.
3. Listening
Let’s go to page 14. We are going to listen to a boy named Buford speaking a southern dialect of AmE with an East, Texas accent.
You know pronunciation is determined by accent. I am speaking with accent, too. It is a Chinese accent.
On the other hand, Buford’s teacher, Jane, speaks standard BrE. That’s what is heard on the BBC.
I am going to play the tape twice for you to listen to answer the four questions on page 14.
Next listen once more to complete the form below giving the standard equivalents for the dialectic words from Buford’s story, using the context.
Dialectic words from Buford’s story
Standard English equivalents
hey
y’all
ain’t
yer
ya
pup
swimmin’
jumpin’
feelin’
‘bout
‘nough
shoulda seen
got outta
hello
everyone
aren’t
your
you
child
swimming
jumping
feeling
about
enough
should have seen
got out of
4. Talking about British English (BrE) and American English
British English (BrE)
American English (AmE)
British English (BrE) is a term used to distinguish the form of the English language used in the British Isles from forms used elsewhere. It includes all the varieties of English used within the Isles, including those found in England, Scotland, Wales, and the island of Ireland.
American English (AmE) is the dialect of the English language used mostly in the United States of America. It is estimated that approximately two thirds of native speakers of English live in the United States. American English is also sometimes called United States English or U.S. English.
5. Learning about the differences between British English (BrE) and American English (AmE)
Amy (American) Lady (British)
subway underground
left left-hand side
keep going straight go straight on
two blocks two streets
right right-hand side
6. Listening to and acting out conversations
On page 15 you see a conversation among Amy, Lady and friends. Read, listen to and act it out in groups of three.
More sample versions for practice:
S1: Excuse me, sir. But I can’t find the drugstore?
S2: Pardon?
S1: I said I couldn’t find the chemist’s shop.
S2: Well, go round the corner on your right-hand side, straight on and cross the flyover. You will find it ahead.
S1: Thank you very much.
S3: What did he say?
S1: He told us to go round the corner on the right, go straight on and then cross the overpass. The drugstore will be ahead.
Self-assessment criteria:
Did you cooperate well with your partner(s) while practicing?
Can you ask for directions and give directions clearly?
Can you express your ideas fluently? If not, what’s your main problem?
Did you go naturally between American English and British English while talking to each other?
7. Writing
⑴Brainstorming for ideas
Why should we learn English? Now in groups of four brainstorm for as many reasons as possible why you are learning English.
Why should we learn English?
To live in an English-speaking country
To work in an English-speaking country
To do studies or researches in English
To learn world history in English
To travel around the world
To study abroad
To have secret communication
To pass an English exam
To get in touch with my roots
To revive my language
To learn about world culture
To learn about other religions
To learn it to meet my linguistic interest
Challenging yourself
Sounds/looks good to me
One language is never enough!
To better understand our thought processes
To understand your own language and culture better
To keep your mind healthy (from Harvey Schmidt)
To find your future husband/wife (from Rico Suave)
To better understand the rest of humankind
To talk to friends without others understanding
To learn songs in other languages
To help people in need
To help you understand how other people think
⑵Making a poster
Why should we do exercises?
Make guesses about your title, reasons and conclusion.
Then, in pairs, work on your poster.
I will ask several pairs to present their posters in class for assessment.
A Sample poster
Why should we do exercises?
I have to keep fit.
I have to make myself strong.
I have to fight illness and disease.
I have to enjoy myself.
I have to build up my skills.
⑶Assessing your writings
Can you give persuasive reasons for the topic on your poster?
Can you verbalize your ideas fluently?
Can you put your own experiences into a broader perspective?
Can you organize your ideas in a logical way?
Have you made a brainstorming map before you set out to design your poster? Do you think it helps your writing?
What kind of mistakes have you made in your writing? What can you do to avoid such mistakes?
8. Closing down by reading article about learning English
My experience of learning English
Many people all over the world speak English as their second language. It is not too much to say that it has become an international language.
Studying English can make life fun. It enables you to watch American movies, read English books and listen to English songs. Moreover, as English is an international language, you will be able to communicate with foreigners when you are on a trip abroad. Traveling will be more interesting that way.
It is a good idea to make friends with foreigners. In my opinion, it is the best way to improve your English. In addition, it will be fun and it will expand your view of the world. If you make friends with a native speaker, you can practice your spoken English more often and then you can communicate with people around the world. You can also become familiar with the customs and habits of different cultures.
There are some people who are afraid to make friends with foreigners because they are not confident of their English. However, many foreigners do not care about grammar. They will get your key words in the sentence and figure out the whole meanings. Therefore, it is unnecessary to be afraid to make friends with them; just go head!
Learning English helps us meet different people and learn more about their culture, thus facilitating mutual understanding and harmony. Briefly said, English is so useful to us that we should all learn it.
Part 3 Teaching Assessment
第三部分 教学测评
I. Structure and vocabulary
1. The local economy still relies on traditional industries _____ farming and mining.
A. such as B. for example C. and so on D. as
2. —I’ve never seen this kind of plant before!
—As far as I know, it’s a plant ____ to the eastern US.
A. native B. home C. house D. family
3. There are six of us in the family, or seven if you____ the dog.
A. contain B. include C. have D. hold
4. Your basic salary will be $15,000 and ___ you’ll receive generous travel expenses.
(2004武汉调研)
A. gradually B. in addition C. totally D. in all
5. We’ve known for years. ____, since we were babies.
A. Ok B. By the way C. Actually D. Let me tell you
6. —Does he know how to work out the problem?
—Yes, he has ____ a good idea to solve it.(2004湖北八校)
A. caught up with B. kept up with C. come up with D. put up with
7. The new English textbook ___10 units, ____ two mainly revision.
A. includes; containing B. includes; including C. contains; containing D. contains; including
8. The student asked his teacher ____ the use of Direct Speech and Indirect Speech.
A. explaining B. explained C. explain D. to explain
9. You are ___ by law to stop your car after an accident.
A. demand B. required C. wanted D. ordered
10. She looks much older than her age ____ ten-year hard work.
A. because B. because of C. as a result D. for
II. A cloze test
So why has English changed over time? All languages 11____(change) when cultures 12______(communicate with) one another. The English 13____ (speak) between about AD 450 and 1150 14_____(be different from) the English spoken today. Actually, it was 15_____(base) more on German than present day English. Then from about 1150 to 1500 English 16_____(change) even more. It became less like German, and more like French because those who17_____(rule) England at that time spoke French. It became closer to the language you are learning now. In the 1600’s, Shakespeare 18______(make use of) a wider vocabulary than ever before. One big change in English usage 19 ___(happen) when Noah Webster wrote the American Dictionary of the English Language, 20_____(give) American English its own identity.
III. Translation
1.世界很多人把英语作为外语来讲。
_____________________________________________________________________
2.学英语你就可以看美国电影、读英文书、听英文歌曲。
_____________________________________________________________________
3.提高英语最好的方法是与外国人交朋友。
_____________________________________________________________________
4.你可以经常和外国人说话来锻炼口语，然后你就可以和世界各地的人交流了。
_____________________________________________________________________
5. 学英语帮助我们了解不同的人和不同的文化。
请你试着把以上五句话连起来读一遍——你能感觉出它们是围绕什么话题展开的吗？
请你添加恰当的连词,把它们组成一篇短文，根据行文需要，可适当扩展。
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Keys：
I. 1-5AABBC 6-10CDDBB
II.1.change 2.communicate with 3.spoken 4.was very different from 5.based 6.changed 7.ruled 8.made use of 9.happened 10.giving
III. 1.Many people all over the world speak English as their foreign language. 2. Studying English can enable you to watch American movies, read English books and listen to English songs. 3. It is the best way to improve your English by making friends with foreigners. 4. You can practice your spoken English more often with a native speaker, and then you can communicate with people around the world. 5. Learning English helps us meet different people and learn more about their different cultures.
A selected English passage for recitation英文精选背诵短文
Learn English through reading
Read English texts as often as you can.
This could be the news, short stories or novels, texts from your textbook or the Internet. Choose an interesting text that is not too difficult for you (otherwise it wouldn’t be fun).
Don’t look up every word which is new to you — even without a dictionary you will understand a lot. Just concentrate on what you do understand and try to find out the rest by intelligent guessing. That works rather well, especially if you are interested in the topic. If you are a football fanatic for example, you probably won’t have problems understanding an English text about football. On the other hand, someone who is better in English than you but not interested in football will have more problems understanding the same text.
Do also watch the news in your native language and try to find English news to some of the topics. Even if you don't understand every word in the English text, you will get the message as you already know what the text is about.
Read between the lines. (185 words)
Unit 2 English around the world
第一部分
About the topic and the structures
单元话题和结构
本单元的话题是English around the world/世界各地的英语，介绍了英语的种种变体，如加拿大英语、英国英语、美国英语、澳大利亚英语和印度英语。
英语在下列国家和地区是第一语言：澳大利亚、巴哈马、爱尔兰、巴巴多斯、百慕大、圭亚那、牙买加、新西兰、圣克里斯多福及尼维斯、特立尼达和多巴哥、英国和美国。
贯穿于本单元的句法项目是“直接引语和间接引语（II）：恳请和要求”。同时单元教材还要求学生学习提出意见、学习组织观念。
单元课时划分上与课本保持一致，即“阅读课、知识课、运用课三课时/三课型划分”。但在实际教学过程中，我们建议教师依据学生基础、教学条件、学校安排等因素，对课本、对教学设计重新划分课时，裁剪、拼接使用教案提供的材料，以便“物尽所用”，达到最佳教学效果。教师也可以按照教案提出的“实际教学过程课时划分建议”进行教学。
Period 1
Reading
阅读课
Warming Up “热身”的目的是为阅读在一定程度上作好话题、词汇和结构的准备，激发学生相关的背景知识和学习兴趣。对此教案提供了“列表”、“问答”和“给出理由”三种不同的“热身”设计供教师选用。实际操作中还需要教师动用诸如板书、投影等辅助手段，以达到最佳教学效果。
Pre-reading 部分要求学生思考“我们为什么学英语？”，帮助学生挖掘和呈现自己的背景知识，为其后的阅读做心理的铺垫和准备。
Reading 是篇exposition说明文，说明了英语的演变和英语的各种变体。教师可以参照教案提供的“表格”、“结构图”引导学生从形式和内容两方面阅读文章，同时为下一节知识课“运用间接引语表达恳请和要求”作好铺垫。
Period 2
Learning about language
知识课
Learning about language 首先要求学生利用录音机朗读课文，强化学生对本单元重点词汇、短语、结构和话题的掌握；然后要求学生完成课本第11、12页提供的“词法”“句法”练习。接下来系统学习和总结“直接引语和间接引语”。
Period 3
Using language
运用课
Using language 重点是依照教案提供的“段落大意”和“词语学习”材料引导学生阅读课本13页短文；然后听方言英语录音，完成教案提供的表格；在“说”了课本15页的会话之后，还可以让学生操练教案提供的会话材料。在“写”之前，可以使用提供的“头脑风暴”，激发思维、获得素材；最后教师可以帮助学生阅读教案提供的关于英语学习经历的范文，加深对英语学习规律性、艰巨性的认识。
实际教学过程课时划分建议
Period 1
将Warming Up、 Pre-reading、Reading和Comprehending整合在一起上一节“阅读课”。
Period 2
将Learning about language 和Workbook中的 USING WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS、USING STRUCTURES 整合在一起上一节“语言知识课”。
Period 3
将Using language 设计为一节包括听说读写单项技能或组合技能训练的“综合技能课（一）”。
Period 4
将Workbook 的READING AND LISTENING和TALKING整合在一起上一节“听说课”。
Period 5
将Workbook 的LISTENING TASK、READING AND WRITING TASK和 SPEAKING TASK整合为一节“综合技能课（二）”。
第二部分
教学资源说明
Section 1
Background
背景
围绕单元话题“各种英语”，教案提供了若干趣味性背景材料。这些材料既可以作为教师教学参考材料为教师所用，也可以直接或改写、重组后作为课堂内外的拓展性阅读材料呈现给学生。
Section 2
Explanation
解析
重点针对“阅读课型”中的课文难句，教案提供了详尽的，就句论句的解析和翻译，并且以解析的焦点话题为线索，进行了一定的归纳、辨析和总结，以帮助教师更好地实施“语言形式”的教学。
Section 3
Vocabulary
词汇
按照课本单元词汇表顺序，教案重点提供动词、短语搭配的讲解。所提供的例句，经典、地道、实用、易懂，完全可以直接用于教学。
第三部分
教学测评说明
围绕单元词法、句法项目，教案提供了长短不一的“单元教学测评”，并备有参考答案供教师使用。有些测评题目直接源于历年高考试卷，更具有说服力和实用性。
Section 2 Notes to difficult sentences from Unit 2
English around the world
…English became less like German… 英语变的更不像德语了……
句子中的became是系动词的一种，叫半系动词。系动词分如下几种：
1）状态系动词： 用来表示主语状态，只有be一词，例如：He is a teacher. 他是一名教师。（is与表语一起说明主语的身份。）
2）持续系动词： 用来表示主语继续或保持一种状况或态度，主要有keep, rest, remain, stay, lie, stand, 例如：He always kept silent at meeting. 他开会时总保持沉默。
3）表像系动词： 用来表示“看起来像”这一概念，主要有seem, appear, look, 例如：He looks tired. 看起来很累。
4）感官系动词： 感官系动词主要有feel, smell, sound, taste, 例如：This kind of cloth feels very soft.
5）变化系动词： 这些系动词表示主语变成什么样，变化系动词主要有become, grow, turn, fall, get, go, come, run. 例如：He became mad after that. 自那之后，他疯了。
6）终止系动词： 表示主语已终止动作，主要有prove, turn out, 表达“证实”，“变成”之意，例如：The rumor proved false. 这谣言证实有假。
高考链接
Happy birthday, Alice! So you have_____ twenty-one already! （2004天津）
A. become B. turned C. grown D. passed
English now is also spoken as a foreign or second language in South Asia. 在南亚，英语同样是作为外语或者是第二语言使用的。
句子中的as是介词，意思是“当作”，作副词意思是“同样地”，作连词意思是“当…….之时”。
例句与用法:
(1) It is just as you like. 事情就如你喜欢的那样。
(2) He can run as fast as I can. 他能跑得和我一样快。
(3) The kitten uses that box as its bed. 小猫把那个盒子当做它的床。
(4) Jim runs fast, but I run just as fast. 吉姆跑得快，但我跑得也一样快。
(5) As you weren't there I left a message. 因为你不在那里，我留了个信儿。
(6) As she's been ill perhaps she'll need some help. 她由于生病可能需要些帮助。
(7) As if unsure of where she was, she hesitated and looked round.
她仿佛茫然不知身在何处，犹犹豫豫向四周打量。
(8) Cyprus, as you know, is an island in the Mediterranean. 如你所知，塞浦路斯是地中海的岛国。
高考链接
It is generally believed that teaching is _____ it is a science. (NMET 2001)
A. as art much as B. much an art as C. as an art much as D. as much an art as
Section 3 Words and expressions from Unit 2
English around the world
because of
因为,由于
1. Navigation is difficult on this river because of the hidden rocks.
因为河上有暗礁，所以在这条河上航行很困难。
2. Her company is suing her for slander because of her remarks about their safety record.
由于她发表了关于公司安全记录的言论，该公司正以诽谤罪起诉她。
3. Many beautiful fish are fast disappearing because of the severe pollution.
因为污染严重，许多美丽的鱼类正在面临绝种。
4. The police are advising motorists to reduce speed because of the fog.
由于有雾，警察告诫驾车者减慢速度。
5. They've surcharged us 10% on the price of the holiday because of a rise in air fares.
因飞机票涨价, 他们在度假费用中向我们增收了10%附加费。
6. Because of his irresolute character, we were defeated at last.
因为他性格的软弱，我们最终被打败了。
7. We win the game because of his participation. 由于他的参与，我们赢了比赛。
8. I did not go to the cinema because of the intense cold. 我因为严寒没出去看电影。
高考链接
1. Parents should take seriously their children’s requests for sunglasses _____eye protection is necessary in sunny weather. （2004上海）
A. because B. through C. unless D. if
2. It was with great joy_____ he received the news that his lost daughter had been found.
（2004福建）
A．because B．which C．since D．that
3. ______ two exams to worry about, I have to work really hard this weekend. （2004北京）
A. With B. Besides C. As for D. Because of
4. Roses need special care _____ they can live through winter. （2004全国）
A. because B. so that C. even if D. as
（Keys: ADAB）
come up
上来,上升,抬头
1. She comes up for re-election next year. 在明年的重选中她参加竞选。
2. The snowdrops are just beginning to come up. 雪花莲刚刚开始长出地面。
3. I'm afraid something urgent has come up; I won't be able to see you tonight.
很抱歉, 有些急事; 今晚不能见你了。
4. The water came up to my neck. 水升到我的颈部。
5. Their holiday in France didn't come up to expectations. 他们在法国度假未尽如人意。
6. My number came up and I won 100. 我的数字彩票中奖了, 我赢得100英镑。
7. We expect to come up against a lot of opposition to the scheme.
我们预计这个计划要遭到很多人反对。
The question is bound to come up at the meeting. 会上必然要讨论这个问题。
base
n. 基底,垒
v. 以...作基础
1. Many languages have Latin as their base. 许多语言都以拉丁语为基础。
2. How many military bases are they maintaining on foreign soil?
他们在外国保持多少个军事基地？
3. This film is based on a novel by D.H.Lawrence. 这部影片是根据D.H.劳伦斯的小说改编的。
4. His base conduct was condemned by everyone. 他的无耻行为受到所有人的谴责。
5. Her reply caught him off base. 她的答复使他不知所措。
6. You're a bit off base there. 你在那个地方有点不对头。
7. I base my hopes on the good news we had yesterday。
我把希望寄托在我们昨天得到的好消息上。
8. His arguments had a sound economic base. 他的立论在经济方面是有充分根据的。
at present
现在,目前
1. There is very little profit in selling newspapers at present. 现在卖报纸利润很少。
2. They have no intention of getting married at present. 他们目前没有结婚的打算。
3. Never before have they been so inspired and so daring as at present.
从来没有看见他们像现在这样精神振奋，意气风发。
4. The international situation is very delicate at present. 目前的国际形势极其微妙。
5. I am quite at leisure at present if you want me to help you. 如果你要我帮忙, 我现在有空。
6. I have no enough material in hand at present. 目前我手头没有足够的资料。
7. At no time has the country been more prosperous than at present.
我国任何时候都没有现在这样繁荣。
8. At present, I don't want to get married. 目前, 我还不想结婚。
make use of
利用
1. As to intelligence, the boy has more than he can possibly make use of.
至于那男孩的才智, 多得他都用不完。
2. She makes use of people she meets as raw material for her fiction.
她把她所遇见的人们作为她创作小说的素材。
such as
例如,诸如
1. I know many of them, such as John, Peter, and Tom.
我认识他们当中的很多人，例如约翰、彼得和汤姆。
2. The Roman languages such as French, Italian, are all derived from Latin.
拉丁语系, 例如法语, 意大利语, 都起源于拉丁语。
3. An antibody found in the blood of individuals having a genetic predisposition to allergies such as asthma and hay fever.
反应素个体血液中的一种抗体，可以对诸如气喘病和光粉热这些变态反应产生预先的基因处理。
4. We have different pies, such as apple, cherry, and strawberry pies.
我们有不同的派，例如苹果、樱桃和草莓派。
5. It's more useful to learn modern languages, such as English and German, than Latin.
学习英语和德语等现代语言比学习拉丁语更为有用。
6. In this paragraph there are many nouns, such as boy, girl, and book.
这一段里面有很多名词，例如男孩、女孩和书本。
7. Many letters in the alphabet such as b, c, d, etc are consonants.
字母表中的许多字母像b，c，d，等等都是辅音字母。
command
n. 命令,指挥,控制
v. 命令,指挥,支配
n.[计算机] DOS命令: 引用辅助命令处理器
1. This great man is able to command everyone's respect. 这位伟人有资格获得大家的尊敬。
2. The general commanded his men to attack the city. 将军下令部下攻城。
3. The army is under the king's direct command. 军队由国王直接统率。
4. The castle commanded the entrance to the valley. 该城堡控制着峡谷的入口。
5. The ship's captain commands all the officers and men. 舰长统率舰上全体官兵。
6. Does seniority give one the right to command? 难道年长资深就有权发号施令吗?
7. I am here at the King's command. 在下奉谕旨至此。
8. The plight of the famine victims commands everyone's sympathy.
饥民的苦境值得大家同情。
request
n. 要求,请求
vt. 请求,要求
1. Full details will be sent on request. 有详细材料备索。
2. They've made an urgent request for international aid. 他们紧急请求国际援助。
3. Your presence is requested at the meeting. 请你务必出席会议。
4. By popular request, the chairman was re-elected. 徇众要求，主席获重选连任。
5. Your requests will be granted. 你的请求能够获准。
6. Catalogues are available on request. 备有目录供索取。
7. Dear Sir, I have been requested to inform you that... 敬启者: 兹通知阁下...
8. I came at your (special) request. 我是（特别）应你要求而来的。
recognize
v. 认出,认可,承认
1. His thorough knowledge and competence were recognized.
他的渊博的学识和工作能力得到了承认。
2. Can you recognize her from this picture? 你能从这张照片中认出她吗？
3. The firm recognized Tom's outstanding work by giving him an extra bonus.
公司发给汤姆一笔额外奖金以表彰他工作出色。
4. He recognized his lack of qualifications/that he was not qualified for the post.
他承认自己不够条件[没有资格]担任那个职务。
5. She could hardly recognize her son through the mist of tears that filled her eyes.
她泪眼蒙蒙，几乎不能认出自己的儿子。
6. He walked along in the shadows hoping no one would recognize him.
他走在暗处，希望没有人认出他来。
7. At that instant she did not recognize the man that had kidnapped her.
在那一瞬间, 她没有认出绑架她的人。
8. I think I recognize your hoof in it. 我看出你在这里面插了一手。
Unit 2 English Around the World
Ⅰ单元教学目标
技能目标Goals
Talk about English and its development, Different kinds of English
Talk about difficulties in language communication
Learn to make dialogue using request & commands
Learn to transfer from direct into indirect speech
Learn to give opinions and organize ideas by way of brainstorming
Learn to make a poster showing your ideas clearly
Ⅱ目标语言
功能句式
Talk about English and its development
Refer to Introduction in the teachers’ book
Talk about difficulties in language communication
Different speaker may come from different place, so they may use different words and dialect, such as subway-underground、 left-left-hand-side 、two blocks two streets.
Make dialogues using request or command:
Pardon? Could you repeat that, please?
I beg your pardon? Can you speak more slowly, please?
I don’t understand. Sorry. I can’t follow you.
Could you say that again, please? How do you spell it, please?
词汇
1.四会词汇
include role international native elevator flat apartment rubber petrol gas modern culture AD actually present(adj.) rule(v.) vocabulary usage identity government Singapore Malaysia rapidly phrase candy lorry command request retell polite boss standard mid-western southern Spanish eastern northern recognize accent lightning direction ma’am subway block
2. 认读词汇
Shakespeare Noah Webster Lori dialect Houston Texas Buford Lester catfish
3. 固定词组
play a role (in) because of come up such as play a part (in)
语法
Command & request
Open the door. Please open the door.
Would you please open the door?
Indirect Speech
He told (asked) me to open the door.
Ⅲ.教材分析和教材重组:
1. 教材分析
本单元的中心话题是 “English language and its development, different kinds of English”. 通过对世界英语这一话题的探讨,加强学生对英语语言的了解,对当代语言特别是英语发展趋势的了解.世界在发展,时代在前进,语言作为交流的工具,也随着时代的发展而变化.由于英语在世界上的广泛使用,它不断地吸收、交融、容纳、创新,这就形成了各种各样带有国家、民族、地区特色的英语. 没有人们认为的那种唯一的标准英语。尽管如此，我们还是要通过本课文的学习让同学们感受、了解美国英语、澳大利亚英语、印度英语、新加坡英语等都有自己的规律和惯用法，和不同的发音规律。
1．1 Warming Up简要介绍了世界英语的分支以及英语语言在不同国家产生的差异，使学生感受英语语言的多文化、多层次、多元性，对英国英语和美国英语的不同有一个粗浅的了解。
1．2 Pre-reading通过两个问题引发学生对课文主题的思考，以便参与课堂活动。
1．3 Reading简要地说明英语语言的起源、发展变化、形成原因，以及它的发展趋势。
1．4 Comprehending主要是检测学生对课文基本内容的理解程度。
1．5 Learning About the Language主要通过各种练习帮助学生重温本单元前几个部分所学的新单词和短语，同时也通过新的例子展现了美国英语、英国英语的差异，并着重介绍了本单元的语法项目（Request & Command and Indirect Speech）。
1．6 Using Language其中的reading and talking主要介绍了当今世界各地各国说英语有自己的特色，即便是美国东西部、南北部，说话均有所不同。为帮助培养跨文化意识，可以让学生学完课文后讨论中国的方言，使他们感受到本国的文化差异。
2．教材重组
2．1 导入 把Warming Up 作为一堂课。
2．2 精读 把Pre-reading、Reading 和 Comprehending整合在一起作为一堂课精读课。
2．3 语言学习 把Learning About Language和Workbook中的Using Words, Using Structures 结合在一起。
2．4 写作
2．5听和说 把课文中的听和说整合成一堂课。
2．6 练习课 workbook exercises & other Exx.
3．课型设计与课时分配
1st period Warming Up
2nd period Reading &Language Study
3rd period Learning About Language r& grammar
4th period Writing
5th period Listening & Speaking
6th period Exercises
Unit 2 English around the world
Period One Warming up
一、 教学目标（teaching aims）student’s book; warming up
1、 能力目标(ability aim)
a. Enable students to talk about the world Englishes
b. Enable students to talk about the differences between Am. English and Br. English
2、 语言目标(language aim)
more than; include; play an important role; because of; international; native; elevator; flat; apartment; rubber; petrol; gas;
二、 教学重难点(Teaching important points)
a. Students learn about the world Englishes and the differences between Am. English and Br. English.
b. Students can understand the jokes caused by the misunderstanding of different Englishes.
三、 教学方法(Teaching method)
a. Individual, pair or group work to finish each task.
b. Listening
c. Discussion
四、 教具准备(Teaching aids)
a computer; a tape-recorder; a projector
五、 教学步骤(Teaching procedure)
Step I. Leading-in
Fun time: warm the students up by asking them to greet each other with their dialects. At the same time, lead the students to think about the topic of this unit-- “language”.
Step II. Warming up.
1) A quiz about the national flag of countries speaking English as their first or second language .Lead the students to the topic “English Around the world”.
2) Ask the students to think about the question about the “world Englishes”.
Step III. Talking about “world Englishes”, especially the differences between “American English” and “British English”
1) Listen to a dialogue between an American and an Englishman. And try to find out the cause of the misunderstanding between them.
2) Talk about the differences between American English and British English.( mainly about vocabulary and spelling)
Step IV. Speaking Task.
Students make up a dialogue with a misunderstanding caused by the differences between “American English” and “British English” like the dialogue they listened to.
Unit 2 English Around the World
Period Two Reading
教学目标（Teaching aims）
Get the students to know English language and its development and different kinds of English through this passage.
教学内容( Teaching contents)
Get the knowledge of English language and its development and different kinds of English.
能力目标(Ability aim)
Get some knowledge of different kinds of English
语言目标(Language aim)
Grasp some words and expressions such as, play a role in /because of/ come up/ play a part in and learn the grammar-- the indirect speech of the imperative clause
教学重难点(Teaching important points)
The indirect speech of the imperative clause
教学方法( Teaching methods)
task- based approach
教具准备(Teaching aids)
multi-media computer
教学步骤(Teaching procedure)
Step 1 Warming up.
Warm the students up by ask them to tell the differences between American English and British English.
Step 2 Pre-reading.
Ask the students to discuss some questions about “English” in pairs.
1. How many people speak English in the world today?
2. Why do so many people speak English?
3. What has helped to spread English around the world?
4. Do you think it important for Chinese to learn English? Why?
Step 3 Reading.
1) The first-reading.
Ask the students to scan the text and choose the correct answer in the book.
2) The second-reading.
Ask the students to read the text paragraph by paragraph, and get some detail information.
a. For the first and second paragraph, students answer some questions
b. For the third and fourth paragraph, students find out the information to fill in the table of the development of English.
c. For the last paragraph, students find out the reason why India speaks English.
Step 4 Discussions:
1. Do you think it matters what kind of English you learn? Why?
2, Why do you think people all over the world want to learn English?
3, Do you think Chinese will become the most popular language in the world instead of English in the future?
Step 5 Extension
Give the students some information of origin of British English and American English.
The formation of British English
From 17th century—19th century
The UK colonized Ireland and joined with Scotland long ago
Colonized ; North America, the Caribbean India, including Pakistan, Bangladesh, Australia, New Zealand, Palestine, parts of sub-Sahara Africa, Hong Kong, Singapore and the Pacific Islands
The formation of American English
American colonial rulers also brought their English to:
Hawaii, Puerto Rico, the Philippines and other Pacific island in the late 19th century
Introduce the situation of English speaking in China.
Tell them some proper items.
Native speaker: A person who speaks English since birth but who may not speak a standard form of it.
L1 speaker: A native speaker of English who uses it as his or her mother tongue or an immigrant to an English-speaking country who always prefer to use it
ESL: English as a Second Language
L2 speaker: A second language speaker of English
EFL: English as a Foreign Language
Step 6 Homework
1. Finish the exercise on page 11.
2. Read passage on page 51 The Oxford English Dictionary and make notes about Murray’s life.
Unit 2 English around the world
Period Three Learning about Language
一、 教学目标（teaching aims）student’s book; Discovering useful structures
1、 能力目标(ability aim)
a. Enable students to tell the differences between a request and a command.
b. Enable students to learn about the Indirect Speech ( requests & commands)
c. Enable students to use the Indirect Speech (requests & commands)
2、 语言目标(language aim)
command; request; retell; polite; boss
Indirect Speech (requests and commands)
二、 教学重难点(Teaching important points)
a. Students learn about the differences between a request and a command.
b. Students learn about the Indirect Speech( requests and commands)
c. Students can use the indirect speech.
三、 教学方法(Teaching method)
a. Individual, pair or group work to finish each task.
b. Discovering the structure through examples
c. Practice
四、 教具准备(Teaching aids)
a computer; a projector
五、 教学步骤(Teaching procedure
Step 1. Warming-up (Revision)
Warm the students up by asking them to go over the Direct Speech and Indirect Speech..
Do some exercises : change a statement or a question into Indirect Speech.
Step 2. Talk about Request and Command.
1) Talk about the polite and Impolite tune.
2) Change the commands into Requests.
3) Learn to give requests or commands according to the situations.
Step 3. Talk about how to change a request and a command into Indirect Speech.
ask(ed) sb (not) to do sth
tell/told sb (not) to do sth
Step 4. Practise changing a request or a command into Indirect Speech.
Step 5. Using the structure.
A game: choose two students act as two robots. One listens to the requests, the other listens to the commands. Other students give either requests or commands, and the robots do what the students asked them to do.
Unit 2; English Around the World
(Period Four) writing
教学目标（Teaching aims）
a. Let students get to know how to write a statement by using brainstorming
b. Try to use connecting words or sentences to make it as an essay or passage not just several sentences.
教学内容( Teaching contents)
Write a statement
能力目标(Ability aim)
Using the brainstorming way to collect sentences and then arrange them properly
语言目标(Language aim)
I think,
I believe,
In my opinion…
We learn English to do…
教学重难点(Teaching important points)
How to arrange sentence correctly .
Try to use connecting words.
教学方法( Teaching methods)
Brainstorming way
教具准备(Teaching aids)
multi-media computer
教学步骤(Teaching procedure)
Step1 Leading in
Use the brainstorming way to ask students “Why should we live?” which is a simple question, at the same time there might be various answers to the question, which will stimulate their interest.
Step2 Presentation
Also use the brainstorming way to ask “Why should we learn English?” and “how can learning English help China?”
Step3 A poster
Write a poster to collect all their ideas. try to use completely sentences, such as :
I like to study English and use it for business in the future.
I want to study English well so that I can read English books.
Say, come to the blackboard and write down your ideas, trying to use complete sentences, such as:
If I learn English well, I can bring in the advanced foreign technology to China. So China will become stronger.
I decide to learn English well, in this case I can read many English novels, so I can translate them into Chinese, then more Chinese can know more things about the world.
Step4 Write an essay
The title is “Do we need to learn English?”
Step5 Display the structure on how to write the essay.
1. State your points of view.
2. Show the supporting reasons.
3. Get a conclusion
Step6 Show them the connecting words which can help them to join the sentences and paragraphs.
Illustration: I think , I believe, In my opinion, As far as I am concerned…
Addition: firstly, secondly, then, besides, at last…
Contrast: however, but , on the other hand…
Summary: in short, in a word, therefore, so…
Step7 Give them a simple example which is not complete
Do we need to learn English?
I strongly think we not only need learn English but also learn it well…Why should we learn it…How can learning English help China in the future?…So…
Step8 Homework My Experience of Learning English
Para1. My problems in learning English.
Para 2. How I can improve my English.
Para.3. What I like about learning English.Para
Para 4. How I hope to make use of my English.
Unit 2: English Around the World
Period Five Listening & speaking
一、学目标(Teaching aims)
教材(Teaching materials) listening materials on p12 and p14 on the textbook, another one attached
1、 能力目标(ability aim) enable Ss to catch the listening materials and understand them and distinguish British and American English, try using them in dialogues.
2、 语言目标(Language aim)distinguish some words used in British and American English 、 some dialect and accent
二、教学重难点(Teaching important points)
understand words used in British and American which have the same meanings and some dialect accent
三、教学方法(Teaching method)
listening and talking
四、教学准备(Teaching aids)
tape recorder and get students’ answer sheet printed out
五、教学步骤(Teaching procedure)
Step 1 Listening
Listening 2 (text book p14 )
Listen to the tape, getting to know American dialect and accent.
Step 2 Speaking
After listening to different dialects and accents, see if Ss know how to pronounce the following words:
ask after either neither kilometer box……and more
Unit Two :English Around the World
The Sixth period Exercises
一．教学目标：(Teaching aims)
Finish the exercises on the workbook
1．能力目标：(ability aim)
a) Enable the students to command “commands and requests”
b) Through cooperative work find out correct answers themselves
2．语言目标：(language aim)
Full understanding of the readings
二．教学重难点(Teaching important points)
Understanding the main ideas of the passages
三．教学方法(Teaching method)
a. Fast and careful reading
b. Individual, pair or group work to finish each task
c. Discussion
四．教具准备(Teaching aids)
a computer
五．教学步骤(teaching procedure)
Step 1.Warming up
Step 2: speaking task (Review commands and requests)
Offer them situations and try to make dialogues with commands and requests
Step 3 :Do the “Reading” on P13 and answer questions on it briefly.
Step 4: Finish the “Reading Task” at p.51 and complete the form after it.
Step 5: Group work:
Ask them to sum up what codes and short forms of words they often use when they often chat on the net with others.
Step 6: check up their researching result.
Step 7: homework.
Unit 2 English around the world
Background information on English Around the World
I. British English, American English and Chinese
Cars and Driving
British English
American English
Chinese
car park
parking lot
停车场
driving license
driver's license
驾照
flyover
overpass
天桥
four way
crossroads
十字路口
hire car
rental car
租用车
motorway
freeway(Western U.S.)
expressway (Eastern U.S.)
高速公路
petrol
gasoline(gas)
汽油
tyre
tire
轮胎
windscreen
windshield
挡风玻璃
Food
British English
American English
Chinese
biscuit
cookie
饼干
chips
French fries
炸土豆片
crisps
potato chips
油炸土豆片
jacket potato
baked potato
带皮烤的马铃薯
jam
jelly
酱
mince
hamburger
碎牛肉；牛肉饼
porridge
oatmeal
稀饭
pudding
dessert
布丁；甜点
sweet
dessert
餐后甜点
tin
can
罐头
Others
British English
American English
Chinese
autumn
fall
秋天
bill
check
清单
bin liner
trash bag
垃圾袋
botanic garden
botanical garden
植物园
braces
suspenders
吊裤带；吊杆
charity
non-profit organization
慈善机构
chemist’s
pharmacy/drug store
药店
cinema
movie theater, theater
电影院
coach
bus
长途汽车
DIY
do it yourself
自己动手做
dustbin
trash can
垃圾箱
engaged (as in telephone)
busy
（电话）占线
fee (for schooling)
tuition
学费
fit (verb)
equip, fit out
安装
flat
apartment
单元住宅
football
soccer
足球
freephone
toll-free
免费电话
toll-free
dress (noun)
外衣；服装
gents
men’s room
男厕
headmaster
principal
男厕
hire (hire a car)
rent (rent a car)
租借
holiday
vacation
假日
ill
sick
有病的
in future
in the future
未来，将来
in hospital
in the hospital
住院
join the train
get on the train
上火车
jumper
sweater
毛线衫
licence (noun)
license
执照
lift
elevator
电梯
lorry
truck
卡车
maths
math
数学
nil
zero
零
note
bill
纸币
on stream
on line
在生产中
post
mail
邮件
queue
line
长队
railway
railroad
铁路
return
round trip
返程
rise (noun - in salary)
raise
加薪
rubber
eraser
橡皮擦
rucksack
backpack
背包
shopping trolley
shopping car
购物手推车
“sorry”
“excuse me”, “pardon me”
对不起
stand (for election)
run (for election)
竞选
swear word
curse word
咒语
subway
underpass
餐巾
subway
underpass
地下道；地铁
tea towel
dish towel
餐巾
telephone box
telephone booth
电话亭
toilet
restroom
厕所
torch
flashlight
火炬
trainers
sneakers
运动鞋
transport (noun)
transportation
运输
trousers
pants
裤子
trolley
cart
手推车
tube
subway
地铁
underground
subway
地铁
vest
undershirt
背心
waistcoat
vest
马甲
II. Different English, different spellings
American English
theater, center, liter
color, honor, labor, favor, vapor
traveler, woolen
skillful, fulfill
check
program
story
realize, analyze, apologize
defense, offense, license
burned
dreamed
smelled
spelled
spoiled
British English
theatre, center, litre
colour, honour, labour, favour, vapour
traveler, woolen
skilful, fulfil
cheque
programme
storey
realise, analyse, apologise
defence, offence, licence
burnt/burned
dreamt/dreamed
smelt/smelled
spelt/spelled
spoilt/spoiled
Words and expressions from Unit 2 English Around the World
Include 1. v. to be one of the parts; to make something or someone part of a larger group: Our tour party included several retired couples. The team is looking strong; especially now they have included Beckham. 2. including & included: Everyone has to go to the dentist’s, you included. There were twelve of us, including Tom and me.
role: n. 1. the character played by an actor in a play or film; the position that someone has in society or an organization: Matthews plays the role of a young doctor in the film. Women are often forced into a supportive role in the family. 2. play a leading/major/key role in=be important in making changes happen: Mandela played a leading role in ending apartheid in South Africa.
because of=as the result of a particular thing or someone’s action: He had to retire because of ill health. c.f. She got the job because she was the best candidate.
native: 1. adj. your native country or town is the place where you were born: They never saw their native land again. 2. native language/tongue: the language you spoke when you first learned to speak. 3. n. a person who was born in a particular place：Are you a native of New York?
come up: 1. to be mentioned：A lot of new questions came up at the meeting. 2. to be about to happen soon：Don’t you have a birthday coming up soon? 3. to move near someone or something by walking: Come up to the front of the room so everyone can see you.
Other verbal phrases of “come”
come about=to happen in a way that seems impossible to control;
come across= to meet or find something or someone by chance;
come along=get along; to appear at a time you don’t expect; to encourage sb. to try harder;
come by=to obtain something that is difficult to find; come up with=to think of an idea;
(The small word “come” has many phrasal verbs. It is better to ask the students to refer to a good dictionary.)
present: adj. 1. be present: a) to be in a particular place: How many people were present at the meeting yesterday?(opposite of “ absent”) b) to be remembered for a long time: The memory of the disaster last year is still present in her mind. 2. (only before noun) existing now: What’s your present address? c.f. What he said amused all the people present.
such as: used to give an example of something; such…as/that: used to emphasize that there is a small amount of something or that it is of good quality: The local economy still relies on traditional industries such as farming and mining. c.f. Such food as they gave us was warm and nutritious.
Command: 1. vi & vt. to tell someone officially to do something, esp. if you are a military leader or a king to get something such as attention or respect: The general commanded that the regiment (should) attack at once. Or The General commanded the regiment to attack at once. Dr. Young commands a great deal of respect as a surgeon. 2. get/ have a good command of English=to get/have a good mastery of English.
request: 1. vt. to ask for something politely or formally request that (should) + v/ request sb. to do sth.: The staff requested that he reconsider his decision. All club members are requested to attend the annual meeting. 2. n. a polite demand for something: They have made a urgent request for international aid.
recognize: vt. 1. to know who someone is or what something is, because you have ever seen them or it before: Susan came home so thin and weak that her own children hardly recognized her. 2. to accept that an organization has legal or official authority: British medical qualifications are recognized in Canada. 3. be recognized as= to be thought of as being very good by a lot of people: Jules Verne’s novel was recognized as a work of genius.
Language focus:
even if=even though: in spite of the fact; no matter whether: He likes to help us even if he is very busy.
communicate with: exchange information or conversation with other people: He learnt to use body language to communicate with deaf customers.
actually=in fact: used when you are adding new information to what you have just said: We’ve known for years. Actually, since we were babies.
be based on…:
make use of: use sth. available
Only time will tell: to say that something can only be known in the future: Will China’s national football team enter for the next finals of the World Cup? Only time will tell.
Language Chunks from Unit 2 English around the world
be different from, pay a role(part) in, because of, either …or…, in/on a team, the number of/a number of, than ever before, even if, comp up to, over time, communicate with, be based on, make use of, have one’s own identity, such as, Only time can tell, native speaker, as well as, solve a problem, believe it or not, no such a…, all over the world, at the top(bottom) of, pen friends, to this day, sum up, Pardon?, beg your pardon, go abroad, be used for, more of a …, encourage sb. to do sth., work on, feel like sth., from time to time, English-speaking countries, from one…to another, do business, on the air, would like sb. to do, make notes, fight against, keep…a secret, even though, save time(money), a form of…
Direct and Indirect Speech
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
simple present He said, “I go to school every day.”
simple past He said (that) he went to school every day.
simple past He said, “I went to school every day.”
past perfect He said (that) he had gone to school every day.
present perfect He said, “I have gone to school every day.”
past perfect He said (that) he had gone to school every day.
present progressive He said, “I am going to school every day.”
past progressive He said (that) he was going to school every day.
past progressive He said, “I was going to school every day.”
perfect progressive He said (that) he had been going to school every day,
future (will) He said, “I will go to school every day.”
would + verb name He said (that) he would go to school every day.
future (going to) He said, “I am going to school every day.”
present progressive He said (that) he is going to school every day.
past progressive He said (that) he was going to school every day
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
auxiliary + verb name He said, “Do you go to school every day?” He said, “Where do you go to school?”
simple past He asked me if I went to school every day.* He asked me where I went to school.
imperative He said, “Go to school every day.”
infinitive He said to go to school every day.
??
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
simple present + simple present He says, “I go to school every day.”
simple present + simple present He says (that) he goes to school every day.
present perfect + simple present He has said, “I go to school every day.”
present perfect + simple present He has said (that) he goes to school every day.
past progressive + simple past He was saying, “I went to school every day.”
past progressive + simple past He was saying (that) he went to school every day.
past progressive + past perfect He was saying (that) he had gone to school every day.
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
can He said, “I can go to school every day.”
could He said (that) he could go to school every day.
may He said, “I may go to school every day.”
might He said (that) he might go to school every day.
might He said, “I might go to school every day.”
?
must He said, “I must go to school every day.”
had to He said (that) he had to go to school every day.
have to He said, “I have to go to school every day.”
?
should He said, “I should go to school every day.”
should He said (that) he should go to school every day.
ought to He said, “I ought to go to school every day.”
ought to He said (that) he ought to go to school every day.
1．在某些方面___________________________________
答案：in some ways
2．或者……或者___________________________________
答案：either…or
3．起重要作用___________________________________
答案：play an important part / role
4．走近；达到___________________________________
答案：come up to
5．以……为基础___________________________________
答案：be based on / base…on…
6．接近于___________________________________
答案：be close to
7．在17世纪___________________________________
答案：in the 1600's / in the 1600s…
8．利用___________________________________
答案：make use of
9．信不信由你___________________________________
答案：believe it or not
10．玩得快乐___________________________________
答案：have fun
11．请求___________________________________
答案：make a request
12．经过时间___________________________________
答案：over time
13．即使___________________________________
答案：even if / even though
14．……的数量___________________________________
答案：the number of…
15．解决问题___________________________________
答案：solve the problem
16．另一门语言___________________________________
答案：a second language
17．带去___________________________________
答案：take…with
Unit 2 English around the world 单元概述
本单元主要围绕English around the world这一主题介绍了英语的使用情况、发展情况及各地不同的方言。
第二单元English around the world的设计可分为五部分。第一部分warming up；第二部分learn something about the road to modern English；第三部分learn something about words and expressions；第四部分the structure which expresses commands and requests；第五部分using language。
第一部分通过比较英美两种英语中存在的差异及猜测同义异形单词的所属类别，使学生对world English这一概念有所感知，为其余部分的学习提供认知基础。
第二部分以一篇阅读文章（The road to modern English）的方式呈现，介绍了英语的分布、使用、发展等情况，使学生对world English的由来更为了解，并通过讨论等方式让学生对英语的重要性有更深的体会，激发学生对英语的求知欲。
第三部分是语言学习板块。通过单词的讲解及运用，更好地掌握一些重要的词汇。这一部分还包括英美两种英语中不同搭配的练习以及听力练习，让学生更好地认知world English这一概念。
第四部分为语言学习板块，主要是掌握命令、请求的句式以及此种句式直接引语及间接引语的转换。
第五部分是语言运用部分，包含了听、说、读、写4个板块。
●课时安排
本单元教学可分为7个课时。第一课时为reading；第二课时为language points；第三课时为grammar；第四课时为listening；第五课时为extensive reading；第六课时为writing and speaking；第七课时为consolidation and evaluation。
The history of the English language is divided into three periods: The period from 450 to 1150 is known as the Old English. It is described as the period of full inflections（词尾变化）, since during most of this period the case endings of the noun, the adjective and the conjunction（结合）of the verbs were not weakened. Old English was a highly inflected language. It had a complete system（体系）of declensions（变格）with four cases and conjunctions. So Old English grammar differs from Modern English grammar in these aspects（方面）.
The period from 1150 is known as the Middle English period. It is known as the period of reducing inflections. This period was marked by important changes in the English language. The Norman Conquest was the cause of these changes. The change of this period had a great effect on both grammar and vocabulary. In this period many Old English words were lost, but thousands of words borrowed from French and Latin appeared in the English vocabulary. In the Middle English period grammatical gender（性）of nouns disappeared, completely replaced by the natural gender.
The modern English period extends from 1500 to the present day. The Early modern English period extends from 1500 to 1700. The chief effect of this time was great humanistic（人文主义的）movement of the Renaissance. The influence of Latin and Greek on English was great. The nineteenth and twentieth centuries are a period of rapid expansion（扩张）for the English. Vocabulary in the history of the English language.
The development of the English language in America can be separated into three periods: The first period extends from the settlement of Jamestown in 1607 to the end of colonial（殖民地的）times. In this period the population in America numbered about four million people, 90 percent of whom came from Britain. The second period covers the expansion of the original（最初的）thirteen colonies. This time may be said to close with the Civil War, about 1860. This period was marked by the arrival of the new immigrants（移民）from Ireland and Germany. The third period, since the Civil War, is marked by an important change in the source from which the European immigrants came. They came from northern and southern Europe in large numbers.
As time went on, the English language gradually changed on both sides of the Atlantic. The Americans adopted（接纳）many words from foreign languages and invented a large number of new words to meet their various needs.
American English began in the seventeenth century. At the beginning of the 17th century the English language was brought to North America by colonists from England. They used the language spoken in England, that is, Elizabethan English, the language used by Shakespeare, Milton and Banyan. At first the language stayed the same as the language used in Britain, but slowly the language began to change. Sometimes, the English spoken in America changed but sometimes the language spoken in the place stayed the same, while the language in England changed.
Following the American independence, famous persons like Thomas Jefferson, John Adams, and Noah Webster began to consider that the country should have a language of its own. English in America has developed a character（特点）of its own, reflecting（反映）the life and the physical and social environment（环境）of the American people.
Unit 2 English around the world 知识探讨
1．1 头脑风暴
1．How many languages can you speak? What are they?
There are many possible answers to this question, such as one, two, three…
Chinese, English, Japanese, Russian, Korean…
2．Do you know how many Englishes there are in the world? Why?
Possible answers: two, three… American English, British English, Indian English…
Any answer is possible. Every student should answer the second question according to their knowledge of history.
e. g. ①Englishmen once ruled America and India…
②Many people moved to America long ago.
3．Do you know the differences between American English and British English?
Possible answers: ①They are different in spelling. For example: colour, centre and travelled are spelt color, center and traveled in American English.
②They are different in pronunciation. For example, Americans say dance［d?ns］and in southern England they say［da: ns］. In America they pronounce not［nat］; in southern England they say［n?t］.
③They use different words. For example:
Am. English
Br. English
elevator
lift
fall
autumn
first floor
ground floor
candy
sweet
check
bill
apartment
flat
subway
underground railway
4. Why should you learn English?
Answers are various, e. g. ①English is an international language, spoken in many countries. ②Learn English to love our country! Learn English to make money globally! ③21st century is the century for English and for Chinese to dominate.（21世纪是英文和中文并行于全球的世纪）
1．2 语篇探究
1．Why does China have the largest number of English speakers?
Possible answer: Because China has the largest population in the world and more and more Chinese people speak English today.
2．Is English still changing now? Why?
There may be several reasons. You can use your knowledge to find out possible reasons, e.g. ①More and more people speak English in the world and this can help cultures communicate with each other more often. ②With the development of society, new things appear year by year, which will add to English vocabulary…
3．Why is the number of people learning English in China in creasing rapidly?
There may be several reasons. You can find out possible reasons according to the facts, e. g. ①Because Chinese want to communicate with other countries more often. ②Because Chinese people want to develop their economy rapidly. ③Because Chinese people have developed their economy rapidly.
1．3 阅读讨论
While you are struggling to improve your English, you might be encouraged by the fact that the Chinese language has also proved popular among young people overseas.
The Third National Chinese Speaking Competition for High School Students was held in South Korea on May 18. The 30 final contestants impressed（给……留下深刻印象）the judges with interesting topics and attractive performances.
Lots of schools and colleges in South Korea and the United States offer Chinese courses every week. Many students also come to China to learn the language. According to the Chinese Ministry of Education, by the end of last year, nearly 30 million people from 85 countries and areas were learning standard Chinese－putong hua.
"I think a good knowledge of Chinese can help me get a good job back in my country as there is a growing number of companies setting up operations（业务）in China. "said a 24-year-old student at Peking University from South Korea.
She added that a certificate（证书）of the Chinese proficiency Test, or Hanyu Shuiping Kaoshi（HSK）, is important when seeking a job in a large South Korean company.
China has offered the HSK test throughout the world since 1990. In its first 10 years the number of test takers grew by up to 50 per cent every year. It was almost as popular as the American Educational Testing Service's Test of English as a Foreign Language（TOEFL,英语托福考试）.
The majority of people now taking the test are from South Korea, followed by Japan, the United States, Germany and Italy.
Questions:
1．What does the writer think of Chinese?
答案：He thinks Chinese is popular in many countries.
2．Why does the foreign girl student study Chinese?
答案：Because it is easier for her to get a job in her country.
3．Do you think Chinese is as popular as English in the future? Why?
答案：Yes. Because China plays an important part in the world. It has become a trade partner of many countries. More and more countries will trade with China.
4．What about your Chinese course? Are you interested in it?
答案：There are many answers to this question.
Unit 2 English Around the World
Part One: Teaching Design (第一部分：教学设计)
Period 1: A sample lesson plan for reading
(THE ROAD TO MODERN ENGLISH)
Aims
To talk about varieties of English
To read about the history of English language
Procedures
I. Warming up
1. Warming up by answering a questionnaire
1). Tell the students they are going to answer a questionnaire about why they are learning English.
2). Write the words: Reasons for learning a foreign language on the center of the board:
3). Ask the students to suggest as many reasons as they can think of, for example, for work, as a hobby, to learn about other people, to travel, to read literature in the original, to read research papers, to meet foreigners, to surf the Internet, to pass exams, etc. Write their suggestions on the board as they make them.
4). Divide the class into pairs.
5). Give out each student one questionnaire paper.
6). Explain the task. The students must question each other about their language learning needs (or motivations). Tell them that you are going to take in the questionnaires at the end, and that you’d like them to make clear notes. It works better if the two partners swap tasks (questions and answers) after each section of the questionnaire. If they wait till the end to swap, one student may use up all the time available.
7). When the task is finished, ask a couple of students to summarize their partners’ answers. (This may develop into a class discussion about language needs).
8). The students write five sentences on their feeling about learning English.
9). Collect the questionnaires.
Needs Analysis Questionnaire
Interviewer_______________
Interviewee_______________
Present use: situations and skills
Reading (faxes, letters & reports)
Listening & speaking (telephoning, meetings, negotiations, public speaking, socializing)
Writing (faxes, letters & reports)
Future use: expectations & ambitions
2. Further applying
To get the students thinking about the topic of the reading passage.
1). Have a student list on the board all the English-speaking countries in the world that they can think of.
2). Give the students hints about the places they haven’t mentioned.
3). Provide the students with an opportunity to think about the reasons for the spread of English around the world.
★ English is one of the official languages of the Olympic Games and the United Nations.
★ English dominates international websites and provides nearly all of the new computer terminology.
★ Tourism and trade from Western Europe and North America has contributed to the spread of English.
★ Satellite TV, radio programs like Joy FM, CDs and, of course, Hollywood films all broadcast English into China. Also, a number of Chinese films include English subtitles.
II. Reading
1. Skimming
Read quickly to get the main idea of the text.
Let the students find out key sentence of each paragraph or ask them to summarize the main point for each paragraph in their own words.
Paragraph 1: The spread of the English language in the world
Paragraph 2: Native speaker can understand each other but they may not be able to understand everything.
Paragraph 3: All languages change when cultures communicate with one another.
Paragraph 4: English is spoken as a foreign language or second language in Africa and Asia.
2. Scanning
Read to locate particular information and complete the comprehending Exercise One.
3. Following up
Work in groups. Discuss the two questions and then ask two groups to report their answers to the class.
1). Do you think it matters what kind of English you learn? Why?
Possible answer:
I don’t think so. Here are the reasons:
★ Native speakers from different parts of the world have no difficulty in understanding each other despite the fact that they speak a bit differently.
★ It is necessary for us to learn the narrow difference between different kinds of English if we hope to communicate fluently with native speakers of English from all over the world.
★ Different kinds of English have the same language core. If you have got a good command of one kind, you will almost have no difficulty understanding another kind of English.
(Any persuasive and supporting reason the students give can be accepted.)
Why do you think people all over the world want to learn English?
Possible answer:
The reasons why people all over the world want to learn English:
★ With economy globalization, English has become the best bridge to serve the purpose of people all over the world communicating with one another.
★ However, like all major languages in the world, English is always changing. In order to adjust to native speakers from different parts of the world, it is a must for people all over the world to learn English, whether in English speaking countries or in non-English speaking countries.
★ Also, people from different parts of the world speak English with various accent and dialects, and people have to learn about the difference between different kinds of English in order to avoid misunderstanding while communicating.
(All persuasive reasons can be accepted.)
4. Language focus:
even if=even though: in spite of the fact; no matter whether: He likes to help us even if he is very busy.
communicate with: exchange information or conversation with other people: He learnt to use body language to communicate with deaf customers.
actually=in fact: used when you are adding new information to what you have just said: We’ve known for years. Actually, since we were babies.
be based on…:
make use of: use sth. available
Only time will tell: to say that something can only be known in the future: Will China’s national football team enter for the next finals of the World Cup? Only time will tell.
Language Chunks from Unit 2 English around the world
be different from, pay a role(part) in, because of, either …or…, in/on a team, the number of/a number of, than ever before, even if, comp up to, over time, communicate with, be based on, make use of, have one’s own identity, such as, Only time can tell, native speaker, as well as, solve a problem, believe it or not, no such a…, all over the world, at the top(bottom) of, pen friends, to this day, sum up, Pardon?, beg your pardon, go abroad, be used for, more of a …, encourage sb. to do sth., work on, feel like sth., from time to time, English-speaking countries, from one…to another, do business, on the air, would like sb. to do, make notes, fight against, keep…a secret, even though, save time(money), a form of…
Period 2: A sample lesson plan for Learning about Language
(Indirect Speech (II) requests & commands)
Aims
To discover useful words and expressions
To discover useful structures
Procedures
I. Direct and Indirect Speech
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
simple present He said, “I go to school every day.”
simple past He said (that) he went to school every day.
simple past He said, “I went to school every day.”
past perfect He said (that) he had gone to school every day.
present perfect He said, “I have gone to school every day.”
past perfect He said (that) he had gone to school every day.
present progressive He said, “I am going to school every day.”
past progressive He said (that) he was going to school every day.
past progressive He said, “I was going to school every day.”
perfect progressive He said (that) he had been going to school every day,
future (will) He said, “I will go to school every day.”
would + verb name He said (that) he would go to school every day.
future (going to) He said, “I am going to school every day.”
present progressive He said (that) he is going to school every day.
past progressive He said (that) he was going to school every day
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
auxiliary + verb name He said, “Do you go to school every day?” He said, “Where do you go to school?”
simple past He asked me if I went to school every day.* He asked me where I went to school.
imperative He said, “Go to school every day.”
infinitive He said to go to school every day.
??
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
simple present + simple present He says, “I go to school every day.”
simple present + simple present He says (that) he goes to school every day.
present perfect + simple present He has said, “I go to school every day.”
present perfect + simple present He has said (that) he goes to school every day.
past progressive + simple past He was saying, “I went to school every day.”
past progressive + simple past He was saying (that) he went to school every day.
past progressive + past perfect He was saying (that) he had gone to school every day.
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
can He said, “I can go to school every day.”
could He said (that) he could go to school every day.
may He said, “I may go to school every day.”
might He said (that) he might go to school every day.
might He said, “I might go to school every day.”
?
must He said, “I must go to school every day.”
had to He said (that) he had to go to school every day.
have to He said, “I have to go to school every day.”
?
should He said, “I should go to school every day.”
should He said (that) he should go to school every day.
ought to He said, “I ought to go to school every day.”
ought to He said (that) he ought to go to school every day.
II. Discovering useful words and expressions
Work in pairs. Do exercises 1, 2, 3 and 4. Then check the answer you’re your classmates. The teacher helps the students discover the difference in prepositions.
Play the tape for the students to listen and ask them to mark the sentence stress and intonation. Then practice reading in pairs.
(The teacher brings the students’ attention to the British and American words that are different but have the same meaning.)
III. Discovering useful structures
(Making commands and requests using indirect speech)
1. In groups of four, think of at least three commands your teachers and parents usually give.
You may follow these steps.
Choose one who is to give the first command.
Ask another person in your group to tell somebody what you said.
The third person will change the request or command from direct into indirect speech.
Change role so that each person gets the chance to give commands and turn them into indirect speech.
Example:
T: Please don’t talk in class.
S1: What did our teacher tell us? / What did our teacher say?
S2: He told/asked us not to talk in class. / She said not to talk in class.
2. Get the students thinking about the difference between the request and command.
Then read the replies and decide whether they are in answer to a request or a command. Write the sentence down.
★ A: _______________________________________
B: I’ll go and collect some wood right now, master.
★ A: _______________________________________
B: Of course I’ll be happy to collect your shopping for you.
★ A:__________________________________________
B: Yes. I’ll shut the door at once, Mr. Zhang.
★ A:_________________________________________
B: No, I won’t get your coat if you talk to me like that.
★ A:_________________________________________
B: Sorry. I’ll get that book for you right now.
Period 3: A sample lesson plan for Using Language
(STANDARD ENGLISH AND DIALECTS)
Aims
To read out and talk about STANDARD ENGLISH AND DIALECTS
To write about learning English by brainstorming
Procedures
I. Warming up
1. Introduction: In China there’re so many dialects that the government encourages the whole nation to speak Putonghua, which is regarded as standard Chinese.
2. Role-play: Get students to work in pairs. Let one student be a Chinese and the other a foreigner. Role-play a conversation about the Chinese language to have them discuss why Putonghua has to be used in China.
II. Reading
1. Get the students thinking about the topic of the text to predict what it says.
2. Skimming:
Read quickly to find the topic sentence for each paragraph.
Para. 1: There is no such a thing as Standard English.
Para. 2: American English has many dialects whose words and expressions are different from “standard English”.
Para. 3: Geography plays a part in making dialects.
3. Scanning: Work in pairs. Read the text to locate particular information.
1). Do you know what Standard English is from the text?
2). What is a dialect? Why does American English have so many dialects?
4. Language focus:
believe it or not: used when you are going to say something that is true but surprising: Believe it or not, John cheated in the exam.
2). there is no such a …as: used to say that a particular person or thing does not exist: These days there is no such a thing as a job for life.
3). standard English: the form of English that most people in Britain use, and that is not limited to one area or group of people
4). dialect: a variety of a language spoken only in one area, in which words, or grammar are slightly different from other forms of the same language
5). play a part/role in: be one of the causes that make something happen: Besides dieting, exercising plays an important part in losing weight.
III. Listening
To introduce the students to a dialect and a form of standard “English”.
You may follow these steps:
1). Set the context for the students by describing the situation;
2). Tell the class: you are going to listen to a boy named Buford. He speaks a Southern dialect of AmE with an East, Texas accent. Remember: pronunciation is determined by accent. On the other hand, Buford’s teacher, Jane, speaks standard BrE. (i.e. what is heard on the BBC.)
3). Play the tape for the students to listen.
4). Encourage the students to give the standard equivalents for the dialectic words from Buford’s story, using the context.
Dialectic words
from Buford’s story
Standard English
equivalents
hey
y’all
ain’t
yer
ya
pup
swimmin’
jumpin’
feelin’
‘bout
‘nough
shoulda seen
got outta
hello
everyone
aren’t
your
you
child
swimming
jumping
feeling
about
enough
should have seen
got out of
6). Play the tape again and let the students answer the questions in pairs after listening.
7). Check the answers. (Variant: you may also ask the students to retell Buford’s story in Standard English in pairs.)
IV. Speaking
1. Make sure the students know that the word used for directions often vary depending on what kind of English the speaker uses. Present the list to the students:
Amy (American) Lady (British)
subway underground
left left-hand side
keep going straight go straight on
two blocks two streets
right right-hand side
2. Prepare their role-play in pairs: Be sure that one plays a speaker of British English and the other a speaker of American English. Ask students to select actual streets and location in their hometown for giving directions.
Performance: Ask two pairs to perform their dialogue in class.
Sample version:
S1: Excuse me, sir. But I can’t find the drugstore?
S2: Pardon?
S1: I said I couldn’t find the chemist’s shop.
S2: Well, go round the corner on your right-hand side, straight on and cross the flyover. You will find it ahead.
S1: Thank you very much.
S3: What did he say?
S1: He told us to go round the corner on the right, go straight on and then cross the overpass. The drugstore will be ahead.
Self-assessment criteria:
Did you cooperate well with your partner(s) while practicing?
Can you ask for directions and give directions clearly?
Can you express your ideas fluently? If not, what’s your main problem?
Did you go naturally between American English and British English while talking to each other.
V. Writing
1. Making a poster
First ask the students to make educated guesses about how English can help some aspect of Chinese life, in particular its economy.
Then, in pairs students work on their poster.
Finally, ask several pairs to present their poster in class for assessment.
A Sample poster
CHINA’S FUTURE LIES WITH LEARNING ENGLISH
Reasons for learning English:
World trade is done in English;
International organization (such as the UN) use English;
We need contact with the developed Western world to build our country;
The developed world uses English in its dealings.
Why the Chinese language will not do?
Very few people in the West speak Chinese;
Chinese is a difficult language to learn;
Most businessmen do not have time to learn new languages every time they enter a new international market.
SO CHINA’S FUTURE LIES WITH LEARNING ENGLISH
2.Writing Assessment
Can you give persuasive reasons for the topic on your poster?
Can you verbalize your ideas fluently?
Can you put your own English learning experiences into a broader perspective?
Can you organize your ideas in a logical way?
Have you made a brainstorming map before you set out to design your poster? Do you think it helps your writing?
What kind of mistakes have you made in your writing? What can you do to avoid such mistakes?
Further Applying
The teacher may also guide the students to do the writhing task in the Workbook on page 53. You may take the following steps:
Step 1: Students divided into groups of four share their own learning experiences and ideas about English learning.
Step 2: Students make a list as follows:
My problems
Ideas for improvement
Why I like English
My future
with English
Step 3: Make notes about the paragraphs for the writing.
Step 4: The teacher helps develop ideas in a positive and encouraging way.
Step 5: Students write about the topic after class as homework.
Sample version:
My experience of learning English
Many people all over the world speak English as their second language. It is not too much to say that it has become an international language.
Studying English can make life fun. It enables you to watch American movies, read English books and listen to English songs. Moreover, as English is an international language, you will be able to communicate with foreigners when you are on a trip abroad. Traveling will be more interesting that way.
It is a good idea to make friends with foreigners. In my opinion, it is the best way to improve your English. In addition, it will be fun and it will expand your view of the world. If you make friends with a native speaker, you can practice your spoken English more often and then you can communicate with people around the world. You can also become familiar with the customs and habits of different cultures.
There are some people who are afraid to make friends with foreigners because they are not confident of their English. However, many foreigners do not care about grammar. They will get your key words in the sentence and figure out the whole meanings. Therefore, it is unnecessary to be afraid to make friends with them; just go head!
Learning English helps us meet different people and learn more about their culture, thus facilitating mutual understanding and harmony. Briefly said, English is so useful to us that we should all learn it.
Part Two: Teaching resources（第二部分：教学资源）
Section 1: Approaches to process writing 程序写作教学法
I. Pre-writing
1. Brainstorming
Getting started can be difficult, so students divided into groups quickly produce words and ideas about the writing.
2. Planning
Students make a plan of the writing before they start. These plans can be compared and discussed in groups before writing takes place.
3. Generating ideas
Discovery tasks such as cubing (Students write quickly about the subject in six different ways. 1. describe it 2. compare it 3. associate it 4. analyse it 5. apply it 6. argue for or against it.)
4. Questioning
In groups, the idea is to generate lots of questions about the topic. This helps students focus upon audience as they consider what the reader needs to know. The answers to these questions will form the basis to the composition.
5. Discussing and debating
The teacher helps students with topics, helping them develop ideas in a positive and encouraging way.
II. Focusing ideas
1. Fast writing
The students write quickly on a topic for five to ten minutes without worrying about correct language or punctuation. Writing as quickly as possible, if they cannot think of a word they leave a space or write it in their own language. The important thing is to keep writing. Later this text is revised.
2. Group compositions
Working together in groups, sharing ideas. This collaborative writing is especially valuable as it involves other skills (speaking in particular).
3. Changing viewpoints
A good writing activity to follow a role-play or storytelling activity. Different students choose different points of view and think about /discuss what this character would write in a diary, witness statement, etc.
4. Varying form
Similar to the activity above, but instead of different viewpoints, different text types are selected. How would the text be different if it were written as a letter, or a newspaper article, etc.
III. Evaluating, structuring and editing
1.Ordering
Students take the notes written in one of the pre-writing activities above and organize them. What would come first? Why? Here it is good to tell them to start with information known to the reader before moving onto what the reader does not know.
2. Self-editing
A good writer must learn how to evaluate their own language ─ to improve through checking their own text, looking for errors, structure. This way students will become better writers.
3. Peer Editing and proofreading
Here, the texts are interchanged and the evaluation is done by other students. In the real world, it is common for writers to ask friends and colleagues to check texts for spelling, etc. You could also ask the students to reduce the texts, to edit them, concentrating on the most important information.
4. The importance of feedback
It takes a lot of time and effort to write, and so it is only fair that student writing is responded to suitably. Positive comments can help build student confidence and create good feeling for the next writing class. It also helps if the reader is more than just the teacher. Class magazines, swapping letters with other classes, etc. can provide an easy solution to providing a real audience.
5. Writing as communication
Process writing is a move away from students writing to test their language towards the communication of ideas, feelings and experiences. It requires that more classroom time is spent on writing, but as the previously outlined activities show, there is more than just writing happening during a session dedicated to process writing.
6. Potential problems
Writing is a complex process and can lead to learner frustration. As with speaking, it is necessary to provide a supportive environment for the students and be patient. This approach needs that more time be spent on writing in class, but as you have seen, not all classroom time is spent actually writing. Students may also react negatively to reworking the same material, but as long as the activities are varied and the objectives clear, then they will usually accept doing so. In the long term, you and your students will start to recognise the value of a process writing approach as their written work improves.
Section 2: Background information on English Around the World
I. British English, American English and Chinese
Cars and Driving
British English
American English
Chinese
car park
parking lot
停车场
driving license
driver's license
驾照
flyover
overpass
天桥
four way
crossroads
十字路口
hire car
rental car
租用车
motorway
freeway(Western U.S.)
expressway (Eastern U.S.)
高速公路
petrol
gasoline(gas)
汽油
tyre
tire
轮胎
windscreen
windshield
挡风玻璃
Food
British English
American English
Chinese
biscuit
cookie
饼干
chips
French fries
炸土豆片
crisps
potato chips
油炸土豆片
jacket potato
baked potato
带皮烤的马铃薯
jam
jelly
酱
mince
hamburger
碎牛肉；牛肉饼
porridge
oatmeal
稀饭
pudding
dessert
布丁；甜点
sweet
dessert
餐后甜点
tin
can
罐头
Others
British English
American English
Chinese
autumn
fall
秋天
bill
check
清单
bin liner
trash bag
垃圾袋
botanic garden
botanical garden
植物园
braces
suspenders
吊裤带；吊杆
charity
non-profit organization
慈善机构
chemist’s
pharmacy/drug store
药店
cinema
movie theater, theater
电影院
coach
bus
长途汽车
DIY
do it yourself
自己动手做
dustbin
trash can
垃圾箱
engaged (as in telephone)
busy
（电话）占线
fee (for schooling)
tuition
学费
fit (verb)
equip, fit out
安装
flat
apartment
单元住宅
football
soccer
足球
freephone
toll-free
免费电话
toll-free
dress (noun)
外衣；服装
gents
men’s room
男厕
headmaster
principal
男厕
hire (hire a car)
rent (rent a car)
租借
holiday
vacation
假日
ill
sick
有病的
in future
in the future
未来，将来
in hospital
in the hospital
住院
join the train
get on the train
上火车
jumper
sweater
毛线衫
licence (noun)
license
执照
lift
elevator
电梯
lorry
truck
卡车
maths
math
数学
nil
zero
零
note
bill
纸币
on stream
on line
在生产中
post
mail
邮件
queue
line
长队
railway
railroad
铁路
return
round trip
返程
rise (noun - in salary)
raise
加薪
rubber
eraser
橡皮擦
rucksack
backpack
背包
shopping trolley
shopping car
购物手推车
“sorry”
“excuse me”, “pardon me”
对不起
stand (for election)
run (for election)
竞选
swear word
curse word
咒语
subway
underpass
餐巾
subway
underpass
地下道；地铁
tea towel
dish towel
餐巾
telephone box
telephone booth
电话亭
toilet
restroom
厕所
torch
flashlight
火炬
trainers
sneakers
运动鞋
transport (noun)
transportation
运输
trousers
pants
裤子
trolley
cart
手推车
tube
subway
地铁
underground
subway
地铁
vest
undershirt
背心
waistcoat
vest
马甲
II. Different English, different spellings
American English
theater, center, liter
color, honor, labor, favor, vapor
traveler, woolen
skillful, fulfill
check
program
story
realize, analyze, apologize
defense, offense, license
burned
dreamed
smelled
spelled
spoiled
British English
theatre, center, litre
colour, honour, labour, favour, vapour
traveler, woolen
skilful, fulfil
cheque
programme
storey
realise, analyse, apologise
defence, offence, licence
burnt/burned
dreamt/dreamed
smelt/smelled
spelt/spelled
spoilt/spoiled
III.Websites recommended to the students 推荐网站
www.e-l-e.net.cn www.bg-map.com
www.esl.about.com www.english-zone.com
www.effingpot.com www.topics-mag.com
Going to any of the websites may enable the students to learn more about the differences between American English and British English.
Section 3: Words and expressions from Unit 2 English Around the World
Include 1. v. to be one of the parts; to make something or someone part of a larger group: Our tour party included several retired couples. The team is looking strong; especially now they have included Beckham. 2. including & included: Everyone has to go to the dentist’s, you included. There were twelve of us, including Tom and me.
role: n. 1. the character played by an actor in a play or film; the position that someone has in society or an organization: Matthews plays the role of a young doctor in the film. Women are often forced into a supportive role in the family. 2. play a leading/major/key role in=be important in making changes happen: Mandela played a leading role in ending apartheid in South Africa.
because of=as the result of a particular thing or someone’s action: He had to retire because of ill health. c.f. She got the job because she was the best candidate.
native: 1. adj. your native country or town is the place where you were born: They never saw their native land again. 2. native language/tongue: the language you spoke when you first learned to speak. 3. n. a person who was born in a particular place：Are you a native of New York?
come up: 1. to be mentioned：A lot of new questions came up at the meeting. 2. to be about to happen soon：Don’t you have a birthday coming up soon? 3. to move near someone or something by walking: Come up to the front of the room so everyone can see you.
Other verbal phrases of “come”
come about=to happen in a way that seems impossible to control;
come across= to meet or find something or someone by chance;
come along=get along; to appear at a time you don’t expect; to encourage sb. to try harder;
come by=to obtain something that is difficult to find; come up with=to think of an idea;
(The small word “come” has many phrasal verbs. It is better to ask the students to refer to a good dictionary.)
present: adj. 1. be present: a) to be in a particular place: How many people were present at the meeting yesterday?(opposite of “ absent”) b) to be remembered for a long time: The memory of the disaster last year is still present in her mind. 2. (only before noun) existing now: What’s your present address? c.f. What he said amused all the people present.
such as: used to give an example of something; such…as/that: used to emphasize that there is a small amount of something or that it is of good quality: The local economy still relies on traditional industries such as farming and mining. c.f. Such food as they gave us was warm and nutritious.
Command: 1. vi & vt. to tell someone officially to do something, esp. if you are a military leader or a king to get something such as attention or respect: The general commanded that the regiment (should) attack at once. Or The General commanded the regiment to attack at once. Dr. Young commands a great deal of respect as a surgeon. 2. get/ have a good command of English=to get/have a good mastery of English.
request: 1. vt. to ask for something politely or formally request that (should) + v/ request sb. to do sth.: The staff requested that he reconsider his decision. All club members are requested to attend the annual meeting. 2. n. a polite demand for something: They have made a urgent request for international aid.
recognize: vt. 1. to know who someone is or what something is, because you have ever seen them or it before: Susan came home so thin and weak that her own children hardly recognized her. 2. to accept that an organization has legal or official authority: British medical qualifications are recognized in Canada. 3. be recognized as= to be thought of as being very good by a lot of people: Jules Verne’s novel was recognized as a work of genius.
新课标必修1
Unit 2 English around the world教学设计
一、教学目的(Teaching aims)
英语课程目标
教学目标
三维目标领域
语言技能
能用自己的语言讲述英语发展史。
知识与技能领域
语言知识
学会使用outline；
学会利用outline复述课文。
学习策略
掌握在句中，文中利用outline分析课文的策略；
学会在新的语境中运用新学的语言知识。
过程与方法领域
情感态度
让学生做个快乐的英语语言学习者。
情感、态度领域
二、教材分析(Text analysis)
(一)教学重点(Teaching important points)
1、学会使用outline列提纲的形式来分析整篇文章，找出每段的段落大意及细节。
2、能运用所给的提纲对文章进行复述。
(二)教学难点(Teaching difficult points)
1、引导学生复述课文。
2、把任务型教学有机融入情景教学中。
三、学生分析(Teaching methods)
? 高一学生处于高中英语学习兴趣培养和学习习惯形成阶段。他们希望在学习过程中享受到乐趣，不希望老师死板地讲解字词及语法。希望老师能够激发他们的好奇心和创造力，并与他们日常生活紧密相连的学习，语境是他们希望教师在课堂上能呈现的东西。一旦教师走进他们的生活，他们就愿意跟着教师走，掌握文化知识，了解学习策略，形成良好的人生观和价值观。
四、教学媒体(Teaching aids)
整合网络资源，充分利用多媒体、文本、图片、声音和实物展示平台，并利用黑板、粉笔等教学媒体辅助教学，促进学生的有效学习。
五、教学过程（Teaching Procedures）
Teaching aim:
a) Ss will be able to know the development of English 。
b) Let Ss write an outline of each paragraph.
c) Ss will be able to use an outline to retell the whole text.
Teaching procedures:
Step 1： Lead in
Ask students several questions in the form of brain storming.
Do you know the differences between British English and American English?
Do you know the countries where people speak English?
Which country speak English as their native language?
4. Which country speak English as their second forgein language?
Step 2: fast reading
T: This class we will learn more something about English language,now please open your book and turn to Page9,Read the text quickly. After reading it, we’finish some task about the text.
TASK 1: Read the text and write an outline.
Headline
Outline Main idea
Details
Let Ss discuss each other and find out the outline of each paragraph.Divide Ss into 4 groups and one of them write the answer on a piece of paper.
TASK 2: Give Ss an outline of the whole text and let them try to retell it.
Headline: The road to mordern English Para 1：
Main idea: Today, more people speak English as their first, second or foreign language than ever before.
Detail 1: 16th century, …5 to 7 million … in England.
Detail 2: 17th century, people…voyages…conquer …in many other countries.
Para 2:
Main idea: Native English speakers can understand each other even if they don't speak the same kind of English.
Para 3:
Main idea: All languages change when cultures meet and communicate with each other.
Detail 1: AD450～1150, …based more on German.
Detail2:AD80～1150, …less like German, …Dinish…French, …enrich vocabulary.
Detail 3: 1600’s, Shakespeare… wider vocabulary.
Detail 4: 1620, British settlers→America.
Detail 5: 18th century, British settlers→Australia.
Para 4: Main idea:
By the 19th century, the language was settled.
Detail 1: …2 changes in spelling.
Detail 2: The latter …a separate identy…
Para 5:
Main idea: English now is also spoken as a foreign or second language in South Africa.
Detail 1: India…a largr number of speakers…for government and education.
Detail 2: …Singapore and Malaysia…in South Africa.
Detail 3: China … increasing rapidly.
TASK 3 : Fill in the blanks.
About _____ million people speak English at the end of 16th century. Nearly all of them lived in _______. In the 17th century, people from England made _______ to _______ other country , so English began to be spoken in many other countries. ______ English speakers can understand each other _______they don’t speak the same kind of English. Why English has change ___ time? All languages change when ______ meet and communicate with each other. The English spoken between about AD 450 and 1150 was very different from ____. Actually, it was _____more on ______ than English at present.
From about AD 800to 1150,English became less like _______ because the rulers spoke first ______ and later ______. In the1600’s, Shakespeare made _____ of a wide _________ than before. In 1620,some British settlers moved to _______. Later in the 18th century, British people went to ________.English is also spoken as a foreign or second language in South Africa.India has a very large number of English _______. This is because Britain ruled ______ from 1765 to 1947. During that time English became language for __________ and ________. English is also spoken in China. Today ______ may have the largest number of English leaners.
TASK 4 : T/F Exercises
( )1. Noah Webster wrote the American Dictionary of the English Language
( )2. From 1765 to 1947 English became the language for government and education in India.
( )3. America has the largest number of English learners.
( )4. Native English speakers cant’t understand each other because they don’t speak the same kind of English.
( )5. As English is widely used, it will be more and more important to have a good knowledge of English.
At last,give Ss some information about English-speaking country.
English is used as:
First language: UK ,USA ,Canada ,Australia, South Africa,
Ireland, New Zerland and so on.
Second language: India, Pakistan, Nigeria
the Philippines, HK and so on .
Foreign language: China and so on .
TASK 4 : Homework
1. Review what we have learned today.
2. Find a passage and write its outline.
3. Retell the passage with outline you’ve written.
Unit 2 测试题
第一节 单项填空（共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分）
21. Languages develop gradually through ____ usage. We should learn the culture at the same time to make ____ use of a foreign language.
A. the; a B. 不填；a
C. a; the D. 不填；不填
22. — Tom, Miss Lee asked you to go to
her office as soon as you arrived.
— ____ What did she say?
A. I’ve got it.
B. I beg your pardon?
C. Excuse me. D. Thank you.
23. If you give me another chance, I believe I can ____ to your expectations.
A. come up B. come out
C. come over D. come in
24. Li Bingbing started to sell her first book that ____ her own experiences in February, 2009.
A. based on B. bases on
C. is based on D. is basing on
25. The general requested that all the
soldiers ____ until the signal was given.
A. to fire B. not fire
C. not firing D. not to fire
26. — Hi, Mary! I haven’t seen you for a long time. How are you?
— Oh, Peter! I didn’t ____ you. I’m fine. Let’s have a drink, shall we?
A. remember B. realize
C. recognize D. remind
27. My mother told me ____ with such a strange accent. It might be impolite.
A. don’t speak B. not spoke
C. to not speak D. not to speak
28. The birds are native ____ Australia but now we can see them in zoos in China.
A. to B. at C. in D. on
29. I sent the doctors and nurses some flowers as a(n) ____ of thanks for their
taking care of me.
A. permission B. conclusion
C. decision D. expression
30. As more and more Chinese people start to learn English, English is ____ used in our daily lives.
A. exactly B. gradually
C. entirely D. actually
31. The part that Wendy had ____ in the project was so important that she got a 1,000-dollar award after it.
A. played B. directed
C. managed D. imagined
32. There are lots of things that we should prepare for the party ____ food and drink and decorations.
A. for instance B. for example
C. such as D. the same as
33. Can you believe that ____ little a girl can finish the task in ____ a short time?
A. so; such B. such; so
C. so; so D. such; such
34. — What did Lucy say just now?
— She asked ____
A. could we teach her Chinese?
B. we could teach her Chinese.
C. if could we teach her Chinese?
D. if we could teach her Chinese.
35. The number of the people invited to the meeting ____ about 100, but a number of them ____ late because of the heavy snow.
A. were; was B. were; were
C. was; were D. was; was
第二节 完形填空（共20小题；每小题1.5
分，满分30分）
A lady wanted a birthday gift from her husband. For many months she had liked a beautiful 36 , and knowing her husband could 37 it, she told him that was all she wanted. On the morning of the 38 , her husband told her how 39 he was to have such a good wife, and how much he loved her. He 40 her a beautiful gift package (纸盒). She opened it and 41 a Bible.
42 , she raised her voice and said to her husband, “With all your money, you give me a Bible?” She was so 43 that she left him.
Many years passed and the lady was very 44 in business. She owned two large companies. She 45 her husband was very old, and thought perhaps she should go to 46 him. But before she could, she 47 a letter telling her that he had died, and gave all of his possessions (财产) to her. She needed to come back and 48 things.
When she arrived at his house, sadness 49 her heart. She saw the still new
50 , just as she had left it years before. With 51 , she opened it and began to turn the pages. A ring 52 from the Bible to the floor and a 53 could be seen. She picked it up and found it was the ring she wanted in those days. And on the card was the date of her birth, and the words “LUV U ALWAYS”.
54 your gift is not packaged the way you want it, it’s because it is better packaged the way it is! Always appreciate little things; they usually lead you to bigger things! The best and most beautiful things in the world cannot be seen or even touched for they must be felt with the 55 .
36. A. watch B. ring C. coat D. box
37. A. afford B. like C. design D. guess
38. A. holiday B. performance C. birthday D. meeting
39. A. proud B. kind C. sorry D. brave
40. A. lent B. asked C. gave D. moved
41. A. carried B. found C. missed D. held
42. A. Politely B. Lightly C. Patiently D. Angrily
43. A. calm B. upset C. grateful D. careless
44. A. failing B. lonely C. successful D. poor
45. A. wondered B. hoped C. realized D. explained
46. A. visit B. understand C. catch D. help
47. A. passed B. wrote C. sent D. received
48. A. take care of B. pay for C. look for D. give away
49. A. covered B. broke C. left D. filled
50. A. car B. Bible C. letter D. table
51. A. smiles B. laughter C. tears D. interests
52. A. hid B. dropped C. disappeared D. made
53. A. book B. pen C. flower D. card
54. A. If B. But C. Although D. So
55. A. hand B. eye C. face D. heart
第三部分·阅读理解
There was a boy in India who was sent by his parents to a boarding school. Before being sent away this boy was the brightest student in his class. He was at the top in every competition. He was a champion.
But the boy changed after leaving home and attending the boarding school. His grades started dropping. He hated being in a group. He was lonely all the time. And there were especially dark times when he felt like killing himself. All of this was because he felt worthless and that no one loved him.
His parents started worrying about the boy. But even they did not know what was wrong with him. So his dad decided to travel to the boarding school and talk with him.
They sat on the bank of the lake near the school. The father started asking him casual questions about his classes, teachers and sports. After some time his dad said, “Do you know son, why I am here today?”
The boy answered back, “to check my grades?”
“No, no” his dad replied, “I am here to tell you that you are the most important person for me. I want to see you happy. I don’t care about grades. I care about you. I care about your happiness. YOU ARE MY LIFE.”
These words caused the boy’s eyes to fill with tears. He hugged his dad. They didn’t say anything to each other for a long time.
Now the boy had everything he wanted. He knew there was someone on this earth who cared for him deeply. He meant the world to someone. And today this young man is in college at the top of his class and no one has ever seen him sad!
Thanks a lot dad. YOU ARE MY LIFE.
56. The boy changed after he went to the boarding school because ____.
A. his grades were not as good as before
B. his classmates didn’t like him
C. his father seldom went to see him
D. he felt no one cared about him
57. The father went to the boarding school to ____.
A. know if he was still the best student
B. find out what was wrong with his son
C. ask some questions about his class- mates
D. talk with the boy’s teacher about his grades
58. Why were the boy’s eyes filled with tears when he heard what his father said?
A. Because his father didn’t care about his grades any more.
B. Because he hadn’t had a talk with his father for a long time.
C. Because he had a chance to say his worries.
D. Because he was deeply moved by his father’s words.
59. The passage mainly tells us never to ____.
A. send a small boy to a boarding school
B. care too much about a student’s grades
C. pay no attention to the power of caring
D. miss the chance to say thanks to our fathers
In 1934, the Americans were living through a serious economic crisis (经济危机). President Franklin D. Roosevelt created a governmental art program as part of an effort to improve the economy. The Public Works of Art Program was the first national effort (努力) by the United States government to support artists.
The program was important because it helped provide jobs for more than three thousand seven hundred artists who were out of work. They created more than fifteen thousand paintings and sculptures (雕塑) designed to lift the spirits (勇气) of the Americans during the difficult time. The works are of different subjects, including natural beauty, people’s life in free time and people at work.
For example, an artist named Ray Strong created a large painting called the “Golden Gate Bridge.” It shows the huge bridge in San Francisco while it was being built. President Roosevelt had this painting hung in the White House as a celebration of American art and engineering.
Some paintings show how the Americans had fun. For example, Morris Kantor painted “Baseball at Night.” You might guess from the title that the painting shows people enjoying a baseball game at night.
In Julia Eckel’s painting “Radio Broadcast” a group of actors and musicians gather around a large radio microphone (麦克风). You can almost hear the lively radio program they were broadcasting.
Several paintings show the Americans working. Max Arthur Cohn’s painting “Coal Tower” shows a dark coal tower against a light sky. Under the tower, a boat is carrying coal that will help power the city of New York.
The Public Works of Art Program only lasted six months. But it did lift people’s spirits in that hard time. And, it is especially meaningful during today’s economic crisis.
60. The Roosevelt government started the Public Works of Art Program to ____.
A. show the Americans the artists’ excellent works in 1934
B. draw the Americans’ interest in art during the hard time
C. bring some happiness to the Americans in the hard time
D. provide the artists who were unemployed with new jobs
61. What do we know about the Public Works of Art Program?
A. It provided fourteen thousand paint- ings for the Americans.
B. It was the only national effort to improve the economy.
C. It lasted for a long period of more than six years.
D. It lifted the spirits of the Americans during that hard time.
62. Whose works was hung in the White House?
A. Ray Strong’s.
B. Morris Kantor’s.
C. Julia Eckel’s.
D. Max Arthur Cohn’s.
63. Which painting shows the Americans working?
A. Golden Gate Bridge.
B. Coal Tower.
C. Radio Broadcast.
D. Baseball at Night.
I have a note on my mirror stating, “Life is not about finding yourself but creating yourself.” This is the statement I live by.
Many people do not believe me when I say I am an atheist（无神论者）. They don’t understand that I simply do not believe in any sort of god or afterlife. I believe in myself and the power I have gained through the help of my parents, teachers, and friends — and my own hard work.
I am not going to try to dissuade anyone from his or her own opinions either. I know that people enjoy having religion （宗教） in their lives; some need their faith （信仰） to help them through hard times. And some do not want the duty of their unlucky accidents weighing down on them.
I hate the idea of fate（命运） — that everything is already planned out and you have no control to change anything. When my life is not going well, I know that it is not one’s mistake but my own. When I do well in school, and when I fall in love, it is not fate and we are not soul mates. That is all it is, and for me that is all it needs to be.
For some, life is overwhelming （无法抵抗的）. How can anyone be successful and happy in such a difficult world? They need someone to help them and someone to have faith in to make sure things get better. Placing my success and happiness in another’s hands breaks my heart. I need to be successful because of my hard work.
Who will ever know what the truth really is? All I know is that some have full faith and trust in God to give them hope; similarly I need to believe I am on my own to be truly happy.
64. What does the underlined word “dis- suade” in Paragraph 3 mean?
A. discard B. discourage
C. accept D. believe
65. Why do so many people believe in God according to the author?
a. They love having religion in their lives.
b. Their faith may help them live through difficult times.
c. They want to follow most westerners to have faith in God.
d. They want to shake off the duty of their unlucky accidents.
e. They can share their joys and sadnesses together.
A. c, d, e B. b, c, e
C. a, c, d D. a, b, d
66. If the author achieves something in life, he thinks ____.
A. his success is fated
B. God help him to get it
C. his hard work makes him succeed
D. he will be more successful later
67. We can infer from the passage that ____.
A. the support of family and friends is important for the author
B. many people are living a hard life because of their bad luck
C. no one is happy in such a difficult and terrible world
D. it is natural for him to do well in his lessons in school
European Day of Languages is celebrated（庆祝） on 26 September. BBC News Online reported the attitudes across several European Union countries to languages.
Tamsin Smith, Rome, Italy
Italians place very high importance on learning languages, particularly English. Twenty years ago it was quite difficult to find an English speaker here but today it is quite easy. The strong influence of American and English culture helps young people to learn the English language. They often become familiar with it through Harry Potter books or Disney movies. English schools, where Italian children are taught all their lessons in English, are also becoming popular among rich Italians.
Lucien Libert, Paris, France
Languages are very important in France. A good knowledge of the English language is necessary for many Frenchmen to get a good job and the more languages you can learn, the better. English is the first language you learn in school and you start very young. Most people have at least eight years of learning English at school. Learning German or Spanish comes next and Latin is also taught in most schools. While French people learn languages, there is also a movement to protect the French language.
James Helm, Dublin, Ireland
The English language predominates (占优势) in Ireland, but the ancient Irish language is a lasting source（源头） of pride and interest, and it remains a living tongue that is used in several areas. Schools are required to teach ancient Irish, and most students learn it as part of the subjects. There is a continuing discussion about how to protect the language best. In recent years some primary schools have introduced foreign language classes for younger students, and the Irish government has tried to encourage schools to offer more languages such as French, Spanish, German and Italian.
68. The best title of the passage would be ____.
A. European Day of Languages
B. BBC News Online
C. English Learning in Europe
D. Attitudes to Languages in Europe 69. Which of these countries have realized they should protect their own languages?
A. Both Italy and France.
B. Both Italy and Ireland.
C. Both France and Ireland. D. All of the three countries.
70. What can help you get a better job in France?
A. Learning several languages well.
B. Studying abroad for some time.
C. Learning English at younger ages.
D. Knowing how to protect the French language.
71. In Ireland most students ____.
A. prefer English to the ancient Irish language
B. have to spend time learning the ancient Irish language
C. are asked to learn more than six different languages
D. don’t know how to protect the English language
Modern science suggests that a healthy lifestyle matters much to how long you can live and how well you live. Here are some tips for you to form a healthy lifestyle.
Keep a scientific diet. Keep in mind that sugar can be removed (去除) from our diet completely. Over intake (摄取量) of sugar is one of the main reasons for getting fat. Over intake of protein (蛋白质) or fat and low intake of fiber can also lead to getting fat. Only a few grams of protein do we need every day to keep our body in order. Like rain to crops, not the more the better.
Be always in a good mood. There is a relationship between the mood and health. A good mood keeps you in high spirits. Thanks to the Internet, we can enjoy and learn much without going out. Take a look at some online shops and pick up some bargains, enjoy music and movies and chat with good friends. Just keep happy.
Enough sleep. Two studies show the reasons why teens and adults don’t have enough sleep. With teens, a major reason is mobile phone use; with adults, it’s work. Meanwhile, a third study of young children shows that lack of sleep in early life may lead to serious problems in future. Everyone needs at least 8-hour sleep to recover from tiredness and the hurt caused by hard work in the daytime.
Proper exercise. Do exercise to keep away from fatness. Because of the quick pace of the modern life, you don’t have time to do exercise every day, but at least three times a week and 45 minutes each time.
72. Which of the following can lead to getting fat according to the passage?
A. Low intake of protein.
B. Low intake of fat.
C. Over intake of fiber.
D. Over intake of sugar.
73. The main reason why teenagers don’t have enough sleep is that they ____.
A. use mobile phones too much
B. have too much homework
C. eat too much sugar every day
D. don’t have enough exercise
74. How many minutes do you need to do exercise at least every week?
A. 45 minutes. B. 90 minutes.
C. 115 minutes. D. 135 minutes.
75. In which part of the newspaper are you most likely to find this passage?
A. Medical care.
B. Modern science.
C. Health Report.
D. School Experience.
第四部分·写作
第一节 单词语篇填空（满分10分）
请认真阅读下列短文，按要求填出符合短文意思的正确英语单词，注意：其中有的所缺单词已给出首字母，有的已给出中文意思，有的要求考生按上下文的意思填出完整、正确形式的单词。所填单词要求拼写正确和形式符合英语写作要求，使短文通顺、流畅，并将正确答案写在试题右边的相对应的横线中。
Susan Clancy realized that her wallet was gone on her way home.
She knew it fell off her b____ when she got off the bus to give her daughter 76. ____
the birthday cake. Soon, she called her daughter up to go b____ to look for 77. ____
it. “I was hoping it was there. It had my ____ (执照) and ID card, but no 78. ____
money,” she said on the p____. 79. ____
When Erin Clancy ____ (返回), the wallet wasn’t there. She asked a 80. ____
homeless man ____ he had seen a wallet, and he pulled a small one 81. ____
from his pocket. “He said he couldn’t just give it to her, so he asked for the ____ 82. ____
on the ID, and she told him ____ was Susan Clancy.” Susan Clancy said. 83. ____
Susan Clancy said the man’s ____ (诚实) has changed the way she 84. ____
treats people living on the street and she will c____ more about them. 85. ____
第二节 书面表达 （满分25分）
虽然刚刚升入高中，但是你一定已经学习英语很多年了吧，也一定在学习英语的过程中遇到过各种各样的问题，比如词汇、听力或者阅读。现假设我报即将举办英语学习交流会，请你用英语写一篇短文，与其他同学分享一下你在学习英语中遇到的困难以及解决方法。词数100左右。
参考答案及解析
21-25 DBACB 26-30 CDADB
31-35 ACADC 36-40 BACAC
41-45 BDBCC 46-50 ADADB
51-55 CBDAD 56-60 DBDCD
61-65 DABBD 66-70 CADCA
71-75 BDADC 76. bag
77. back 78. licence
79. phone 80. returned
81. if/ whether 82. name
83. it 84. honesty
85. care
书面表达
I have been learning English for three years. I found it difficult to learn it well. The first and biggest problem for me was vocabulary and then listening and reading.
Thanks to my English teacher, I made great progress. Firstly, to increase my vocabulary, he asked me to read lots of English newspapers, magazines and books. Then, he suggested that I should listen to English programs and reports every day and seize every chance to do more speaking both in and out of class. Besides, he asked me to read texts aloud in the morning. By doing so, my English has been improved a lot. And I’m sure I’ll do even better if I keep on doing like this.
21. D。本题考查冠词。本句意为“语言在使用中逐渐发展。为了使用一门外语，我们应该同时学习它的文化。”usage作“使用”讲时，为不可数名词，在本句中是泛指的“使用”，不用加冠词；make use of为固定短语，意为“利用；使用”。
22. B。本题考查情景交际。I’ve got it.我知道了；I beg your pardon?请你再说一遍；Excuse me.劳驾，对不起；Thank you.谢谢。根据答语第二句“她说什么？”可知，第二个人没有听清第一个人说的话，所以本题选择B。
23. A。本题考查短语辨析。come up to 比得上，达到；come out出版，发表；come over顺便来访；come in进来。根据句意“如果你再给我一次机会，我相信我能达到你的期望。”可知答案。
24. C。本题考查动词base的用法。be based on ... 意为“以……为基础”；base 词性为及物动词，其后需接宾语或使用被动语态形式。本句含有定语从句，that引导的从句修饰先行词book，that在从句中作主语。句意为“李冰冰于2009年2月开始销售她的第一本以自己的经历为基础的书。”
25. B。本题考查动词request的用法。request在此处表示“要求。”，后面跟从句时，从句中的谓语动词应该用“should （not）+动词原形”的形式，should可省略。
26. C。本题考查动词辨析。remember记得；realize认识到，了解；recognize认出；辨认出；remind使想起。根据句意“——嗨，Mary。好久不见了，你现在怎么样？——噢，Peter。我没认出是你。我很好。一起去喝一杯怎么样？”可知答案。
27. D。本题考查直接引语与间接引语。根据句式结构可知，本句为一个间接引语，将其还原为直接引语应为My mother said to me, “Don’t speak with such a strange accent.” 直接引语转变为间接引语时将said to变为told，动词不定式的否定式是直接在不定式符号to前加not。
28. A。本题考查形容词native的用法。be native to some place原产于、出身于某地。所以本题选择A。本句意为“这些鸟原产于澳大利亚，但现在，我们可以在中国的动物园里看见它们。”
29. D。本题考查名词辨析。permission允许；conclusion结论；decision决定，决心；expression表示，表达。根据句意“我送医生和护士一些花以感谢他们对我的照顾。”可知答案。
30. B。本题考查副词辨析。exactly确切地；gradually逐渐地；entirely完全地；actually实际上。根据句意“随着越来越多的中国人开始学英语，英语逐渐在我们的日常生活中被使用”可知答案。
31. A。本题考查固定搭配。play a part in为固定搭配，意为“扮演一个角色；参与”。本句意为“Wendy在那个项目中扮演了如此重要的一个角色，以至于在那之后她得到了1000美元的奖励。”
32. C。本题考查短语辨析。for instance与for example表示例如，用于句中时，前后通常要用逗号与句子其他部分隔开；such as例如……，可以直接用于句中，不需要加逗号；the same as与……一样。根据句式结构和句意可知答案。
33. A。本题考查such和so的用法。so和such都可以表示程度，但用法不同。在单数名词前，so通常用于“so + adj. + a /an +n.”，而such通常用于“such + a / an +adj. +n.”。
34. D。本题考查直接引语与间接引语。根据句式结构可知，答话人是在转述他人的话语，所以答语是一个间接引语，这就要求asked之后的从句是陈述语序；根据句意可知，Lucy是问我们是否能教她汉语，所以本题选择D。
35. C。本题考查主谓一致。“the number of+名词”表示“……数量”，作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式；“a number of+复数名词”作主语，意为“许多……”，谓语动词用复数形式。
文章大意：妻子要过生日了，她想要一枚戒指，而她的丈夫却给了她一本圣经。她一气之下离开了丈夫。若干年后，当她整理丈夫遗物时发现她一直想要的戒指就在圣经里面。
36. B。由文章第三段中的提示“She picked it up and found it was the ring she wanted in those days.”可知答案。
37. A。她知道丈夫能“支付得起”这枚戒指，所以在生日之前她对丈夫说想要这枚戒指。
38. C。由文章的第一句“A lady wanted a birthday gift from her husband.”可推出答案。
39. A。由下文中的“... to have such a good wife, and how much he loved her.”可知，他以他的妻子为“骄傲”。
40. C。因为妻子向他要了生日礼物，所以在她生日的那天早上，他给了妻子一个精美的礼品盒。
41. B。她打开了盒子，却发现里面是一本圣经，并不是她想要的礼物。
42. D。从她提高了嗓门向丈夫抱怨，发脾气可知，她很“生气”，故应该用“Angrily”。
43. B。礼物没有满足她，以及下文中提到的离开丈夫，不难得知她很“失望，沮丧”。
44. C。根据下文中的“She owned two large companies.”可知，这位妻子在事业上发展得很成功。
45. C。很多年以后，她“意识”到她的丈夫也已经老了。
46. A。事情已经过去很久了，她想或许应该回家去“拜访”一下丈夫。
47. D。从下文叙述的内容可知，在她去看丈夫之前“收到”了一封信。
48. A。因为丈夫过世后，把财产都留给她了，所以她需要回去“照顾，处理”财产。
49. D。“sadness filled her heart”悲伤笼罩了她的内心。
50. B。根据下文中的“she opened it and began to turn the pages”可知，此处指的是Bible。
51. C。她回到丈夫的房子时，心情很悲伤，所以此处应该是“With tears”。
52. B。根据后面的“from the Bible to the floor”可知，戒指掉到了地板上。
53. D。由下文中的提示“And on the card was the date of her birth ...”可知答案。
54. A。后面所说的内容是一种假设，所以要用if。
55. D。由上文提到的“cannot be seen or even touched”可知，世界上最美好的东西需要用心去体会。
文章大意：儿子转学后变得很消极，父亲去学校开解他。孩子感受到了家人的关心和爱，从此振作起来。
56. D。细节理解题。根据第二段中的“All of this was because he felt worthless and that no one loved him.”可知，这个孩子自我否定，觉得没有人爱他，这就是他改变的原因。
57. B。细节理解题。根据文章第三段的内容可知，这位父亲很担心儿子，不知道他是怎么了，所以决定去学校看望孩子，以便发现问题所在。
58. D。推理判断题。根据上文的内容可知，爸爸的理解和关爱使孩子深深感动而落泪。
59. C。主旨大意题。本文想要表达的是：永远不要低估关心的力量，哪怕是一个小小的关爱的举动都有可能改变一个人的世界。
文章大意：1934年全球经济危机时， 美国罗斯福政府为促进经济的发展，举办了一次全国艺术画展， 此举的确奏效，提升了美国全民共渡难关的勇气。对我们战胜目前的这次经济危机也有着很大的意义。
60. D。 细节理解题。由第一段内容及第二段“…it helped provide jobs for more than three thousand seven hundred artists who were out of work.”可知本项目的推出是为了推动经济的发展 — 解决失业艺术家的就业问题。
61. D。细节理解题。由第二段“They created more than fifteen thousand paintings and sculptures…”可知A错误；由第一段后两句话可知B错误；由最后一段“The Public Works of Art Program only lasted six months.”可知C错误；由最后一段“But it did lift people’s spirits in that hard time.”可知D正确。
62. A。细节理解题。由第三段内容可知答案。
63. B。细节理解题。由第六段“Several paintings show the Americans working. Max Arthur Cohn’s
painting ‘Coal Tower’...”可知答案。
文章大意：作者是一位无神论者，他认为成功和幸福都掌握在自己手中，而非上帝或他人手里。
64. B。词义猜测题。根据文章内容可知，作者认为每个人都有自己的信仰自由，因此他不会“阻止”他人放弃他们的信仰。
65. D。细节理解题。根据文章第三段中的“I know that people enjoy having religion in their lives; some need their faith to help them through hard times. And some do not want the duty of their unlucky accidents weighing down on them.”可知答案。
66. C。推理判断题。根据文章第五段中的“I need to be successful because of my hard work.”和最后一段可推知，作者相信成功和幸福都掌握在自己手中。
67. A。推理判断题。根据文章第二段中的“I believe in myself and the power I have gained through the help of my parents, teachers, and friends — and my own hard work.”可推知，作者认为家人和朋友的支持很重要。
文章大意：三个来自不同欧盟国家的人谈了各自国家的人们对语言学习的态度。
68. D。主旨大意题。文章第一段中的“BBC News Online reported the attitudes across several European Union countries to languages.”起到总领下文的作用，由此可得出答案。
69. C。细节理解题。只有来自法国和爱尔兰的两个人谈到了对本族语言的保护问题。
70. A。细节理解题。文中这位法国人描述：要想找到好的工作，学好英语是必须的；同时掌握的语言越多，获得好工作的几率就越大。
71. B。推理判断题。根据“Schools are required to teach ancient Irish, and most students learn it as part of the subjects.”可推知，在爱尔兰大部分学生必须要学习古爱尔兰语。
文章大意：如今，生活节奏加快，健康的生活方式对人们越来越重要，那么如何养成健康的生活方式呢？本文为大家提供了几点建议。
72. D。细节理解题。根据第二段“Over intake of sugar is one of the main reasons for getting fat. Over intake of protein or fat and low intake of fiber can also lead to getting fat.”可知，吃过量的糖是使人发胖的主要原因之一。
73. A。细节理解题。根据第四段“With teens, a major reason is mobile phone use”可知答案。
74. D。细节计算题。根据文章最后一段可知，作者建议每星期至少锻炼三次，每次45分钟，故每星期锻炼的时间最少应该是135分钟。
75. C。推理判断题。本文针对的是人们在生活中的健康问题 — 如何养成健康的生活方式，故我们最有可能在Health Report栏目中看到。
Unit1--Unit 2 测试题
Ⅱ. 语言知识及应用（共两节，满分35分）
第一节 完形填空(共10小题；每小题2分，满分20分)
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从21-30各题所给的A、B、C和D项中，选出最佳选项。
Three workers are laying bricks. A passer-by asks them what they are doing. The first one replies, “I am laying bricks.” The second one says, “Don’t you see I’m
21 a house in order to make a living?” The third one answers, “I’m building a beautiful building which will stand for my hard work.”
The three workers do the 22 thing, but they have different 23 on what they are doing. They have different attitudes to their work. Will their attitudes 24 their performance? It is 25 that the answer is “yes”.
A great artist had made many beautiful statues (雕像). He was very experienced. But when he worked on a new 26 , he thought for many days. Why? Because he wanted to make it 27 . He improved many small details (细节). His friends thought these improvements were not
28 and asked him why he 29 it again and again. He replied, “Small things make perfection but perfection is not a small thing. I must try my best so that I can make the best statue in the world.”
Most people 30 how fast you did a job, but they remember how well it was done.
21. A. building B. painting C. drawing D. opening
22. A. right B. wonderful C. interesting D. same
23. A. suggestions B. ways C. views D. expressions
24. A. leave B. influence C. miss D. replace
25. A. simple B. certain C. possible D. correct
26. A. statue B. picture C. monument D. building
27. A. valuable B. difficult C. dangerous D. perfect
28. A. lovely B. comfortable C. important D. successful
29. A. changed B. controlled C. explored D. measured
30. A. praise B. forget C. admire D. think
第二节 语法填空 (共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分)
阅读下面短文，按照句子结构的语法性和上下文连贯的要求，在空格处填入一个适当的词或使用括号中词语的正确形式填空，并将答案填写在后面标号为31-40的相应位置上。
The sky was gray. It was almost noon, but the sun
31 (hide) by a gray blanket. There were no birds flying anywhere. A couple of birds sat 32 the telephone wire. Bob was standing outside talking to Bill. 33 both knew that it was probably going to rain 34 (short). A sudden wind blew some leaves off a tree onto the sidewalk.
Bob told Bill 35 (look) at the young woman in a dark blue coat and jeans. She was walking a small dog. It was so lovely 36 they liked it very much. It played under a tree. The woman waited patiently. Finally, the dog lifted one of 37 legs.
Bob said he liked the rain. It was a nice change from the usual hot weather. And 38 plants here also needed the rain. Bob asked Bill 39 he didn’t like it. Bill said all the motor oil and rubbish on the streets would get washed into the ocean. “But that never stops the surfers,” Bob said. “They don’t seem to care what’s 40 the sea water, as long as there’re waves to surf on.”
31. ____ 32. ____ 33. ____ 34. ____ 35. ____
36. ____ 37. ____ 38. ____ 39. ____ 40. ____
Ⅲ. 阅读 （共两节，满分40分）
第一节 阅读理解 （共15小题；每小题2分，满分30分）
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的A、B、C和D项中，选出最佳选项。
■
A
难度：★
Last night I drove a long way (about 500 km) to return home. It was late and I was driving fast because I wanted to get home as soon as possible. So several times when I was driving behind a slow-moving truck on a narrow road, I wanted to shout at the driver ahead.
Then I came to a crossroad with a traffic light. As I drove near, it turned red. I stopped my car at once. I looked left，right and behind. I found no cars or persons — I was alone on the road. The person who would come to the crossroad was at least a mile away in any direction. Certainly going through the light would cause no danger. I could pass the traffic light. But strangely enough, I just stopped there, waiting for several minutes until the light went green. I asked myself why I refused to run the light. Surely it was unnecessary for me to be afraid of danger or being fined (罚款), because there were no cars or police around at all. But I remained waiting until the light changed.
When I finally got home, it was near midnight. My wife had fallen asleep. The question of why I stopped for that light came back to me again, because I stopped another two times for the red lights as “special” as the first one. I stopped, not because of the law, but because it was a good habit I had developed. In fact, we were used to doing something right just because we have made obeying the rules a good habit. We do it just because we should do it. I thought if another man met with the same thing, he would make the same choice. I believed so. And I could be trusted (信任) by others. I believed that everyone would and could control (控制) himself/herself well. It was amazing that we trusted each other to do the right things, wasn’t it?
41. When the author drove behind the slow-moving truck, he felt ____.
A. confused but happy B. sleepy and tired
C. excited but tired D. angry and worried
42. Who made the author stopped at the crossroad?
A. A policeman. B. The author’s wife.
C. The author himself. D. Another driver.
43. The author waited until the light went green because ____.
A. running the light would make him fined B. he was afraid to cause an accident
C. he was prevented by the passers-by D. he was used to obeying traffic rules
44. The author is a person who ____.
A. believes others easily B. can control himself well
C. treats others very unfriendly D. is very experienced in driving
45. We can infer from the passage that ____.
A. running the light could help the author get home earlier
B. the author’s wife was angry because he got home late
C. the truck driver in front of the author might be drunk
D. it was very necessary to have very strict traffic rules
B
难度：★★
If you were on the street in Mexico today you might think you were in an operating room, surrounded by doctors. You could see many concerned people with masks (口罩) trying their best to stop the swine flu (猪流感). And the masks aren’t only being used in Mexico. A friend of mine traveling from New York City to Florida was given a mask and a pair of gloves just after he reached the airport. And another friend went to get a haircut only to be faced with a hairdresser wearing a mask!
But do the masks really work? Is covering your nose and mouth the key to stopping the swine flu? To find out the truth, ABC’s reporter Sharyn Alfonsi talked with germ (细菌) expert Dr. Elaine Larsen. It turns out that when you sneeze (打喷嚏) the air coming out of your mouth at a speed of one hundred miles per hour carries germs which can travel anywhere around you and make people around you infected (被感染).
However, whether you become infected actually depends on the weather. As Sharyn reported, when you sneeze, the germs leave your body in small drops of water coming out of your mouth. If the weather is wet, the wet air will make the small drops bigger and heavier and they drop down towards our feet. If this happens, we won’t become infected. But if the air is dry, those small drops can float higher up, making it possible for them to touch someone else’s nose, mouth or their mask.
Larsen says the masks can stop the germs well but after a few hours, they start to get wet, holding a lot of germs they come across and causing you to breathe them in. The masks do work, but the key to stopping the germs is changing your masks often.
46. According to Para.1, in Mexico you can see that ____. A. the patients are treated in the open air B. some doctors work in the street
C. people speak little to each other in the street D. many people wear masks in the street
47. According to the passage a patient spreads germs mainly through ____.
A. breathing
B. speaking
C. touching others
D. sneezing
48. We learn from the passage that on a wet day ____.
A. sick people will be infected B. germs can spread very far
C. germs spread very quickly
D. few people will be infected
49. If you keep wearing a mask for a long time, ____.
A. the mask will be old and worn out
B. you’ll love the feeling of wearing it
C. germs will be kept away from you
D. it will be easy for you to be infected
50. What should we pay attention to when wearing masks?
A. Keeping the masks dry.
B. Changing the masks often.
C. Choosing very thick masks.
D. Wearing big masks.
C
难度：★★★
Would you want a doctor who got high marks in medical school just for trying really, really hard? Clearly, many college students would have no problem with that. They believe students are owed a good grade simply because they put a lot of effort into a class.
The researchers asked more than eight hundred undergraduates (大学生) if they agreed or disagreed with some statements. For example, “If I have completed most of the reading for a class, I should get a B in that course.” And, “A professor should not be vexed with me if I receive an important call during class. Instead, he should understand me.”
Just sixteen percent thought it was OK to take that phone call. But sixty-six percent agreed that a professor should consider effort and not just the quality of a
student’s work when deciding grades. And forty percent thought they should get a B, the second highest mark, just because they did most of the reading for class.
The findings appeared in the Journal of Youth and Adolescence. The students were aged from eighteen to twenty-five.
Some experts are not surprised that students often see no difference between effort and results. Social critics like to say that in children’s activities these days, everyone gets an award (奖) just for trying. Or so it may seem.
Yet getting into the best colleges is much more difficult than ever before. Students may worry that low grades will keep them out of graduate school (研究生院) or a good job.
And there may be another explanation: pressure from parents to get a good return on the family’s investment (投资). These days, college can cost more than a house.
A former teaching assistant recently wrote to the New York Times about his experience with grade expectations. He would try to explain it this way when students asked for a top grade just for studying hard in chemistry class:
What if a baseball player came to spring training and worked harder than all the others, but still could not play well. Would the team accept him anyway, just because he tried so hard?
The students would say no. But most of them would still ask for an A.
51. The underlined word “vexed” in the second paragraph probably means ____.
A. patient B. worried
C. pleased D. angry
52. What can we know according to the passage?
A. Most students think effort should be considered as well as results.
B. Some experts see little difference between effort and results.
C. Everyone should get a prize just for trying hard.
D. College costs parents as much money as a house.
53. From the research, we know forty percent of the students ____.
A. thought it OK to receive an important call during class
B. agreed that their grades should be based on their effort
C. thought they should get the second highest mark
D. were from eighteen to twenty-four years old
54. According to the passage, one of the effects low grades have on students is that ____.
A. they may not get a good job after graduation
B. their parents will not support them
C. they will be looked down upon by others
D. they might be criticized by their teachers
55. What is the author’s attitude toward “high marks just for trying”?
A. Doubtful. B. Unclear.
C. Bored. D. Supportive.
第二节 信息匹配（共5小题；每小题2分，满分10分）以下是一些公园的简介：
A. Disney’s California Adventure Park
If you are planning a Southern California trip for your family, make a stop at Disneyland and enjoy all the magic. It is the perfect place to spend a fun-filled day the whole family will enjoy.
B. The Water Park
Located in the center of a coastal street, the Water Park is the biggest in Europe and the first to arrive on the island of Rhodes. The Water Park will offer wonderful rides, special splash pools and water slides.
C. Honeymoon Island State Park
Honeymoon Island State Park is 385 acres (英亩) in land area with 2,400 acres under the surface of water and 4 miles of beach. Activities in the park include birding, fishing, hiking and sunbathing.
D. The Highland Wildlife Park
Experience Scottish wildlife as well as international endangered animals of mountains in the wonderful setting of the Highland Wildlife Park. Drive around the park in your own car and then examine the walk-round area on foot, looking out for tigers!
E. Budapest Memento Park
Budapest Memento Park is a famous park in Budapest, which consists of five semicircles (半圆形), with six statues standing along each. The semicircles include a larger circle. There are large statues of workers, heroes and also leaders.
F. Islands of Adventure
Islands of Adventure is a theme park located in Orlando, Florida. It is a world of fun. From high-speed roller coasters to ground-breaking 3D attractions, Islands of Adventure is where unforgettable experiences happen every day.
以下是想去公园游玩的一些游客的信息，请根据这些信息匹配他/她要游览的公园：
56. John is studying in Florida and he wants to go to an adventure park with his friends on the coming weekend. He hopes to try high-speed roller coasters.
57. Jane is two years old and she has never seen any real bears or tigers herself. Her parents will take her to a wildlife park next week, so the girl is very excited.
58. George is planning a tour of Hungary during his vacation. He would like to photograph some old buildings in Budapest and also wants to visit the famous statue park.
59. Helen and her husband decide to celebrate their daughter’s birthday in Disneyland. They believe she will like it very much.
60. Jack loves fishing very much. He has listened to the weather forecast that tomorrow will be a fine day, so he decides to go to a park and have a great time.
Ⅳ. 写作 （共两节，满分40分）
第一节 基础写作（共1小题；满分15分）
假设你是王林，作为一名交流学生来到英国小镇学习。经过一周的学习，请根据下表提示将你在异乡看到的一切通过e-mail告诉你的父母。
【写作内容】
■
[写作要求]
1. 必须使用5个句子介绍所给出的全部内容；
2. 信的开头、结尾已经给出，不计入必写句子内。可以适当增删细节。
[评分标准]
概括准确，语言规范，内容合适，篇章连贯。
Dear father and mother,
How are you?
One week has passed. I’m very fine here.
In a word, I’m very happy to be with them.
Yours,
Wang Lin
第二节 选做题一 读写任务 （共1小题；满分25分）
阅读下面的短文，然后按照要求写一篇150词左右的英语短文。
During the holidays, two friends, Tom and Peter, were traveling in the desert. As they were walking, they had an argument, and Tom was so angry that he slapped (掴) Peter hard in the face. Peter felt hurt, but saying nothing,and he wrote down some words in the sand: “Today my best friend Tom slapped me in the face.”
It was very hot, but they kept on walking and walking until they found an oasis(绿洲), where they decided to take a bath. Suddenly Peter got stuck in the mire(泥沼) and asked for help. Seeing that, Tom rushed over and saved him immediately. After Peter got recovered from that, he wrote with a knife on a stone: “Today my best friend Tom saved my life.”
Feeling curious, Tom, who had slapped and saved his best friend, asked Peter, “After I beat you, you wrote something in the sand but just now you put down what I had done on a stone. Why?”
Peter replied: “When someone hurts us, we should take it down in the sand where winds of forgiveness can erase it away. But when someone does something good for us, we must carve (刻) it in a stone where no wind can ever erase it.”
Hearing that, Tom was deeply moved and understood what Peter had said and what he had done.
[写作内容]
请你谈谈读了这个故事以后的感受。内容包括以下要点：
1. 以约30个词概括上述故事的要点；
2. 以约120个词就Peter的行为发表你的看法，内容包括：
1） Tom 感动的原因？
2） 你从这个故事中学到了什么？简要说明其理由。
[写作要求]
可以使用实例来支持你的论点，也可以参照阅读材料的内容论述，但不得直接引用原文中的句子。
[评分标准]
概括准确，语言规范，内容合适，篇章连贯。
参考答案
21-25 ADCBB 26-30 ADCAB
31. was hidden 32. on
33. They 34. shortly
35. to look 36. that
37. its 38. the
39. why 40. in
41-45 DCDBA 46-50 DDDDB
51-55 DACAB 56-60 FDEAC
基础写作
Dear father and mother,
How are you?
One week has passed. I’m very fine here.
The school here is only a ten-minute ride from where I stay and it is three times bigger than my school in our country and it is surrounded by green trees and flowers just like a garden. Modern buildings are everywhere, such as the stadium, art room, laboratory and reading room.
There are 20 students in my class, nine girls and eleven boys and they are all very friendly. I have chosen math, physics, chemistry and English this term. Teachers here usually teach us in the way of discussion so that we can take an active part in the activities in class.
In a word, I’m very happy to be with them.
Yours,
Wang Lin
读写任务
While traveling in the desert, Tom slapped Peter in the face, and Peter wrote it down in the sand. But when Tom saved Peter, Peter carved that down in a stone.
In this story, Tom was touched by what Peter had done, because Peter was ready to forgive others by forgetting unhappy things and he would remember and value it forever when his life was saved. What we can learn from Peter is how to get along well with friends and how to deal with others’ kindness and rudeness.
As for me, not everyone can do what Peter did if such things happen to him. In my eyes, Peter is really a good model for us. One’s attitude towards things is very important. So let’s try to be kind to the people who have done something unpleasant to us, and remember those who have helped us. Anyway, true friendship never comes easily.
Unit1--Unit 2 测试题
第一节 单项填空（共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分）
21. — How can _____ car stop in the middle of the road?
— Maybe it has run out of _____ petrol.
A. a; a B. a; the
C. the; a D. the; 不填
22. — Oh, come with us together. It will be fun having you.
— ____. But I have an important date tonight. Have a good time.
A. No problem B. Thanks anyway
C. All right D. Never mind
23. If you have a good ____ of foreign
languages, you will have no difficulty working for Expo 2010 Shanghai China.
A. requirement B. command
C. request D. series
24. My manager told me ____ the same mistake again or I would be fired.
A. don’t make B. not make
C. not to make D. to not make
25. The girl got very upset _____ what her good friend had done to her.
A. because of B. because
C. since D. as
26. Bill’s fully ____ from his heart disease. He is very happy.
A. suffered B. returned
C. resulted D. recovered
27. Tom ____ skating, so he spends all his spare time on it.
A. is popular with
B. is concerned about
C. is proud of
D. is crazy about
28. More than one means ____ since Tom learned the new language, but he still
doesn’t perform well.
A. is taken
B. are taken
C. has been taken
D. have been taken
29. Some people were scared of the H1N1 flu virus. But ____ it was not as deadly as other flu viruses.
A. entirely B. frequently
C. actually D. gradually
30. He rode in such a hurry that he was close to ____ by a car when crossing the street.
A. being hit B. be hit
C. hitting D. having been hit
31. ____ it or not, his first attempt was a great success.
A. Believe B. To believe
C. Believing D. Believed
32. Hai Zi is very popular with young
people ____ he has been dead for many years.
A. ever since B. even if
C. as if D. so that
33. — What did Tina say just now?
— She asked ____ this summer
holiday.
A. could you teach her dance
B. you could teach her dance
C. if could you teach her dance
D. if you could teach her dance
34. ____ miss the exam, the girl got up
earlier this morning.
A. In order to not B. In order not to
C. So not as to D. So as not to
35. The college entrance exam is ____ important to the student, and it’s also challenging.
A. no more than B. no less than
C. more than D. not more than
第二节 完形填空（共20小题；每小题1.5
分，满分30分）
My grandfather died in 1970, leaving my grandmother living in their old house alone. Shortly after that, we went to the animal shelter (收容所) and picked out a little 36 to accompany Grandma. The dog was named Penny.
Grandma and Penny quickly became very attached (依恋) to each other, and that attachment grew much 37 as years passed — they became very 38 . When Grandma went to 39 , Penny walked along and lay 40 her until she woke up. 41 Penny aged, she could no longer jump up on the 42 to lie next to Grandma, so she lay on the blanket (毯子) beside the bed. Grandma never went anywhere without her partner by her side.
The time came when both my grandmother and Penny were becoming
43 . Grandma had been sent to hospital several times, and Penny couldn’t 44 around very well. When Grandma was in hospital, Penny would sit at the window
45 out for the car bringing Grandma home and would 46 wait at the door when Grandma came through it. Each homecoming was a great meeting again between the two.
On Christmas Day in 1985, Grandma was again 47 to the hospital. Penny,
48 , sat watching out the window for the 49 bringing Grandma home. Two mornings later, I 50 she couldn’t stand and wouldn’t eat. Later, she had difficulty in breathing. I quickly 51 her to the hospital where Grandma stayed to let her see her 52 for the last time. There, as soon as Penny saw Grandma, Penny’s eyes brightened suddenly and then slowly 53 . Grandma left this world, several 54 later.
After fifteen years of loving friendship, Grandma and Penny passed away on the same day. God had it all worked out — Penny was waiting at the door to 55 her when Grandma came home.
36. A. mouse B. cat C. bird D. dog
37. A. stronger B. higher C. farther D. longer
38. A. similar B. gentle C. friendly D. close
39. A. work B. hospital C. sleep D. church
40. A. on B. beside C. under D. below
41. A. Since B. While C. As D. Though
42. A. table B. bed C. chair D. blanket
43. A. lost B. active C. weak D. tired
44. A. lie B. walk C. play D. jump
45. A. looking B. crying C. climbing D. getting
46. A. worriedly B. hurriedly C. excitedly D. disappointedly
47. A. invited B. taken C. led D. moved
48. A. as usual B. in time C. by accident D. at once
49. A. car B. truck C. bus D. bicycle
50. A. believed B. guessed C. heard D. found
51. A. guided B. posted C. sent D. followed
52. A. owner B. mothe rC. doctor D. saver
53. A. opened B. brightened C. closed D. wetted
54. A. hours B. days C. weeks D. months
55. A. call B. help C. miss D. greet
第Ⅰ卷·第三部分·阅读理解
Last night I drove a long way (about 500 km) to return home. It was late and I was driving fast because I wanted to get home as soon as possible. So several times when I was driving behind a slow-moving truck on a narrow road, I wanted to shout at the driver ahead.
Then I came to a crossroad with a traffic light. As I drove near, it turned red. I stopped my car at once. I looked left，right and behind. I found no cars or persons — I was alone on the road. The person who would come to the crossroad was at least a mile away in any direction. Certainly going through the light would cause no danger. I could pass the traffic light. But strangely enough, I just stopped there, waiting for several minutes until the light went green. I asked myself why I refused to run the light. Surely it was unnecessary for me to be afraid of danger or being fined (罚款), because there were no cars or police around at all. But I remained waiting until the light changed.
When I finally got home, it was near midnight. The question of why I stopped for that light came back to me again, because I stopped another two times for the red lights as “special” as the first one. I stopped, not because of the law, but because it was a good habit I had developed. In fact, we were used to doing something right just because we have made obeying the rules a good habit. We do it just because we should do it. I thought if another man met with the same thing, he would make the same choice. I believed so. I believed that everyone would and could control (控制) himself/herself well.
56. When the author drove behind the
slow-moving truck, he felt ____.
A. confused but happy
B. sleepy and tired
C. excited but tired
D. angry and worried
57. The author waited until the light went green because ____.
A. running the light would make him fined
B. he was afraid to cause an accident
C. he was prevented by the passers-by
D. he was used to obeying traffic rules
58. The author is a person who ____.
A. believes others easily
B. can control himself well
C. treats others very unfriendly
D. is very experienced in driving
59. We can infer from the passage that ____.
A. running the light could help the author get home earlier
B. the author’s wife was angry because he got home late
C. the truck driver in front of the author might be drunk
D. it was very necessary to have very strict traffic rules
If you were on the street in Mexico today you might think you were in an operating room, surrounded by doctors. You could see many concerned people with masks (口罩) trying their best to stop the swine flu (猪流感). And the masks aren’t only being used in Mexico. A friend of mine traveling from New York City to Florida was given a mask and a pair of gloves just after he reached the airport. And another friend went to get a haircut only to be faced with a hairdresser wearing a mask!
But do the masks really work? Is covering your nose and mouth the key to stopping the swine flu? To find out the truth, ABC’s reporter Sharyn Alfonsi talked with germ (细菌) expert Dr. Elaine Larsen. It turns out that when you sneeze (打喷嚏) the air coming out of your mouth at a speed of one hundred miles per hour carries germs which can travel anywhere around you and make people around you infected (被感染).
However, whether you become infected actually depends on the weather.As Sharyn reported, when you sneeze, the germs leave your body in small drops of water coming out of your mouth. If the weather is wet, the wet air will make the small drops bigger and heavier and they drop down towards our feet. If this happens, we won’t become infected. But if the air is dry, those small drops can float higher up, making it possible for them to touch someone else’s nose, mouth or their mask.
Larsen says the masks can stop the germs well but after a few hours, they start to get wet, holding a lot of germs they come across and causing you to breathe them in. The masks do work, but the key to stopping the germs is changing your masks often.
60. According to Para.1, in Mexico you can see that ____.
A. the patients are treated in the open air
B. some doctors work in the street
C. many people wear masks in the
street
D. people speak little to each other in the street
61. According to the passage a patient spreads germs mainly through ____.
A. breathing B. touching others
C. sneezing D. speaking
62. We learn from the passage that on a wet day ____.
A. few people will be infected
B. germs can spread very far
C. germs spread very quickly
D. sick people will be infected
63. If you keep wearing a mask for a long time, ____.
A. it will be easy for you to be infected
B. the mask will be old and worn out
C. germs will be kept away from you
D. you’ll love the feeling of wearing it
Would you want a doctor who got high marks in medical school just for trying really, really hard? Clearly, many college students would have no problem with that. They believe students are owed a good grade simply because they put a lot of effort into a class.
The researchers asked more than eight hundred undergraduates (大学生) if they agreed or disagreed with some statements. For example, “If I have completed most of the reading for a class, I should get a B in that course.” And, “A professor should not be angry with me if I receive an important call during class. Instead, he should understand me.”
Just sixteen percent thought it was OK to take that phone call. But sixty-six percent agreed that a professor should consider effort and not just the quality of a student’s work when deciding grades. And forty percent thought they should get a B, the second highest mark, just because they did most of the reading for class.
The findings appeared in the Journal of Youth and Adolescence. The students were aged from eighteen to twenty-five.
Some experts are not surprised that students often see no difference between effort and results. Social critics like to say that in children’s activities these days, everyone gets an award (奖) just for trying. Or so it may seem.
Yet getting into the best colleges is much more difficult than ever before. Students may worry that low grades will keep them out of graduate school (研究生院) or a good job.
And there may be another explanation: pressure from parents to get a good return on the family’s investment (投资). These days, college can cost more than a house.
64. Why do many college students think they should get a good grade?
A. Because they are good at what they learn.
B. Because they make a lot of effort in class.
C. Because they get on well with their professors.
D. Because they can finish their tasks in a short time.
65. What can we know according to the passage?
A. Most students think effort should be considered as well as results.
B. Some experts see little difference between effort and results.
C. Everyone should get a prize just for trying hard.
D. College costs parents as much
money as a house.
66. From the research, we know forty
percent of the students ____.
A. thought it OK to receive an
important call during class
B. agreed that their grades should be
based on their effort
C. thought they should get the second highest mark
D. were from eighteen to twenty-four
years old
67. What is the author’s attitude toward “high marks just for trying”?
A. Doubtful. B. Unclear.
C. Bored. D. Supportive.
International students are allowed to work for the university they study at or for a business at the school. But the business must directly provide a service for students. You could work at the bookstore, for example, but not for a company that is building something at the school. Also, a foreign student cannot take the place of an American in a job.
International students can work 20 hours a week while having classes; more during school breaks. You can work until you finish your studies.
International students normally cannot take a job that has nothing to do with their school. But the government may give permission if students are suddenly faced with difficulties. Examples include large medical bills, the shortage of financial (财政上的) aid or an unexpected change in the financial support.
Students must also meet other conditions (条件). They must have studied at their American school for at least one year. Students must ask for permission again after a year if they want to continue an off-campus (校外的) job.
International students who will be studying at graduate school can apply (申请) for some jobs before they come to the United States. A good example is a university job like a teaching or research assistant.
Some schools pay their assistants. Others provide free education in return. Many do both. Graduate assistants might teach, give tests, grade work, help with research and clean the offices. Many universities now provide language training for foreign teaching assistants to help them improve their English. Some schools ask foreign students to pass an English speaking test before they are allowed to teach.
International student offices at schools have to provide information on students each term for the Department of Homeland Security. Students who violate visa (签证) rules — for example, by working off-campus without permission — could be sent home.
68. What can we learn according to the passage?
A. All the international students can
work for large companies.
B. International students are able to
work whenever they like.
C. International students may be
allowed to work outside the school when having financial trouble.
D. International students must have
studied at their American school for less than a year to get a job.
69. We may infer from the passage that ____.
A. international students could apply for some jobs before coming to the US
B. all the schools pay their assistants and provide free education for them
C. international students cannot take their jobs before having language training
D. international students normally are not completely free to choose their jobs
70. The underlined word “violate” in the last paragraph probably means ____.
A. ask for B. go against
C. forget D. obey
71. What is the passage mainly about?
A. The rules about getting a job while studying in the US for international students.
B. The reason why international
students like studying in the United States.
C. What international students should do while working in the United States.
D. How international students could
find jobs while studying in the US.
Travelling is an exciting experience. It makes us feel pleased, and enjoy new wonders and new part of life that we’ve never known. A single holiday trip can give you the freedom and the chance to make changes that daily life does not allow. It matters little where you go on your holiday; it is all in what you make of it. Any travel can be interesting and attractive, giving you memories (回忆) to last a lifetime.
Having those memories is truly what travels are all about. Many people say that a bit of planning and research before you leave can make sure of those long-lasting memories. But why not try something unexpected? In fact, the most unforgettable moments of a travel experience are the ones that you don’t plan for. Yes, maybe you’ll experience a bad meal in an unfamiliar place. But these experiences will make sure you find out little-known shops or an open-air theatre production that is only advertised in the local paper.
You’ll find the enjoyable moments happening all around you: a wonderful sunset (晚霞) or a small child playing in the puddles (水洼) of a cobble (鹅卵石) road. The magic will truly be in the trip you take. Take time to go for a long walk for enjoyment when visiting a new place, which will allow you to listen, smell, and see the different culture and sights that your busy life may stop you from enjoying.
Simple things such as a leaf from a tree you sat under can keep the memories of your travel alive for years to come. Collect small things such as leaves, stones, or feathers (羽毛), which can be turned into memorable works of art when you return home.
72. What can we learn from the passage?
A. There is no need to choose where to go on holiday.
B. Travelling is a good way for people to understand life.
C. Small things around you always
look simple.
D. Plans can make travelling become
uninteresting.
73. According to the author, travelling is all about ____.
A. enjoying natural wonders of the
world
B. having a healthy life
C. having unforgettable experiences D. visiting places of interest
74. If you want a most unforgettable travel experience, you could ____.
A. learn much about the new place
B. try something unplanned
C. find out as many local activities as
possible
D. research into all the possible ways of travelling
75. What is really magical in the trip?
A. The beautiful local scenery.
B. The joy from a long walk.
C. The different culture and place.
D. The enjoyment around you.
第Ⅱ卷·第四部分·写作
第一节 单词语篇填空（满分10分）
请认真阅读下列短文，按要求填出符合短文意思的正确英语单词，注意：其中有的所缺单词已给出首字母，有的已给出中文意思，有的要求考生按上下文的意思填出完整、正确形式的单词。所填单词要求拼写正确和形式符合英语写作要求，使短文通顺、流畅，并将正确答案写在试题右边的相对应的横线中。
Three workers are laying bricks(砖). A passer-by(行人)
asks them what they are doing. The first one a______, “I am 76. ______
laying bricks.” The second one says, “I’m building a house
in order to make a ______.” The third one replies, “I’m 77. ______
building a beautiful building which will stand f______ my hard work.” 78. ______
The three workers do the ______ thing, but they have different 79. ______
______(观点) on what they are doing. It is certain that their attitudes 80. ______
will i______ their performances (表现，业绩). 81. ______
A great ______(艺术家) had made many beautiful statues (雕像). He 82. ______
was very experienced. But when he worked on a new statue, he would
think for many days, because he wanted to make it ______(完美的). 83. ______
Most people ______ how fast they did a job, but they 84. ______
remember how ______(好) it was done. 85. ______
第二节 书面表达 （满分25分）
假设你是王林，作为一名交流学生来到英国小镇学习。经过一周的学习，请根据下表提示将你在异乡看到的一切通过e-mail告诉你的父母。
注意：
1. 信的开头、结尾已经给出，不计入总词数。可以适当增加细节。
2. 词数：120左右。
参考词汇：surround 围绕；stadium 体育场
Dear father and mother,
How are you?
One week has passed. I’m very fine here.
__________________________________
__________________________________
Yours,
Wang Lin
参考答案及解析
21-25 DBBCA 26-30 DDCCA
31-35 ABDBC 36-40 DADCB
41-45 CBCBA 46-50 CBAAD
51-55 CACAD 56-60 DDBAC
61-65 CAABA 66-70 CBCDB
71-75 ABCBD 76. answers
77. living 78. for
79. same 80. views
81. influence 82. artist
83. perfect 84. forget
85. well
书面表达
Dear father and mother,
How are you?
One week has passed. I’m very fine here.
Everything interests me very much. The school here is only a ten-minute ride from where I stay. To my surprise, I find it even three times bigger than my school in our country. And it’s surrounded by green trees and flowers just like a garden. Lots of modern buildings are everywhere, such as the stadium, art room, laboratory and reading room. And I can play football on the playground in my spare time.
There are 20 students in my class, nine girls and eleven boys. They are all very friendly. I have chosen math, physics, chemistry and English this term. Teachers here usually teach us with the method of discussion so that we can take an active part in the activities in class. In a word, I’m very happy to be with them.
Yours,
Wang Lin
21. D。考查冠词。car为可数名词，此处是特指，指停在路中央的车，所以用定冠词the修饰。petrol为不可数名词，不能用不定冠词修饰。
22. B。考查情景交际。根据前者的话语中可以看出，前者有邀请后者的意思；再根据后者的答语“But I have an important date tonight. Have a good time.”可知，后者不能去。根据语境可知，B项Thanks anyway（无论如何谢谢你）为正确答案。
23. B。考查固定用法。have a good command of 意为“精通”。本句意为“如果你精通外语的话，你为2010年中国上海世博会服务就不会有困难了。”
24. C。考查间接引语。根据句式结构可知，本句为一个间接引语，将其还原为直接引语应为My manager said to me, “Don’t make the same mistake again or you will be fired.” 直接引语转变为间接引语后将said to变为told，动词不定式的否定式是直接在不定式符号to前加not。所以本题选择C。
25. A。考查because of用法。because是连词，引导一个原因状语从句；because of是介词短语，后面接名词性成分，包括介词的宾语从句；since当连词讲时，可引导时间状语从句和原因状语从句，当介词讲时意为“自……以来”；as当连词讲时，可引导时间状语从句和原因状语从句，当介词讲时表示“担任……，如同……”。根据句式结构和句意可知，填空处之后为一个由what引导的宾语从句，且是表示原因的，所以本题选择A。
26. D。考查动词辨析。本题答案的选取要根据题干的意思来决定。句意为“Bill完全从心脏病中恢复了。他很高兴”。 recover意为“恢复”。由语境可知，正确答案为D。
27. D。考查短语辨析。句意为“Tom对溜冰着迷，所以他把所有的业余时间都花在那上面。”be popular with“受……欢迎”； be concerned about “关心；挂念”；be proud of “为……感到骄傲”；be crazy about “对……痴迷”。根据句意，本题选D。
28. C。考查时态及主谓一致。more than one意为“不止一个”，后面加可数名词单数，谓语动词用单数形式。综上所述，本题选C。
29. C。考查副词辨析。entirely“完全地”；frequently“常常”；actually“实际上”；gradually“逐渐地”。本题句意为“一些人惧怕H1N1流感病毒，但实际上它没有其他流感病毒那么致命。”根据语境可知，正确答案为C。
30. A。考查固定用法。be close to“几乎”，to 是介词，后面要接动名词作宾语，但本句主语是hit的动作承受者，所以动名词要用被动式。
31. A。考查固定句型。believe it or not“信不信由你”。
32. B。考查连词辨析。ever since自从；even if即使；as if好像；so that所以。根据句意“海子非常受年轻人的欢迎，即使他已去世多年”可知，填空处前后两句为让步关系，所以本题选择B。
33. D。考查间接引语。根据句式结构可知，答话人是在转述他人的话语，所以答语是一个间接引语，这就要求asked之后的从句是正常语序；根据句意可知，Tina是问第一个人是否愿意暑假教她舞蹈，所以本题选择D。
34. B。考查不定式作状语。in order to意为“为了……”可位于句首，而so as to意为“为了……”，一般不位于句首，二者否定形式均是在to前面加not。根据语境及二者的用法可知，本题选B。
35. C。考查more than用法。more than与名词或形容词连用时，表示“多过……，不止……”；no more than表示“仅仅”；no less than表示“不少于，多达”；not more than表示“不超过，顶多”。根据句意“高考对于学生来说不仅仅是重要的，还是有挑战性的”。可知，本题选择C。
【文章大意】奶奶与一只叫Penny的小狗朝夕相处，越来越离不开对方。直到有一天，Penny老得跳不到床上去，奶奶也因为身体不好住进了医院。但是Penny依然每日坐在窗前等着奶奶坐车回家。
36. D。根据下文“The dog was named Penny.”可知答案。
37. A。根据下文Penny时刻陪伴奶奶可知，她们之间的依恋变得越来越强烈了。
38. D。根据下文“Grandma never went anywhere without her partner by her side.”可知答案。
39. C。根据下文“... until she woke up.”可知答案。
40. B。根据下文“... she could no longer jump up on the ____ to lie next to Grandma ...”可知，奶奶睡觉的时候，Penny就躺在她旁边。
41. C。此处是说：随着Penny年龄的增长，她开始行动不便了。
42. B。根据下文“... so she lay on the blanket beside the bed.”可知，Penny越来越老，再也跳不到床上去，只好呆在床旁边的毯子上；由此可知原来Penny是跳到床上陪在奶奶身边。
43. C。根据下文“Grandma had been sent to hospital several times, and Penny couldn’t ____ around very well.”可知奶奶和Penny的健康状况开始变糟。
44. B。根据上文可知，Penny因年龄大了不能跳，到后来行走都成了问题。
45. A。根据下文“Penny, ____, sat watching out the window for the ____ bringing Grandma home.”可知，奶奶住院的时候，Penny就坐在窗前向外看，等着奶奶坐车回家。
46. C。根据下文“... when Grandma came through it.”可知，当奶奶从医院回来时，Penny很兴奋地在门口等候。
47. B。根据上文“Grandma had been sent to hospital several times ...”可知，这次奶奶又被带到了医院。
48. A。此处是说：Penny像往常一样坐在窗前等。
49. A。根据上文“When Grandma was in hospital, Penny would sit at the window ____ out for the car bringing Grandma home ...”可知答案。
50. D。此处是说：作者发现Penny先是不能站立、不愿进食，后来又出现呼吸困难。
51. C。此处是说：Penny被送到奶奶住的那家医院。
52. A。根据上文可知，奶奶是Penny的主人。
53. C。Penny见到奶奶时眼睛突然一亮，然后慢慢地闭上了。
54. A。根据下文“After fifteen years of loving friendship, Grandma and Penny passed away on the same day.”可知答案。
55. D。以往Penny等在门前迎接奶奶，这次Penny应该在天堂门口等着迎接奶奶。
【文章大意】如果你急着回家，在前后左右均无人的情况下，你是否会驾车闯红灯？面对这样的情况，作者选择了停车等候，这并不是因为他害怕被处罚，而是因为遵守交通规则已经成了他的习惯。
56. D。推理判断题。从第一段最后一句“... I wanted to shout at the driver ahead.”可看出他很生气，结合故事情境（作者很着急回家），可推知作者在那种情况下很焦急很生气。
57. D。细节理解题。根据最后一段“I stopped, not because of the law, but because it was a good habit I had developed. ... We do it just because we should do it.”可知遵守交通规则是作者的习惯。
58. B。推理判断题。从第二段可知，作者在周围无人的情况下仍然没有闯红灯，且在最后一段中作者说“I believed that everyone would and could control himself/herself well.”，由此可推知作者本人是一个能够很好地管理自己的人。
59. A。推理判断题。作者很着急回家，但是遇到红灯还是自觉地停车等候，根据第二段“I just stopped there, waiting for several minutes....”和第三段“I stopped another two times for the red lights as ‘special’ as the first one.”可知等一个红灯要花好几分钟，作者一共等了三个这样“特殊”的红灯，如果他闯红灯，他就能到家早一些。”
【文章大意】墨西哥的街道就像手术室，到处是戴口罩的人。戴口罩真的能阻挡猪流感吗？答案是肯定的。但如果一个口罩戴得太久，上面附着的细菌就会变得很多，很容易被吸入体内。所以一定要经常更换口罩。
60. C。细节理解题。根据第一段“If you were on the street in Mexico today you might think you were in an operating room, surrounded by doctors. You could see many concerned people with masks trying their best to stop the swine flu.”可知答案。
61. C。细节理解题。根据第二段“It turns out that when you sneeze the air coming out of your mouth at a speed of one hundred miles per hour carries germs which can travel anywhere around you and make people around you infected.”可知病菌是通过打喷嚏传播的。
62. A。推理判断题。根据第三段“If the weather is wet, the wet air will make the small drops bigger and heavier and they drop down towards our feet. If this happens, we won’t become infected.”可推知在潮湿的天气里被感染的人会很少。
63. A。细节理解题。根据最后一段“Larsen says the
masks can stop the germs well but after a few hours, they start to get wet, holding a lot of germs they come across and causing you to breathe them in.”可知如果戴口罩时间长了，人也会由于将附在口罩上的细菌吸入体内而被感染。
【文章大意】学生因为刻苦学习就应该得高分吗？美国大学应该有一种怎样的评分标准呢？这值得深思。
64. B。细节理解题。根据第一段“They believe students are owed a good grade simply because they put a lot of effort into a class.”可知答案。
65. A。细节理解题。根据第三段“But sixty-six percent agreed that a professor should consider effort and not just the quality of a student’s work when deciding grades.”可知答案。
66. C。细节理解题。根据第三段“And forty percent thought they should get a B, the second highest mark ...”可知答案。
67. B。推理判断题。作者只是客观陈述事实，并未附加自己的观点。故B项为正确选项。
【文章大意】本文主要介绍了在美国读书的外国学生的校园生活，他们可以一边上大学一边工作。文章阐述了这些学生工作时所必须遵守的制度以及何种学生满足一边上大学一边工作的条件。
68. C。细节理解题。根据第三段“International students normally cannot take a job that has nothing to do with their school. But the government may give permission if students are suddenly faced with difficulties.”可知答案。根据第一段前两句可知A项错误；根据第二段“International students can work 20 hours a week while having classes; more during school breaks.”可知，外国学生的工作时间是有限制的，故可排除B项；根据第四段“They must have studied at their American school for at least one year.”可知D项错误。
69. D。推理判断题。文章前四段分别提到了“在美国读书的外国大学生可以做的工作”、“工作时间”、“一些特殊情况”和“半工半读需要满足的其他条件”，由此可推知，外国学生在美国半工半读期间，是不能完全随意选择工作的。根据第五段“International students who will be studying at graduate school can apply for some jobs before they come to the United States.”可排除A项；根据第六段“Some schools pay their assistants. Others provide free education in return. Many do both.”可排除B项；C项在文中没有提到，故排除。
70. B。词义猜测题。根据最后一段“... for example, by working off-campus without permission — could be sent home.”可推知，外国学生若违反签证的规定就有可能被遣送回国，故画线词意为“违反”。
71. A。主旨大意题。外国学生在美国可以一边上大学一边工作，文章主要阐述了这些学生选择工作时所必须遵守的规则。
【文章大意】你热爱旅行吗？旅行是一次难忘的经历，是体验生活的好方式。目的地并不重要，重要的是你如何理解旅行的过程。
72. B。推理判断题。根据第一段“It makes us feel pleased, and enjoy new wonders and new part of life that we’ve never known.”可推知，在旅行中，人们可以很好地了解生活，所以旅行是了解生活的好方式。根据第一段“It matters little where you go on your holiday; it is all in what you make of it.”可知，去哪里旅行并不重要，重要的是如何理解旅行的过程，故A项“没有必要选择去哪里度假”与原文意思不符；根据第三段“You’ll find the enjoyable moments happening all around you ...”可知C项不正确；D项“计划使旅行无趣”在文中没有提到。
73. C。细节理解题。根据第二段“Having those memories is truly what travels are all about.”可知，旅行可以让人们长期拥有不同经历的回忆。
74. B。细节理解题。根据第二段“In fact, the most unforgettable moments of a travel experience are the ones that you don’t plan for.”可知答案。
75. D。细节理解题。根据第三段“You’ll find the enjoyable moments happening all around you: a wonderful sunset or a small child playing in the puddles of a cobble road. The magic will truly be in the trip you take.”可知，旅行中真正神奇的地方在于你周围的乐趣。
Unit 2 测试题
Ⅱ. 语言知识及应用（共两节，满分35分）
第一节 完形填空(共10小题；每小题2分，满分20分)
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从21-30各题所给的A、B、C和D项中，选出最佳选项。
Susan Clancy, 47, a doctor at South Shore Hospital, said she was in Boston on Wednesday helping her daughter, Erin, get ready for her birthday. But Susan’s
21 afternoon came to an end when she 22 that her wallet was gone on her way home. She knew it fell off her bag when she got off the bus to give her daughter the birthday cake. Soon, she 23 her daughter up to go back to look for it. “I was 24 it was there. It had my license and ID card, but no money,” she said on the phone.
But when Erin Clancy 25 , the wallet wasn’t there. She 26 a homeless man if he had seen a wallet, and he said he had. Then the man 27 the small wallet from his pocket.
“He said he couldn’t just give it to her, and she wouldn’t want him to do that if it was her wallet. So he asked for the 28 on the ID, and she told him it was Susan Clancy.” Susan Clancy said.
Erin Clancy felt so 29 that she gave him all the money on her. Susan Clancy said the man’s 30 has changed the way she treats people living on the street and will care more about them.
21. A. happy B. sad C. angry D. upset
22. A. guessed B. realized C. heard D. imagined
23. A. dressed B. added C. called D. put
24. A. hoping B. noticing
C. waiting D. ignoring
25. A. left B. entered C. landed D. returned
26. A. missed B. saved C. asked D. helped
27. A. pulled B. forgot C. lost D. given
28. A. number B. color C. name D. picture
29. A. careful B. grateful C. useful D. helpful
30. A. braveness B. mistake C. talent D. honesty
第二节 语法填空 (共10小题；每小题1.5分，满分15分)
阅读下面短文，按照句子结构的语法性和上下文连贯的要求，在空格处填入一个适当的词或使用括号中词语的正确形式填空，并将答案填写在后面标号为31-40的相应位置上。
I have a good friend and she, together with her father, lives not far from my house. Her dad, 31 was hard-working and did much for the family, passed away two weeks ago 32 his illness got worse. We all felt that she was unfortunate (不幸的). A few of our good friends got together and we went to a flower shop to buy a basket 33 beautiful flowers. And then the flowers
34 (send) to her house.
When she saw the flowers in 35 basket, she decided to plant the flowers in her own garden. In this way she would have a sweet memory each spring of the year.
Yesterday when I got home 36 work, my friend was outside in her flower bed planting the flowers and saying, “Dear dad, please enjoy 37 in your world”. I walked over and asked her 38 (have) a walk. We did not say too much, for 39 of us had just lost a parent recently — our hearts knew the hurt and words weren’t necessary. She said 40 (soft) “Thank you” and gave me a thankful smile.
31. ____ 32. ____ 33. ____ 34. ____ 35. ____
36. ____ 37. ____ 38. ____ 39. ____ 40. ____
Ⅲ. 阅读 （共两节，满分40分）
第一节 阅读理解 （共15小题；每小题2分，满分30分）
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的A、B、C和D项中，选出最佳选项。
■
A
难度：★
Valentine’s Day（情人节） was coming. Helen felt hurt and lonely because this was her first Valentine’s Day after the divorce （离婚）.
Helen’s twelve-year-old son, Jack, looked at his mother, knowing that this was a difficult time for both of them. In order to make his mother happy, he prepared a present, and handed it to her on Valentine’s Day.
It was a beautiful gift package （纸盒）. Helen couldn’t believe what was happening. She opened it and took out a lovely card and a small box.
“Now,” he said, “read the card.” It read as follows:
“I know that this isn’t easy for you because it has been a hard year for both of us. I know that Valentine’s Day is a special day for people in love. I want you to know that I love you. I know that Valentines are supposed to get chocolate. I went to the store today to buy some for you. Luckily, I got the last piece. I told the clerk it was just perfect.”
Helen stood there for a moment and looked at her son. Her eyes sparkled in the light as tears formed in each corner. Jack knew he had done the right thing. Slowly she opened the small box, careful not to tear the paper. She would never forget the moment. She found a chocolate heart that was broken into pieces along with a note:
“I am so sorry that Dad left us, Mom. And all you were left with was a broken heart. But I just want you to know we still have each other.
Happy Valentine’s Day!
Your son,
Jack”
41. Which of the following words can best describe Jack?
A. Hard-working. B. Caring.
C. Brave. D. Humorous.
42. Why did Jack think it was a difficult time for his mother and him?
A. Because he had no money to buy a gift for his mother.
B. Because his mother had been out of work for a long time.
C. Because he hadn’t heard from his father for a long time.
D. Because his father left them and his mother felt hurt and lonely.
43. Which of the following wasn’t in the gift package?
A. A small box. B. A card.
C. A flower. D. A chocolate heart.
44. Jack wrote a card to his mother in order to ____.
A. show his love to her
B. explain why he felt lonely
C. ask her to give him some money
D. express he missed his father
45. It can be inferred from the passage that ____.
A. Jack’s father came back home on Valentine’s Day
B. Helen was deeply moved by Jack’s words and gift
C. Jack would get a big box of chocolate at last
D. Jack’s father let Jack give the gift to his mother
B
难度：★★
Bad teeth can be painful. They can even be deadly, as bad teeth can give out bacteria (细菌) into the blood system. Those bacteria can increase the chances of a heart disease and make other diseases worse. And adults are not the only ones at risk. For example, in 2008, a boy named Bob Clark died when bacteria from a bad tooth reached his brain. The doctor said it might have been prevented (防止) if he had received the dental care(牙齿护理). He was only twelve years old.
In fact good dental care starts at birth. Mothers’ milk is the best food for babies and it does good to the healthy development of teeth. Mothers’ milk can help slow bacterial growth in the mouth. A baby’s mouth and early teeth should be cleaned after each feed, using a cloth with a little warm water. Do the same if a baby is fed with a bottle. When baby teeth begin to appear, you can clean them with a wet toothbrush. Experts say it is important to find soft toothbrushes made especially for babies and to use them very gently when children have full teeth.
The use of fluoride (氟化物) to protect teeth is common in many parts of the world. For example, it is often added to drinking water supplies. The fluoride mixes with the hard surface of teeth to help prevent holes from forming. But young children often eat some toothpaste (牙膏) when they brush teeth. The American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry notes that swallowing (吞咽) fluoridated toothpaste can cause problems. So young children should be carefully supervised by adults when they brush their teeth. Once finding children swallow some toothpaste, adults should let them drink more water and try to make them throw up what is in the stomach. Go to see a doctor if it is necessary! It is commonly believed that we should brush teeth twice a day, that is, once after getting up and once before going to bed. However, experts say the times we brush our teeth should be decided by how many meals we have. And the best time to brush our teeth is within five minutes after the meal.
46. The passage is mainly about ____.
A. reasons that cause children to form bad teeth
B. the time when children should protect teeth
C. methods of preventing bad teeth from forming
D. proper ways of using fluoridated toothpaste
47. From the passage we can learn ____.
A. only children can develop bad teeth
B. bad teeth often hurt children’s brain
C. Bob Clark didn’t get dental care in time
D. bad teeth are dangerous and hard to deal with
48. Children’s teeth should be given dental care ____.
A. as soon as they were born
B. when they have full teeth
C. after they have had bad teeth
D. as soon as their teeth appear
49. According to the passage, the fluoride in drinking water supplies is to ____.
A. make the tooth surface harder
B. help teeth become whiter
C. kill the bacteria in the water
D. stop teeth from becoming bad
50. The underlined word “supervised” in Paragraph 3 can be replaced by ____.
A. taught B. watched
C. fed D. trained
C
难度：★★★
European Day of Languages is celebrated（庆祝） on 26 September. BBC News Online reported the attitudes across several European Union countries to languages.
Tamsin Smith, Rome, Italy
Italians place very high importance on learning languages, particularly English. Twenty years ago it was quite difficult to find an English speaker here but today it is quite easy. The strong influence of American and English culture helps young people to learn the English language. They often become familiar with it through Harry Potter books or Disney movies. English schools, where Italian children are taught all their lessons in English, are also becoming popular among rich Italians.
Lucien Libert, Paris, France
Languages are very important in France. A good knowledge of the English language is necessary for many Frenchmen to get a good job and the more languages you can learn, the better. English is the first language you learn in school and you start very young. Most people have at least eight years of learning English at school. Learning German or Spanish comes next and Latin is also taught in most schools. While French people learn languages, there is also a movement to protect（保护） the French language.
James Helm, Dublin, Ireland
The English language predominates (占优势) in Ireland, but the ancient Irish language is a lasting source（源头） of pride and interest, and it remains a living tongue that is used in several areas. Schools are required to teach ancient Irish, and most students learn it as part of the subjects. There is a continuing discussion about how to protect the language best. In recent years some primary schools have introduced foreign language classes for younger students, and the Irish government has tried to encourage schools to offer more languages such as French, Spanish, German and Italian.
51. The best title of the passage would be ____.
A. European Day of Languages
B. BBC News Online
C. English Learning in Europe
D. Attitudes to Languages in Europe
52. Which of these countries have realized they should protect their own languages?
A. Both Italy and France.
B. Both Italy and Ireland.
C. Both France and Ireland.
D. All of the three countries.
53. Which of the following statements is TRUE according to Tamsin Smith?
A. English learning in Italy has been popular for more than a century.
B. Only children from rich families like to learn
English in Italy.
C. Some popular books and movies help young Italian people with their English a lot.
D. More and more Italian children have given up
learning their mother tongue.
54. What can help you get a better job in France?
A. Learning several languages well.
B. Studying abroad for some time.
C. Learning English at younger ages.
D. Knowing how to protect the French language.
55. In Ireland most students ____.
A. prefer English to the ancient Irish language
B. have to spend time learning the ancient Irish
language
C. are asked to learn more than six different languages
D. don’t know how to protect the English language
第二节 信息匹配（共5小题；每小题2分，满分10分）
下面是一些商店的有关介绍：
A. Fashion Shop
There are all kinds of fashionable clothes, caps, bags, shoes and so on that come from France, China, America and Britain for girls. We have special clothes for your girl’s birthday. We make sure that your girl will get more beautiful if you buy her any commodity (商品) in our shop. Why not come in and have a look?
B. Souvenir (纪念品) Shop
We have thousands of autograph books, commemorative envelops (纪念信封) and commemorative stamps (纪念邮票) in our shop. All of these goods have special meanings for those who have them. The shop is the largest souvenir shop in our city and the prices are not high.
C. Music Instrument Shop
Music instruments are for music talents! If you love music and want to buy music instruments, we will provide all kinds of instruments for you. Every music instrument in our shop comes from France. We can meet any of your needs and transport what you choose from our shop to your house.
D. The Latest Book Shop
You will find the latest published books and best-selling books for children in our small book shop. Though it is small, the shop is popular with the children in our community. Boys and girls, don’t hesitate (犹豫)! Low price but big pleasure!
E. Delicious Snack Shop
Children need snacks! There are candies, chocolates, fruit, biscuits, moon cakes and other delicious snacks for your kids. Want your children to be much happier? Our idea is: Buying them snacks!
F. New Life Shop
Move into a new house? Why not throw away your old furniture and buy something new? Famous furniture shop will provide a new feeling for you. We are sure that our furniture will make your room more beautiful.
下面是想购买商品的人的信息，请根据这些信息匹配他/她要去购物的商店：
56. Mrs. Smith’s son, Tony will be 18 years old tomorrow. She plans to give her son an excellent commemorative birthday gift. She has decided to buy some commemorative stamps for him.
57. Mrs. White’s daughter is ten years old. She loves reading books very much. On her coming eleventh birthday, Mrs. White plans to buy her a newly-published book.
58. Mrs. Washington loves her 3-year-old son Mike very much. Mike often asks his mother to buy him candies and chocolates. With Mike’s birthday drawing near, Mrs. Washington wants to meet her son’s need in order to make him happy.
59. Mrs. Green’s daughter is a lovely girl who is 17 years old. She loves beautiful, fashionable clothes. On her 18th birthday, Mrs. Green plans to hold a birthday party for her at home. She wants to dress up her daughter in beautiful clothes like a princess.
60. Mrs. Johnson’s son, Tom, will be 10 years old a few days away. He loves playing the piano and has made great progress. He won the first prize in a piano competition in his school. Mrs. Johnson plans to buy him a piano as a present for his birthday.
Ⅳ. 写作 （共两节，满分40分）
第一节 基础写作（共1小题；满分15分）
虽然刚刚升入高中，但是你一定已经学习英语很多年了吧，也一定在学习英语的过程中遇到过各种各样的问题，比如词汇、听力或者阅读。
【写作内容】
现假设我报即将举办英语学习交流会，请你用英语写一篇短文，与其他同学分享一下你在学习英语过程中遇到的困难以及解决方法。
【写作要求】
1.必须使用5个句子介绍所给出的全部内容；
2.文章的开头已经为你写好，不计入必写句子中。
【评分标准】
概括准确，语言规范，内容合适，篇章连贯。
I have been learning English for three years. I found it very difficult to learn it well. _______________________
_______________________________________________.
第二节 读写任务 （共1小题；满分25分）
阅读下面Lin Liang的发言，然后按照要求写一篇150词左右的英语短文。
Hi, I am Lin Liang. Now, I will give some advice on whether teachers should teach their English classes in English or in Chinese.
I prefer the idea that my teacher holds. My teacher teaches more in English than in Chinese in our English class. For example, he teaches grammar in Chinese, which makes it easier for us to understand. But he tries to teach texts and new words in English, which is a challenge for our listening and oral skills. We can learn more words and expressions from his classes.
In my opinion, teachers should try to teach in English when teaching words and other things which are easy for the students to understand. Students should try to improve their ability and the students who are poor in English should be taken good care of.
Here is another way. At first, teachers speak English, but students speak Chinese, or, students discuss in Chinese, but report and write in English. And then, students try their best to think, discuss and express their ideas in English.
[写作内容]
1. 以约30个词概括Lin Liang发言的要点；
2. 然后以约120个词就“英语老师在英语课堂该不该讲汉语?”这个话题发表你的看法，并包括以下要点：
1) 英语老师在课堂应该用汉语讲解还是英语讲解？
2) 根据你个人的学习经历，简述你的理由；
3) 你认为什么样的讲授方式才能让学生取得最佳的学习效果。
[写作要求]
1. 不得直接引用原文中的句子；
2. 文中不能出现真实姓名和学校名称。
[评分标准]
概括准确，语言规范，内容合适，篇章连贯。
参考答案及解析
21-25 ABCAD 26-30 CACBD
31. who 32. because
33. of 34. were sent
35. the 36. from
37. yourself 38. to have
39. both 40. softly
41-45 BDCAB 46-50 CCADB
51-55 DCCAB 56-60 BDEAC
基础写作
I have been learning English for three years. I found it very difficult to learn it well. The first and biggest problem for me was the new words and then listening and reading became problems. Thanks to my English teacher, I made great progress. In order to increase my vocabulary, he asked me to read lots of English newspapers, magazines and books and he suggested that I should listen to English programs every day and seize every chance to do more speaking both in and after class. Besides, he asked me to read texts aloud in the morning. By doing so, I have improved my English a lot and I’m sure I’ll do even better if I keep on learning English like this.
读写任务
Lin Liang gave us some advice on whether teachers should teach their English classes in English or in Chinese. He agreed that teachers should teach more in English than in Chinese.
I find classes given in English more challenging and exciting. When I am able to understand my teacher’s English, I feel a great sense of achievement. English classes given in English also allow me to develop my ability, which is very important. I need to learn to solve the problems without the help of parents and teachers. My English teacher often tells me to speak English more. I enjoy my teacher’s advice, which makes me get more fun in English learning. It is for this reason that I believe the best way to teach us English is teaching us words and expressions completely in English, while grammar and some difficult points should be explained in Chinese.
21. A。女儿要过生日了，母亲当然是很“高兴”的。
22. B。当Susan“意识”到钱包丢了的时候，她愉快的下午结束了。
23. C。根据下文提示“she said on the phone”可知，此处是给女儿打电话。
24. A。Susan在电话里和女儿说“希望钱包还在那里……”。
25. D。根据上文中的“she ____ her daughter up to go back to look for it”可知，此处是Erin返回那里。
26. C。由下文中的“if he had seen a wallet”可知，此处是问那个无家可归的行乞者是否看见一个钱包。
27. A。从口袋中把钱包拿出来，要用“pull”。
28. C。根据下文提示“she told him it was Susan Clancy”可知，行乞者是在问她名字。
29. B。一位行乞者捡到了钱包并且归还，这行为让Erin很感激。
30. D。这位行乞者的诚实和正直改变了Susan以往对这些人的看法，她将会更加关心这些人。
31. who。考查定语从句引导词。分析句子结构可知，“Her dad, 31 was hard-working and did much for the family,”为定语从句，缺少指代人的主语，故应填who。
32. because。考查连词。她父亲去世的直接原因是病重，故使用because引导原因状语从句。
33. of。考查介词。根据句意可知此处说的是大家去花店买了一篮子花，故此处应填of。
34. were sent。考查被动语态。主语the flowers与谓语动词send之间存在着被动关系，且动作发生在过去，故使用were sent。
35. the。考查冠词。basket为第二次出现，应为特指，故使用定冠词。
36. from。考查介词。表达下班回家的介词应使用from。
37. yourself。考查反身代词。enjoy加反身代词意为“过得开心”。
38. to have。考查动词不定式。根据句意可知，此处为作者请求朋友去走走，ask sb to do sth，故使用动词不定式。
39. both。考查代词。本空缺少主语，指两个人应使用不定代词both。
40. softly。考查词形变化。修饰行为动词said应使用soft的副词形式softly。
文章大意：Helen与丈夫离婚后的第一个情人节，12岁的儿子为了让她开心，准备了一份特别的礼物。
41. B。推理判断题。从文中所描述的Jack的行为，以及他在卡片上写下的话可以看出Jack是一位“体贴人的”孩子。
42. D。细节理解题。由文章第一段可知，Helen与丈夫离了婚；以及文章最后的“I am so sorry that Dad left us, Mom. And all you were left with was a broken heart.”可知，爸爸的离开使妈妈感到悲伤和孤独，只剩下母子两人相依为命。Jack觉得对他们来说这是一段艰难的时期。
43. C。细节理解题。根据短文内容，Jack送给妈妈的礼品盒中有一张卡片和一个小盒子，而小盒子中装的是巧克力。由此可知答案。
44. A。细节理解题。根据Jack在卡片上写下的“I want you to know that I love you.”可知，Jack给妈妈卡片的目的是想表达对妈妈的爱。
45. B。推理判断题。根据“Her eyes sparkled in the light as tears formed in each corner.” 可以推测出，妈妈被Jack的话和所送的礼物感动了。
文章大意：本文主要讲述了坏牙齿的危害以及人们应该如何保护牙齿。
46. C。主旨大意题。本文就坏牙齿的危害这一问题向人们介绍了应该从何时以及如何保护牙齿，避免坏牙齿的形成。
47. C。细节理解题。由第一段“The doctor said it might have been prevented if he had received the dental care.”可知答案。
48. A。细节理解题。由第二段“In fact good dental care starts at birth.”可知答案。
49. D。细节理解题。由第三段“The fluoride mixes with the hard surface of teeth to help prevent holes from forming.”可知氟化物的作用是阻止牙洞的产生，也就是防止牙齿变坏。
50. B。词义猜测题。由第三段“Once finding children swallow some toothpaste ... Go to see a doctor if it is necessary!”可知画线词所在的句子意思是大人应该是在一旁看着孩子刷牙，才能及时地看到孩子有没有吞食牙膏。故画线词的意思为“监督，看着”。
文章大意：三个来自不同欧盟国家的人谈了各自国家的人们对语言学习的态度。
51. D。主旨大意题。文章第一段中的“BBC News Online reported the attitudes across several European Union countries to languages.”起到总领下文的作用，由此可得出答案。
52. C。细节理解题。只有来自法国和爱尔兰的两个人谈到了对本族语言的保护问题。
53. C。细节理解题。根据文中的“They often become familiar with it through Harry Potter books or Disney movies.”可知答案。
54. A。细节理解题。文中这位法国人描述：要想找到好的工作，学好英语是必须的；同时掌握的语言越多，获得好工作的几率就越大。
55. B。推理判断题。根据“Schools are required to teach ancient Irish, and most students learn it as part of the subjects.”可推知，在爱尔兰大部分学生必须要学习古爱尔兰语。
56. B。Mrs. Smith想给儿子买纪念邮票作为他的生日礼物，B中的Souvenir Shop正是卖纪念品的
商店，故此项应该与B匹配。
57. D。Mrs. White的女儿喜欢读书，D中的The Latest Book Shop可以提供适合孩子读的新书。故此项应该与D匹配。
58. E。Mrs. Washington的儿子只有三岁，他喜欢吃糖果和巧克力，E中的Delicious Snack Shop提供适合孩子吃的各种糖果、巧克力以及其他的小食品。故此项应该与E匹配。
59. A。Mrs. Green的女儿喜欢漂亮的、时髦的衣服，A中的Fashion Shop可以为女孩提供各种各样的新衣服、鞋子、手提包等等，并且有特别的生日礼服。故此项应该与A匹配。
60. C。Mrs. Johnson的儿子喜欢弹钢琴，她想给他的儿子买一架钢琴，C中的Music Instrument Shop出售各种乐器，故此项应该与C匹配。
必修1 Uint 2 English around all the world单元测试题
第一部分 听力(共两节，满分３０分)
第一节 (共5 小题；每小题1.5分，满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。 每段对话后有一个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后，你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
1. Where are the two speakers now?
A. On the third floor. B. On the fourth floor. C. On the fifth floor.
2. What’s the probable relationship between the two speakers?
A. Customer and shop assistant. B. Teacher and student. C. Boss and clerk.
3. What’s the man going to do tonight?
A. Go to the cinema. B. Attend a meeting. C. Watch TV at home.
4. Who is Charlie Green?
A. A writer. B. A bookseller. C. A computer engineer.
5. When will the film probably begin?
A. At 12:00. B. At 12:14. C. At 12:40.
第二节（共15小题；每小题1.5分，满分22.5分）
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前，你将有时间阅读各个小题，每小题5秒钟；听完后, 各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料，回答第6至7题。
6. Where are the two speakers?
A. In the classroom. B. In a shop. C. In the street.
7. What has happened to the two speakers?
A. They have quarreled all the way.
B. They have got lost.
C. They have been shown around the downtown area.
听第7段材料，回答第8至10题。
8. What’s the weather like today?
A. Fine. B. Cold. C. Hot.
9. What’s the weather usually like in Beijing?
A. Much colder. B. Much drier.
C. Much hotter. 10. How does the man find the weather there?
A. Terrible. B. So-so. C. Great.
听第8段材料，回答第11至13题。
11. What are the two speakers talking about?
A. Mr Smith. B. Mrs Downs. C. Mrs Downs’ son.
12. How long does a school day last?
A. At least 8 hours. B. About 6 hours.C. Nearly 7 hours.
13. How does Jack usually go to school?
A. By bus. B. On foot. C. By car.
听第9段材料，回答第14至17题。
14. What time is it now?
A. 4:29. B. 4:13. C. 4:30.
15. Why does the woman ask about food on the train?
A. Because she is hungry.
B. Because she is nervous without food.
C. Because it will soon be time for dinner.
16. What does a cup of tea cost on the train?
A. 13 pence. B. 50 pence. C. 15 pence.
17. Why doesn’t the woman take the train finally?
A. Because she is late for the train.
B. Because she thinks things are too expensive on the train.
C. Because she doesn’t like the number of the platform from which the train leaves.
听第10段材料，回答第18至20题。
18. What will most Americans do when they need advice?
A. They often turn to their parents.
B. They ask people they know.
C. They usually write to newspapers and magazines.
19. How do most newspapers help people in need of advice?
A. They pass their letters to Abby and Ann Landers.
B. They publish their letters and ask readers to answer them.
C. They publish letters from readers and answers from doctors, lawyers or educators.
20. What can we learn about Abby and Ann Landers?
A. They have had special training.
B. They have much experience.
C. They are well known all over the world.
听力填空题（选做）根据你所听到的信息完成下列表格中第18至20题；每小题不超过三个单词。
Most Americans:
Don’t get advice from their family.
Don’t usually ask people they know.
Get advice on 18. ____________ from newspapers and magazines.
Most newspapers:
Publish letters from readers with 19. ______.
Abby and Ann Landers:
Are women without special training.
Are the most 20. ________ writers of advice.
第二部分 英语知识运用（共两节，满分４５分）
第一节 语法和词汇知识(共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分)
21. — How was your weekend?
— Great! We ______ a picnic by the lake.
A. have B. are having C. had D. will have
22. He looked at the envelope and __________ Jenny’s handwriting immediately.
A. understood B. knew
C. recognized D. recovered
23. A large number of students in our school ____ from the countryside; the number _____ growing these years.
A. is; has been B. are; has been
C. is; have been D. are; have been
24. Washington D.C., the capital of the United States, is one of ______ cities in the world.
A. the biggest B. bigger
C. much bigger D. big
25. One of her American friends asked her, “Would you please ______ to my apartment for a visit?”
A. come up B. keep up
C. put up D. catch up
26. — Excuse me? ______
— It is over there, near the bus stop.
A. How do you like the cinema?
B. May I ask you the way?
C. Where is the Bank of China?
D. How far is the market from here?
27. The ______ from England to India used to take more than six months as there were storms and huge waves at times.
A. travel B. journey
C. trip D. voyage
28. — Mum, ______ I play computer games?
— Yes, you can. But you have to finish your homework first.
A. must B. may C. will D. need
29. English has become the most wildly spoken language in the world ______ its special role as an international language.
A. because B. from C. with D. because of
30. Chinese is also spoken in many other countries in Asia, ______ Singapore and Malaysia.
A. for example B. such as
C. instead of D. according to
31. American English has so many _________ because the American people have come from all over the world.
A. grammar B. vocabulary
C. pronunciations D. dialects
32. I don’t know ______ tomorrow. Can you tell me?
A. when we started B. when did we start
C. when we will start D. when will we start
33. Kitty and Lucy are both from England, so they are ______ English speakers.
A. native B. international C. foreign D. same
34. — John has hurt his leg.
— Really? ______?
A. Who did that
B. How did that happen
C. What’s wrong with him
D. Why was he so careless
35. Americans and Canadians can understand each other ______ they don’t speak the same kind of English.
A. now that B. even if C. as if D. only if
第二节 完形填空 (共20小题; 每小题1.5分, 满分30分)
“Dad, I’m sure I can do it well this time. I promise,” I said to myself and went up to the stage and began my play ...
Finally I 36 from my piano and took a bow to the people in the hall. There was a 37 and then loud applause (掌声) burst out. I knew I 38 it. Tears filled my eyes. Then I 39 three years ago right here when it was my turn to play. I 40 the hall and saw my dad. He sat at the end of a 41 with a serious face.
Suddenly I became 42 . I had practiced my piece for months, 43 then it seemed there was something wrong with my fingers. I forced out some 44 tune and left the stage in tears. I 45 .
On the way home my father didn’t say even a word. He just 46 the car in silence. I didn’t say anything either. What could I say, really, after what I’d done? I knew how 47 Dad worked to earn enough money 48 my piano. That time he was 49 to come to a competition(比赛), but I let him down.
I didn’t remember how we got home. Dad never said a word the entire way home, and he never 50 one of my competitions again. I never got over the hurt of having 51 the person I most wanted to make proud. I’d 52 more than my competition that afternoon. I felt as if I’d lost the key to my father’s heart, and he died before I could 53 it again.
“God, why didn’t you give me a 54 to make it up to him?” I’d often asked.
I won first prize in the contest now. How I wish my father could share the 55 moment with me!
36. A. dropped B. rose C. turned D. slid
37. A. silence B. noise C. laughter D. shout
38. A. got B. missed C. made D. caught
39. A. thought B. realized
C. understood D. remembered
40. A. looked up B. looked around
C. looked out D. looked over
41. A. seat B. row C. group D. team
42. A. nervous B. excited C. sick D. tired
43. A. and B. though C. but D. so
44. A. soft B. moving C. nice D. terrible
45. A. succeeded B. won
C. failed D. disappeared
46. A. drove B. started C. washed D. repaired
47. A. quickly B. hard C. warmly D. happily
48. A. on B. in C. for D. with
49. A. sad B. happy C. able D. unable
50. A. attended B. noticed C. heard D. cared
51. A. pleased B. surprised
C. disappointed D. satisfied
52. A. felt B. lost C. made D. learned
53. A. open B. close C. forget D. find
54. A. piano B. duty C. chance D. contest
55. A. exciting B. surprising
C. interesting D. relaxing
第三部分 阅读理解（共２０小题；每小题２分，满分４０分）
Ａ
Many centuries ago, all people had to gather seeds and plants to eat. They did not know how to farm or raise animals for food. We call them the Stone Age people because they used stone tools and weapons.
You may feel surprised in the world today there are still people who live like the Stone Age people. They live in the places that are hard to reach. Because they have met few people from the outside world, they don’t know about modern inventions. They have not learned ways of doing things from others.
For 25,000 years, groups of people have lived alone in the middle of Australia. One of these groups is the Arunta tribe (部落). They do not know how to farm and how to raise sheep or cattle.
The Aruntas spend most of their time searching for food and water. The men hunt animals with stone-tipped spears. The women and children look for roots, seeds and nuts. They use sticks to dig up the roots. Several Arunta families live together. They have no house. At night, they sleep around small fires.
Now other people are moving into the center of Australia. Soon the Aruntas will no longer be a Stone Age people.
56. The Stone Age people are called so because they ____.
A. gathered seeds and plants to eat
B. didn’t know how to farm
C. used stone tools and weapons
D. didn’t raise animals for food
57. The Arunta tribe has lived ________.
A. in the middle of Africa
B. in the center of Australia
C. together with other people
D. in poorly built houses
58. Why do the Aruntas still live in the way as they lived before?
A. Because they have not yet learned new ways from other people.
B. Because they do not want to change their way of living.
C. Because other people are moving in and living with the Aruntas.
D. Because each family live alone without knowing others.
59. It can be inferred from the passage that ________.
A. the Australians live much like the Stone Age people
B. the Arunta tribe has a history of 25 centuries
C. the Stone Age people have at last disappeared in the world
D. the Aruntas will change their way of living sooner or later
Ｂ
There are more than 250,000 rivers in the United States. Added up together, they flow for more than 5,500,000 kilometers.
The largest and most famous river in the United States is the Mississippi. It starts near the northern border of the United States and flows through the center of the country for more than 3,700 kilometers. About 250 smaller rivers flow into the Mississippi. The mouth of the Mississippi empties into the Gulf of Mexico.
However, the Missouri River is the longest river in the United States. It flows for about 4,000 kilometers. It begins in the Rocky Mountains of North America. It flows along the borders of seven states before it empties into the Mississippi River near the city of Saint Louis, Missouri.
Three rivers that join together in the north central state of Montana form the Missouri River. The water is clear there. But, as it moves east and south, the Missouri River turns brown as it collects huge amounts of dirt from the land. That is why many people call the Missouri River the “Big Muddy”.
Some people say the Columbia River in the northwest is the most beautiful river in America. It flows from the Canadian province of British Columbia into the United States through the state of Washington. The Columbia River is the largest river that empties into the Pacific Ocean.
Another famous river is the Rio Grande. It is the longest river in the state of Texas. It forms the border between Texas and Mexico.
The oldest river in the United States is the New River. It begins in the Appalachian Mountains of North Carolina and flows north through parts of Virginia and West Virginia. The New River may be also the second oldest in the world. It is funny how something so old can be called new.
60. Near the city of Saint Louis is the place ________.
A. where the Missouri River rises
B. where the Missouri River joins the Mississippi River
C. where other three rivers join the Missouri River
D. where the Mississippi River flows into the ocean
61. From Paragraph 4 we know that the water in the upper reaches of the Missouri River is ________.
A. muddy B. dirty C. clear D. brown
62. In the state of Washington you can visit the beautiful ___.
A. Missouri River B. Mississippi River
C. New River D. Columbia River
63. Which of the following rivers is the border between Texas and Mexico?
A. The Rio Grande River.
B. The New River.
C. The Columbia River.
D. The Mississippi River.
Ｃ
Nowadays many students are interested in studying abroad.
Attending schools abroad has many advantages. First, by looking at our own country from outside, we can best see the strong points and weak points of our nation and therefore widen our vision and broaden our minds. Second, while studying in a foreign country, we can travel widely, visiting famous scenic spots and making friends with the local people. Third, we can use the foreign language in our daily life so that our ability in that language may be improved quickly. But the most important is to learn advanced science and technology. For all these advantages, it is really worthwhile to go abroad for education.
However, as everything has two sides, there are also some disadvantages in attending a foreign university. The most serious problem is the language barrier (障碍). Most of the students who are ready to go abroad do not prepare themselves well for the new language environment. As a result, on arriving there, they will find it difficult to understand what the instructors are saying in class. Besides, for not knowing about the customs and way of life of the local people, they may run into trouble in dealing with various situations. Therefore, misunderstandings often arise. Furthermore, the cost of living is much higher than that in our country, so most students have to find part-time jobs in order to help support themselves. Faced with these difficulties, many students find themselves unable to pay full attention to their studies and some students may even fail in their courses and learn little.
Therefore, given an opportunity to attend a school abroad, one must consider the factors carefully before making up his mind. On the one hand, it is a good thing to go and study abroad. But on the other hand, one must not neglect (忽视) the disadvantages.
64. The following are all advantages of studying abroad EXCEPT ________.
A. having more chances to get good jobs
B. improving foreign language ability quickly
C. visiting well-known scenic spots
D. learning advanced science and technology
65. The underlined word “instructors” in Paragraph 3 is closest in meaning to ________.
A. neighbors B. teachers
C. strangers D. classmates
66. Why do some students find part-time jobs?
A. Because they want to learn more skills in a different country.
B. Because they want to make full use of their spare time.
C. Because they are not interested in studying.
D. Because they have to support themselves.
67. The passage mainly tells us that ________.
A. studying abroad is a good way to learn advanced science and technology
B. everything has two sides
C. people should think twice before going abroad
D. going abroad has more advantages than disadvantages
Ｄ
There is a lake near a forest in Sweden. The water in the lake is very clear and everything is quiet and still. On the far side of the water is some farmland and further away, across the field, is an old church built on a hill. It has just stopped raining. The brook flowing into the lake is full and there is still some half-melted (半融化的) snow from last winter on the ground.
The reason why the water is so clear and everything is so quiet and still is that most of the animals and plants in and around the lake are dead. There are no birds because all the fish and insects, which the birds need for food, have disappeared. Many trees in the forest are losing their leaves and bark (树皮), and are sick and dying. Others were blown down by the strong winds of last winter. A farmer is working in a field planting something, but unless he plants a stronger kind of seed this year, the crop will be between 25 to 40 percent lower than a few years ago. The stones of the old church tower are turning to powder and unless the tower is repaired soon, it will fall down.
All the death and destruction (破坏) in this place is caused by the smoke coming out of factories and poisonous gases from cars and trucks. And yet this silent lake is hundreds of kilometers away from the nearest factory and highway.
68. Which season do you think it is?
A. Spring. B. Summer. C. Autumn. D. Winter.
69. Why are there no animals or birds in or around the lake?
A. Because the weather is terribly cold.
B. Because the lake is quiet.
C. Because the area is seriously polluted.
D. Because they have all been killed.
70. Why does the farmer have to plant a stronger kind of seed?
A. Because the soil is becoming less and less.
B. Because few plant life can stand the weather there.
C. Because the water in the lake can’t be used to irrigate (灌溉) the field.
D. Because the soil there is becoming unfit for farming.
71. What do you think is the best title of the passage?
A. A beautiful place of interest.
B. A polluted place.
C. A quiet place in Sweden.
D. A faraway mountain area.
Ｅ
One of the most difficult things for children to deal with when moving to a new town is leaving their friends and making new ones.
We once moved and one of our new neighbors told us about a summer camp at the Recreation Center all the kids went to. My husband and I looked into it and we found it was unbelievably cheap. I had the kids sign up (报名) the next day so that they could know more kids there.
Another thing we did was to have them sign up for sports when school started. They were happy to be on teams with new friends they made. This also gave me a chance to meet new people and from them I sometimes got some useful ideas for my new books.
If you’re just moving to a new house in the same city you live in now, it won’t really be a problem unless your kids are changing schools. If they are, it is a great idea to have them take the address book to school. Thus, your children won’t feel “lost” without their old friends.
If you’re able to, over the summer vacation, try inviting the friend your child misses most to come and visit your new home for a week, or even a few weeks. I know this can be difficult if that child has to fly, but maybe you can work out a plan with the child’s parents. Think how happy the kids will be when they meet!
72. The author had her kids sign up for the summer camp mainly because _____.
A. she could afford the cost
B. she was asked to do so by her kids
C. it could give her kids a chance to meet more kids
D. it could make the summer holiday not so boring
73. What is probably the author?
A. A housewife. B. A business woman.
C. A teacher. D. A writer.
74. What we can’t learn from the passage is that ____.
A. a summer camp at the Recreation Center was very cheap
B. having the kids take part in sports is good for both the author and her kids
C. parents should ask their children not to think of their old friends
D. parents should create more chances for children to make new friends
75. The purpose of the passage is to teach parents how to ______ when they move to a new place.
A. get used to the new life in a short time
B. help their children make new friends and keep the old ones
C. get along with their new neighbors
D. help their children get used to the new school life
第一节 短文改错（共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分）China is a country with a long history. The paper was one 76. ________
of the most important invention in China. We know
77. ________
many about Chinese history because records were kept 78. ________
on paper. Before writing developed, people used to 79. ________
keep records by putting the number of stones together. 80. ________
People carved (雕刻) words on animal’s bones, which 81. ________
was another way of keeping records .
Paper was also made from silk. The problem was that it 82. ________
was too expensive. People developed a kind of paper was 83. ________
made from the fibers (纤维) of plants. They used fishing nets, the outside of trees and pieces of old clothes. The make 84. ________
of paper became common. On the eighth century, paper 85. ________
was sent all over Europe.
第二节 书面表达（满分25分）
假如你在暑假期间参加了一个英语夏令营，在该夏令营结束时举行的晚会上，你要对这次夏令营进行简单总结，并表达感谢。请用英语写一份发言稿，要点如下：
1. 时间：7月10日—7月28日；
2. 人数：110人(教师10人，学生100人)；
3. 主要活动：练习英语口语，朗诵英文诗歌，唱英文歌曲等。
注意：
1. 短文必须包括所有的内容要点，但不得逐句翻译；
2. 词数：100左右。
必修1 Unit 2 English around the world单元测试题听力原文、参考答案及重点解析
听力原文
Ｔｅｘｔ １
Ｍ： Excuse me, I’m looking for Professor Wang. Ｗ： Oh, he is not on this floor. He is on the fourth floor. Go up the stairs and then turn left. Ｍ： Thank you very much.
Ｔｅｘｔ ２
Ｗ： Hello, can I help you? Ｍ： No, thanks. I’m just looking around. Ｗ： OK. Ask me if you need any help.
Ｔｅｘｔ ３
Ｗ： Would you like to go to the cinema tonight? Ｍ： I’d rather stay at home and watch TV. I have to get up early to attend the driving test tomorrow. Ｗ： Wish you good luck tomorrow!
Ｔｅｘｔ ４
Ｗ： I like to read Charlie Green’s books. Ｍ： So do I. I hear he writes on the computer and his next novel will come out next month. Ｗ： Great! I’ll get one as soon as it’s out.
Ｔｅｘｔ ５
Ｗ： What time is it now? Ｍ： It’s 12 o’clock. We are running out of time. Ｗ： Don’t worry. The film will begin in 40 minutes.
Ｔｅｘｔ ６
Ｗ： Where on earth are we now? Ｍ： Judging by all the traffic, I would say we are near the heart of the downtown area. Ｗ： What did I do wrong? Did I take a wrong turn? Ｍ： I am not sure, but I think that perhaps you turned left when you ought to have turned right. Ｗ： Oh, my God! What should we do now?
Ｔｅｘｔ ７
Ｗ： What a lovely day today! Ｍ： Yes, it is a very beautiful day. Ｗ： Now that you have been here for some time, how do you like the weather here? Ｍ： To tell the truth, I couldn’t like it better. Generally speaking, it seems neither too hot in summer nor too cold in winter. Ｗ： Well, sometimes we do have very cold days, but that usually doesn’t last more than a week. What’s the weather like in Beijing? Ｍ： I think the main difference is that Beijing is much drier. Ｗ： I agree with you.
Ｔｅｘｔ ８
Ｗ： Hello, Mr Smith. How are you? Ｍ： Fine, thanks, Mrs Downs. How is your boy, Jack? Ｗ： He is a bit tired. You know, he goes to school at eight o’clock every morning. He doesn’t get home till after four. Then he does his homework. It often takes him a couple of hours to finish it. Ｍ： Poor boy. They work hard at school nowadays, don’t they? Does he like it? Ｗ： School, you mean? Yes, he does. He likes his teachers, and that always makes a difference. Ｍ： Does he go to school by bus? Ｗ： No, he walks. He likes walking. He meets some of his friends at the corner and they go together. Ｍ： How does he go to school when it rains? Ｗ： My husband takes him in the car. He passes the school on the way to the office.
Ｔｅｘｔ ９
Ｗ： Good afternoon. I’d like some information about the train, please. Ｍ： Yes, madam. Which train? Where are you going? Ｗ： To London. You see, I have a sister there and ... Ｍ： So your question is “When is the next train to London?” Is that right? Ｗ： Yes, that’s right. When is the next train to London, please?
Ｍ： At half past four. That’s in about a minute. Ｗ： Thank you very much. Oh! Can I get something to eat on the train? I always have something to eat when I travel. I find a cup of tea and a cake always calm me down.
Ｍ： Yes, madam. You can get what you want on the train. Ｗ： Oh, good! Err, how much is a cup of tea? Ｍ： I am not sure, madam. Fifty pence, I think. Ｗ： Fifty pence! Oh, dear! Things are getting so expensive! Ｍ： Yes, madam. Your train is going to leave in half a minute now. Ｗ： Thank you. Oh! Which platform does the train leave from? Ｍ： Platform 13. Ｗ： Platform 13! Oh, dear! I never travel on trains that leave from Platform 13! 13 is an unlucky number. When is the next train after the 4:30?
Ｔｅｘｔ １０
Most Americans don’t like to get advice from members of their families. When they need advice, they don’t usually ask people that they know. Instead, many Americans write letters to newspapers and magazines. They can get advice on many different subjects, such as family problems, the use of language, health, cooking, childcare, clothes, and how to buy a house or car.
Most newspapers publish letters from readers with problems. There are answers written by doctors, lawyers or educators. But two of the most famous writers of advice are women without special training for this kind of work. One of them is called “ Dear Abby” by readers and the other is called “Dear Ann Landers”. Experience is their preparation for giving advice.
参考答案
1-5 AACAC 6-10 CBABC 11-15 CABAB 16-20 BCCCB
听力填空题(选做)(18-20 One possible version)
18. different subjects 19. problems 20. famous
21-25 CCBAA 26-30 CDBDB 31-35 DCABB
36-40 BACDB 41-45 BACDC 46-50 ABCCA
51-55 CBDCA 56-60 CBADB 61-65 CDAAB
66-70 DCACD 71-75 BCDCB
76-85 (One possible version)
76. The paper → Paper 77. invention → inventions 78. many → much 79. 在developed前加was 80. the → a 81. animal’s → animals’ 82. √ 83. 去掉第二个was 84. make → making 85. On → In
书面表达(One possible version)
How time flies! Eighteen days have passed before I knew it. Our English Summer Camp, from July 10 to July 28, has successfully achieved its aims. All the participants — ten teachers and one hundred students — contributed a lot to making it successful. During the summer camp, we held many interesting activities, such as practising oral English, reading aloud English poems and singing English songs. I am very grateful to have the chance to know so many respectable teachers and kind friends, who have given me great help in improving my English.
I hope I will have another opportunity to attend such interesting activities next year.
重点解析
２２． Ｃ。句意为“他看了看信封，然后很快地认出了Jenny的笔迹”。根据句意，recognized为正确答案，意思是“认出”。２７． Ｄ。句意为“过去，从英国到印度的航程通常需要六个月以上的时间，因为不时地会遇上风暴和巨浪。” 根据句意，voyage为正确答案，voyage主要指远距离的水上旅行。２９． Ｄ。because of为复合介词，后跟名词短语表示原因。而because用来引导原因状语从句。３０． Ｂ。such as表示列举。for example表示举例时后面应该用逗号，然后再列出具体的例子。３１． Ｄ。句意为“美国英语有很多方言，因为美国人来自世界各地”。根据句意，dialects为正确答案，意思是“方言”。３８． Ｃ。显然，我演出成功了，得到了在场观众的认可。make it意思是“成功”，相当于succeed。５６． Ｃ。由第一段最后一句“We call them the Stone Age people because they used stone tools and weapons.”可知，那些人被称为“Stone Age people”是因为他们使用石头做的工具和武器，故C正确。６０． Ｂ。根据第三段最后一句“... before it empties into the Mississippi River near the city of Saint Louis, Missouri.” 可知, 在Saint Louis附近密苏里河汇入密西西比河的地方。６８． Ａ。由短文第一段最后一句“The brook flowing into the lake is full and there is still some half-melted snow from last winter on the ground.”可知，当时的季节为春季。
必修1 Uint 2 English around all the world单元测试题
姓名 班 级
得分 自我评价
第一部分 听力（共两节，满分３０分）
第一节 (共5 小题；每小题1.5分，满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。 每段对话后有一个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后，你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
1. What can we learn from the conversation?
A. The show isn’t popular.
B. There’re too many tickets left.
C. It’s too late to buy the tickets now.
2. How does the man feel about the announcement?
A. Upset. B. Pleased. C. Nervous.
3. What’s the woman?
A. A ticket seller. B. A restaurant waitress.
C. A platform inspector.
4. How much did the woman pay for the shoes?
A. $23. B. $46. C. $69.
5. What’s the man doing?
A. Eating in a restaurant.
B. Checking in at a hotel.
C. Booking a ticket at a station.
第二节（共15小题；每小题1.5分，满分22.5分）
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前，你将有时间阅读各个小题，每小题5秒钟；听完后, 各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料，回答第6至7题。
6. What is probably the woman?
A. A worker. B. A boss. C. A student.
7. What does the woman usually do at weekends?
A. Going swimming. B. Going fishing.
C. Going shopping.
听第7段材料，回答第8至10题。
8. What are they talking about?
A. A second-hand car. B. A new motorbike.
C. A machine.
9. What’s the result of the conversation?
A. The man bought it. B. The man didn’t buy it.
C. The man would discuss it with his wife.
10. What’s the probable relationship between the two speakers?
A. Friends. B. Seller and buyer.
C. Waiter and customer.
听第8段材料，回答第11至13题。
11. Why is the woman looking for information?
A. Because she’s writing a research paper about the United States.
B. Because she’s writing a research paper about the developing countries.
C. Because she’s looking for ways to reduce poverty.
12. What can be known from the conversation?
A. The man is a professor.
B. The man knows more about the developing countries than the woman.
C. The woman has no interest in the developing countries. 13. What is the man’s attitude towards the developing countries?
A. He is unconcerned about them.
B. He is concerned about them.
C. He doesn’t know what a developing country is.
听第9段材料，回答第14至17题。
14. What’s the woman reading?
A. A magazine. B. A newspaper. C. A book.
15. When did Marco Polo leave Italy?
A. In 1217. B. In 1271. C. In 1275.
16. How long did it take Marco Polo to arrive in China?
A. Seventeen years. B. Four years. C. Seven years.
17. When did Marco Polo return to Venice?
A. In 1275. B. In 1295. C. In 1285.
听第10段材料，回答第18至20题。
18. Where does Sweden lie?
A. On the west of Norway.
B. On the east of Finland.
C. On the east of Norway.
19. When was the last war of Sweden?
A. From 1813 to 1814. B. From 1813 to 1840. C. From 1830 to 1840.
20. How much did the industrial production increase from 1963 to 1971?
A. By 10%. B. By 26%. C. By 61%.
听力填空题（选做）根据你所听到的信息完成下列表格中第18至20题；每小题不超过三个单词。
Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ ｏｆ Ｓｗｅｄｅｎ
Population:
8 million.
Area:
18. _______ square kilometers.
Chief trading partners:
Germany and 19. __________.
Exports in 1971:
Machinery: 26%; Cars:10%.
20. __________ production between 61%.
1963 and 1971: Increased by
第二部分 英语知识运用（共两节，满分４５分）
第一节 语法和词汇知识(共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分)
21. The changes in the city will cost quite a lot, _____ they will save us money in the long run.
A. or B. since C. for D. but
22. His father was really a ______ person. Once he made up his mind, nothing could change it.
A. clever B. stubborn C. brave D. familiar
23. _____ it’s raining, they are still working in the field.
A. When B. However
C. Although D. Unless
24. Our differences can’t be settled if you don’t change your ______.
A. attitude B. advice
C. shortcoming D. expression
25. — Have you decided when to leave for Shanghai?
— Yes, we ________ on Friday.
A. leave B. are leaving
C. have left D. leaves
26. Rather than ______ on a crowded bus, he always prefers ______ a bicycle.
A. ride; ride B. ride; to ride
C. riding; ride D. to ride; riding
27. A ________ person always tries to finish the job, no matter how hard it is.
A. crazy B. serious C. determined D. proper
28. — I believe we’ve met somewhere before.
— No, ________.
A. it isn’t the same B. it can’t be true
C. I don’t think so D. I’d rather not
29. Mary cares _____ clothes too much, and she spends too much money ________ clothes.
A. of; in B. for; at C. on; to D. about; on
30. It was about 600 years ago ____ the first clock was made.
A. that B. until C. before D. when
31. Do you think the President will to the terrorists’ (恐怖分子的) demands?
A. give up B. give in
C. give away D. give off
32. — How often do you eat out?
— ________, but usually once a week.
A. Have no idea B. It depends
C. As usual D. Generally speaking
33. You can believe him. His information comes from a ______ source.
A. reliable B. native C. frequent D. special
34. Alice trusts you; only you can ________ her to give up the foolish idea.
A. suggest B. help C. make D. persuade
35. I’m afraid that I can’t change her mind ________ it is made up on any subject.
A. while B. as C. unless D. once
第二节 完形填空 (共20小题; 每小题1.5分, 满分30分)
It was a cold winter afternoon. Robert stopped for a moment as he crossed the bridge and looked down at the river below. There were hardly any 36 on the river. Near the bridge, however, almost direct below, 37 was a small canoe (独木舟), with a boy in it. The boy was wearing
38 and shivering (颤抖) with cold, Robert noticed.
Just then he heard a cry, “Help! Help!” The cry 39 from the river. Robert looked down. The boy was 40 the water and his canoe was floating away. “Help! Help!” he called again.
Robert was a good 41 . Taking off his clothes, he
42 into the river. The 43 water made him tremble all over, 44 in a few seconds he reached the boy. “Don’t be afraid,” he said and started to swim towards the river bank, 45 the boy with him. But at that 46 he noticed a large motor boat under the bridge. There were several people on the boat, all 47 in his direction. Robert 48 to swim towards the boat.
“Give me a hand,” he shouted 49 he got near the boat. He 50 up into a row of faces. “It’s funny,” he thought. “They look so 51 .” Silently they helped the boy into the boat and 52 him in a blanket (毯子). But they did not move to 53 Robert.
“Aren’t you going to pull me 54 , too?”
“You!” said one of the men. Robert noticed that he was standing next to a large 55 . “You! Why, we were making a film and you spoiled (破坏) a whole afternoon’s work! You can stay in the water!”
36. A. fish B. boats C. waves D. birds
37. A. there B. it C. where D. that
38. A. more B. many C. much D. little
39. A. happened B. went C. arrived D. came
40. A. on B. within C. in D. under
41. A. swimmer B. guard C. soldier D. player
42. A. threw B. looked C. jumped D. turned
43. A. deep B. cool C. dirty D. cold
44. A. but B. so C. and D. or
45. A. pushing B. dragging C. holding D. catching
46. A. place B. period C. second D. moment
47. A. seeing B. smiling C. looking D. shouting
48. A. decided B. went C. agreed D. promised
49. A. while B. till C. for D. as
50. A. turned B. looked C. hurried D. stood
51. A. nervous B. afraid C. excited D. angry
52. A. wrapped B. left C. placed D. threw
53. A. save B. thank C. wrap D. help
54. A. on B. out C. away D. off
55. A. boat B. blanket C. camera D. screen
第三部分 阅读理解（共２０小题；每小题２分，满分４０分）
Ａ
Books which give instructions on how to do things are very popular in the United States today. Thousands of books like this begin with titles that start with the words “how to”. Many of these “how to” books give advice on careers, for example, Ｈｏｗ ｔｏ Ｃｈｏｏｓｅ ａ Ｃａｒｅｅｒ will tell you how to choose a job and how to succeed in it. If you fail, however, you can buy a book called Ｈｏｗ ｔｏ Ｔｕｒｎ Ｆａｉｌｕｒｅ ｉｎｔｏ Ｓｕｃｃｅｓｓ. If you would like to become very rich, you can buy the book Ｈｏｗ ｔｏ Ｍａｋｅ ａ Ｍｉｌｌｉｏｎ. If you never make any money at all, you need a book called Ｈｏｗ ｔｏ Ｌｉｖｅ ｏｎ Ｎｏｔｈｉｎｇ.
One of the most popular types of books is one that helps you with personal problems. If you are unhappy with your life, you can read Ｈｏｗ ｔｏ Ｌｏｖｅ Ｅｖｅｒｙ Ｍｉｎｕｔｅ ｏｆ Ｙｏｕｒ Ｌｉｆｅ. If you are tired of books on happiness, you may prefer a book called Ｈｏｗ ｔｏ Ｍａｋｅ Ｙｏｕｒｓｅｌｆ Ｓａｄ. Many of these books help people use their free time better. Some people want books which will give them information about sports, hobbies, and travel. Other people use their free time to make repairs and improvements on their homes. They like books which give step-by-step instructions on how to repair things like electrical wiring, or how to decorate (装饰) or enlarge a house.
Why have “how to ” books become so popular? Probably because life has become so popular. Probably because life has become so complex (复杂的). Today people have far more free time to use, more choices to make, and more problems to solve. “How to” books help people deal with modern life.
56. When one wants to change his job, he probably needs to read ______.
A. Ｈｏｗ ｔｏ Ｓｕｃｃｅｅｄ ｉｎ ａ Ｊｏｂ
B. Ｈｏｗ ｔｏ Ｔｕｒｎ Ｆａｉｌｕｒｅ ｉｎｔｏ Ｓｕｃｃｅｓｓ
C. Ｈｏｗ ｔｏ Ｃｈｏｏｓｅ ａ Ｃａｒｅｅｒ
D. Ｈｏｗ ｔｏ Ｂｅ ａ Ｓｕｃｃｅｓｓｆｕｌ Ｗｏｒｋｅｒ
57. Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage?
A. How to repair electrical wiring.
B. How to drive a car.
C. How to make your house large.
D. How to make your room look more beautiful.
58. Why have “how to ” books become so popular?
A. Because life has become so difficult.
B. Because people haven’t got much free time to use.
C. Because people have more money.
D. Because people want to deal with all sorts of problems well.
59. This passage makes you think that ______.
A. many “how to” books are of value and help
B. it is a waste of time to read “how to” books
C. there is no need to publish so many “how to” books
D. people seem to be tired of reading “how to” books
Ｂ
Zhang Guocai, 23, is a third year college student who majors (主修) in fashion design at Shenzhen University. He won second prize in the 2006 University Cartoon (漫画) Contest for Environmental Protection on June 5 in Beijing. The topic for the contest was “Stop Desertification (荒漠化) of Our Mother Earth”. Zhang’s work is entitled Ｎｅｗ Ｎｅｓｔ.
The background of his cartoon is an industrial city. In the centre is a bird taking care of four eggs in a nest. However, the bird’s nest is made of electrical wires. “In 2046, there is nothing left in the city except concrete (水泥). Birds have to build their houses out of electrical wires,” the footnote reads. Zhang talked to Ｃｈｉｎａ Ｄａｉｌｙ about his work. He said that the idea should go back to his high school days. His father worked in a factory and he often brought back home abandoned (废弃的) electrical wires. There were balls of colorful electrical wires everywhere in the house. It reminded him of birds’ nests. The moment he got the topic “desertification”, the image of electrical wires hit him. What are birds going to build their nests with if there are no trees? It took him a couple of hours to finish the cartoon, but the idea had been there for many years.
60. The “nest” drawn by Zhang is made of ________.
A. grass and leaves B. concrete
C. electrical wires D. cloth
61. Zhang’s cartoon Ｎｅｗ Ｎｅｓｔ implies (表明) that _____.
A. there are more and more electrical wires in the city
B. there are more and more birds in the city
C. birds in the city like building their nests with electrical wires
D. there are fewer and fewer trees in the city for birds to build nests on
62. How did Zhang come up with the idea of Ｎｅｗ Ｎｅｓｔ?
A. His teacher reminded him.
B. The birds’ nests near his house reminded him.
C. The high buildings in the city reminded him.
D. The wires brought back by his father reminded him of birds’ nests.
63. What is the best title of the passage?
A. A young artist.
B. Young artist draws a cheerless world.
C. Birds’ new nests.
D. Artist draws a wonderful world.
Ｃ
Long ago, little attention was paid to a person’s birthday. Even though everyone knew that people grew older, they had no way of correctly marking time. It wasn’t until the early people learned more about how time passed that they made a note of time changes. Then they developed a calendar and began to celebrate (庆祝) special events such as birthdays. When birthdays first started to be celebrated during the early days, common people, especially children, hardly celebrated their birthdays.
Today, birthdays are celebrated by the young and the old alike all around the world. Many countries have different customs from ours of celebrating birthdays. At the same time there are a lot of people that celebrate birthdays in quite similar ways as we do. Some of the countries are very similar to the United States, such as Austria, Denmark, Ireland, Sweden and Switzerland.
Customs within countries can be affected by things like language, religion, geographic location (位置), and economic conditions. No matter what the customs are, however, they are always followed by the majority of the people in each country. For example, not all children in the US have birthday parties, candles or birthday cakes, but most of them do.
However, the reasons why we celebrate birthdays and use different symbols are very much the same to everyone. The reason why we have birthday parties goes back to long time ago. At that time people believed that good and bad spirits appeared when a child was born and influenced that child through his / her life. The belief brought about the custom of having birthday parties. They believed that surrounding the birthday person with friends, family and good wishes would frighten the bad spirits away.
64. According to the passage, when did people begin to celebrate birthdays?
A. When they learned that no one could stop time.
B. Before they invented a calendar.
C. Before they learned how time went by.
D. After they had a right way of marking time.
65. We can guess that in the early days, _________.
A. only grown-up people celebrated their birthdays
B. only old people celebrated their birthdays
C. only people in the upper class celebrated their birthdays
D. people only celebrated birthdays for children
66. Which of the following will NOT affect birthday customs according to the passage?
A. Religion. B. Education.
C. Economic conditions. D. Language.
67. At first, people had birthday parties to _____.
A. bring good luck
B. get rid of bad luck
C. honor the important day
D. express their wishes
Ｄ
Malaria makes thousands of people ill every year and kills a large number. It is carried from one person who has it to another by mosquitoes (蚊子), and it spreads quickly if there are mosquitoes. If there is no mosquito, there is no problem.
On the island of Cyprus (塞浦路斯) there used to be a lot of malaria, but there is very little now. There were millions of mosquitoes there in the past, and they laid eggs on any standing water they could find. More and more insects (昆虫) appeared, and the danger increased.
The people of the island acted wisely. They drained (排水) away all the standing water and left the ground dry. This took some time, but when it was done, the mosquitoes had no place to lay their eggs. Their number decreased year after year and at last none remained. Then malaria died away.
It is possible to prevent malaria. If there are large numbers of mosquitoes, every one ought to sleep under a mosquito net. Then nets will prevent the mosquitoes from biting people when they are asleep, and they will not get malaria. People used to take quinine (奎宁), and they often remained free from malaria. What is quinine? How was its value discovered? Here is an old story about it, which may or may not be true. 68. From the passage we can infer that “malaria” is a kind of ______.
A. blood B. drink C. disease D. tool
69. Mosquitoes can live well in places where ______.
A. there is a lot of standing water
B. there are a lot of people
C. there is a lot of flowing water
D. there are many ill people
70. The next paragraph will probably talk about ______.
A. mosquitoes B. malaria C. quinine D. flies
71. What’s the best title of the passage?
A. Mosquitoes.
B. Mosquitoes and people.
C. Malaria.
D. Malaria and mosquitoes.
Ｅ
Five years ago, I was sent to a better middle school. For me, everything there was new and strange. After I had been there for two months, there was an important test in the middle of the term. It covered all my courses. In that test, I didn’t get a good grade, but most of my classmates got an A or A-.
It made me upset for a long time. I felt everything in the world was changing. I thought my classmates were all better than me. During those days I was very unhappy.
One day, my aunt, after talking with my teachers, talked to me. She told me to think about what I had done in the past and what I should do in the future. I was shocked by her words. I thought about what I had done during the past months, and I found I had done nothing to improve my grades. I thought I should work harder.
After that, I paid more attention to the teachers’ talking in the classes, and I asked my teachers or my classmates when I didn’t understand something. I studied very late at night when I met with difficult problems. Most of all, I came to understand the importance of taking notes in class. As a result, I did better in some tests.
About three months later, the most important test came at the end of the term. This time, I stood out not only in my class but also in the grade. From then on, I have tried to do my best when I do something because I know if I want something, I should work hard for it.
72. Why did the writer fall behind in the new middle school?
A. Because the teachers didn’t treat him well enough. B. Because the subjects were becoming more difficult.
C. Because he hated the life in the new school.
D. Because he didn’t put his heart into study.
73. What did the writer’s aunt do to help him out?
A. She punished him for not working hard.
B. She helped him find out the reasons for his poor performance.
C. She forced him to work harder.
D. She asked his teachers to talk with him about his problems.
74. Which of the following studying methods helped the writer most?
A. Asking teachers for help when in difficulty.
B. Working deep into the night every day.
C. Making notes in class.
D. Listening to every word his teachers said.
75. What does the underlined sentence in the last paragraph mean?
A. The writer failed again in the exam.
B. The writer did very well in the exam.
C. The writer became the cleverest in the class.
D. The writer was very proud of his progress.
第四部分 写作（共两节，满分３５分）
第一节 短文改错（共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分）
I still remember an interesting story that happen when I
76.
was ten. One day, a classmate of my named Craig brought
77.
his pet mice along. Later, our maths teacher,
Miss Jones, who came into the classroom to give her lesson.
78.
She saw the mice and said angry,
79.
“Get those mice out of here right now!” Craig’s feeling
80.
were hurt, so he let them out of cage. The teacher was so
81.
terrified that she jumped up onto her desk and screamed.
82.
We all fell back laughed. Four teachers ran into our
83.
classroom to see what was go on. They told us that we
84.
should put it back in the cage. Five minutes later, Miss
85.
Jones was still screaming.
第二节 书面表达（满分25分）
假如今年暑假你去了月球旅游，请根据下面所提供的信息，写一篇120词左右的英语短文，讲述一下你的月球之旅。
1. 在飞船起飞时，由于强大的地球引力，我们感觉被挤压在座位上。
2. 在飞船驶出大气层时，我们感觉好多了，并且在飞船舱里漂浮着。
3. 到达月球后，我们在月球上行走如飞，比在地球上快多了，而且还能跳得更高。
4. 月球上风景美丽。
参考词汇：地球引力 gravity 飞船舱 capsule
必修1 Unit 3 Travel journal单元测试题听力原文、参考答案及重点解析
听力原文
Ｔｅｘｔ １
Ｍ： I’d like to get some tickets for tomorrow’s pop show. Ｗ： They may be gone now. They have been on sale for a week and the singer is a great pop star.
Ｔｅｘｔ ２
Ｗ： Attention, please. Professor Smith wants us to hand in a paper on education reform by Monday morning. Ｍ： Another paper for him? My God! We did one only last week.
Ｔｅｘｔ ３
Ｍ： Second class return to Edinburgh, please. Ｗ： Here you are, sir. I’m afraid you’ll have to hurry up. The train leaves at 11 o’clock. Please go directly to Platform Three. Ｍ： I see. Thank you.
Ｔｅｘｔ ４
Ｍ： What wonderful leather shoes! Ｗ： Really? Ｍ： Yes. What’s the price? Ｗ： They were $69, but I got one-third off the regular price.
Ｔｅｘｔ ５
Ｗ： Good morning. Can I help you? Ｍ： Yes. I’m Steve Williams. I’ve booked a room here. Ｗ： Let me check. Yes, a single room for one night. Here is your room key.
Ｔｅｘｔ ６
Ｍ： How do you usually spend your evenings? Ｗ： I usually study, but if there is a new film on TV, I’ll watch it. Ｍ： What about your weekends? Ｗ： I usually do some washing and cleaning in the morning. In the afternoon I like to do some shopping or visit friends.
Ｍ： Do you often go to the park or play sports? Ｗ： Sometimes, but not often.
Ｔｅｘｔ ７
Ｗ： It’s in pretty good condition. I only use it to go to work and back. Ｍ： But the body is rather rusty. Look at these bits here. It needs a lot of work. Ｗ： But it has got a new battery and three new tires. And it’s just been serviced. The engine is almost perfect. Ｍ： All right. I’ll give you 2,000 dollars. Ｗ： Oh, no. It’s worth a lot more. Ｍ： $2,000 in cash. Take it or leave it. Ｗ： Um, I’m sorry. I’ll wait for a better offer. Ｍ： OK. It’s up to you.
Ｔｅｘｔ ８
Ｗ： I’m looking for information about America. Ｍ： Is it for your research paper? Ｗ： Yes. Ｍ： But you’re supposed to look into the developing countries. Ｗ： Really? What is a developing country? Ｍ： A developing country is one in which the majority of people live on far less money than the people in a developed country. Ｗ： Why can’t we just do a research paper about the developed countries and forget about the developing ones? Ｍ： You know what? Five out of six people live in the developing countries. And they live a comparatively poor life. Their average incomes are usually under $2 per day. Ｗ： Do you mean that we need to pay more attention to these countries so that some ways of improving their life can be found? Ｍ： Yes, we may not work out all the problems, but at least people’s attention will be drawn there. Reducing poverty should be the major task of human beings nowadays.
Ｔｅｘｔ ９
Ｍ： Lucy! Ｗ： Umm ... just a minute ... Ｍ： What are you reading? Ｗ： Ｔｈｅ Ｔｒａｖｅｌｓ ｏｆ Ｍａｒｃｏ Ｐｏｌｏ. It’s really interesting! Ｍ： Let me see. Oh! What lovely pictures! Ｗ： Yes. Look! This is Venice. It’s an old town in Italy. Ｍ： Yes. That’s where Marco Polo was born, isn’t it? Ｗ： That’s right. He and his father and his uncle left Italy in 1271 and arrived in China in 1275. Ｍ： It must have been an interesting journey! Ｗ： It was. They traveled by ship and then along the famous Silk Road. Ｍ： Four years! And who is this? Ｗ： Kublai Khan. Marco Polo worked very hard for him. Ｍ： I think they stayed in China for a long time. Ｗ： Um ... seventeen years. And then they had a really difficult and dangerous journey home. They arrived in Venice in 1295.
Ｔｅｘｔ １０
Sweden has a population of only 8 million, but it’s a large country with an area of 450,000 square kilometers. Norway lies to the west and Finland lies to the east. The distance from the southern coast to the northern coast is very long. In 1977, the Swedish king was Charles XVI and the Prime Minister was Mr Fielding. Sweden is not a member of the European Economic Community. Its last war was from 1813 to 1814 when its army was at the battle of Leipzig against Napoleon. Sweden’s chief trading partners are Germany and Great Britain. Its main exports are machinery, paper, cars, iron and steel. In 1971, machinery was 26% and cars 10% of its exports, and exports were greater than imports by 2 billion kronor. Between 1963 and 1971, there was an increase of 61% in industrial production.
参考答案
1-5 CAABB 6-10 CCABB 11-15 ABBCB
16-20 BBCAC
听力填空题(选做)(18-20 One possible version)
18. 450,000 19. Great Britain 20. Industrial
21-25 DBCAB 26-30 BCCDA 31-35 BBADD
36-40 BADDC 41-45 ACDAB 46-50 DCADB
51-55 DADBC 56-60 CBDAC 61-65 DDBDC
66-70 BBCAC 71-75 DDBCB
76-85(One possible version)
76. happen → happened 77. my → mine 78. 去掉came前的who 79. angry → angrily 80. feeling → feelings
81. cage前加 the 82.√ 83. laughed → laughing
84. go → going 85. it → them
书面表达(One possible version)
During the summer holiday, I took a trip to the moon. It was an exciting and unforgettable experience. When we took off, we felt we were pressed onto our seats because of the gravity. But a few seconds later, after we got out of the atmosphere, we felt much better and were flying like birds in the capsule.
When the spaceship arrived on the moon , we got out of it. To my surprise, I made a step much farther than I did on the earth. When I jumped, I could jump higher, too. It was so interesting. I also saw the beautiful sight on the moon, which I had never seen on the earth before.
It was such a great trip that I look forward to taking another space trip again.
重点解析
２７． Ｃ。句意为“不管有多大的困难，一个有决心的人总会设法完成工作”。根据句意，determined为正确答案，意思是“有决心的；坚决的”。２８． Ｃ。I don’t think so意思是“我不这么认为”，相当于I don’t think we’ve met somewhere before。３４． Ｄ。句意为“Alice信任你，只有你才能说服她放弃这个愚蠢的念头”。根据句意，persuade为正确答案，意思是“说服”。５２． Ａ。他们帮助小孩上了船，用毯子包(wrapped)了起来。６０． Ｃ。细节理解题。根据第二段的第三句话“However, the bird’s nest is made of electrical wires.”可知，鸟巢是用电线做成的，故正确答案为C。６８． Ｃ。由短文第一句“Malaria makes thousands of people ill every year and kills a large number.”可以推测，malaria是一种疾病。７２． Ｄ。细节理解题。根据第三段的“I thought about what I had done during the past months, and I found I had done nothing to improve my grades.”可知，作者成绩不好的原因是因为刚转入一所新学校，他没有把精力放在学习上。
Unit 2 English around the world
(满分100分)
单项选择(共15题,15分)
1 Mr. Huang will ________ in the movement.
A. play a leading part B. take parts
C. play leading part D. take a part
2. We discussed where to go for a whole morning, but we decided to stay at home_____.
A. at the end B. by the end C. in the end D. on end
3. _____ of the students who took part in the military training is 450.
A. A number B. A lot C. Lots D. The number
4. Sometimes ________ English is quite different from _______ English in many ways.
A. speaking, writing B. spoken, written
C. speaking, written D. spoken, writing
5. Can you tell me if you have found the key ________ your car.
A. for B. to C. about D. by
6. When we visited Zhangzhuang again ten years later, we found it changed so much that we could hardly ________ it.
A. remember B. think about C. believe D. recognize
7.The policeman warned the drive ________ so carelessly.
A. never to drive B. to never drive
C. to not drive D. doesn’t drive
8. The office ordered his soldiers ________.
A. to stand still B. to not stand still
C. not stand still D. stand still
9. They lived a hard life and were often made _______ for over ten hours a day.
A. work B. to work C. to working D. worked
10. Do you have any difficulty ________ ?
A. on listening B. to listening
C. for listening D. in listening
11.Xiao Hong worked harder last year. _______ , she still didn’t get high grades.
A. As a result B. After all C. By the way D. However
12. Please tell me the way you thought of _______ the garden.
A. take care of B. to take care of
C. taking care of D. to take care
13. It’s _______ hot here. We can’t stay here for a long time.
A. much B. very much C. much too D. too much
14. How did all these _________?
A. came out B. come up C. come across D. come about
15.I came here with your mother ________ to see you.
A. specially B. special C. especially D. especial
二．完形填空（共20题，每小题1.5分，共30分）
Water costs money．In some places water is hard 16 ．What 17 when a town
has these problems？A small town in California found a happy 18 ．
Very 19 rain ever fell there．The town had no water 20 ．The water it used was 21 from a river 300 miles away．As more people 22 live in the town， 23 water was needed．Now water 24 to be brought in from 600 miles away．All these cost 25 money．
The town 26 a plan．It found 27 to clean its “dirty” water．Once the cleaned water was reused 28 many ways．Five 29 lakes were built．Here people could swim and fish and go 30 ．They 31 have picnics in their new parks．Farmers had more water 32 their crops．New factories can be built，now that they have the promise of 33 ．
In most places，water is used and thrown 34 ．The town that saved 35 water
has saved the town！
16．A．supplying B．getting C．to get D．to supply
17．A．happens B．happening C is happened D．happened
18．A．key B．answer C answering D．way
19．A．little B．a little C．few D．a few
20．A．of itself B．of its own C．for its own D for itself
21．A．fetch B．take C．brought in D．guided
22．A．come to B．came to C．coming to D．came for
23．A．many B．plenty of C．more D．many more
24．A．has B．had C．must D．needed
25．A．many B．a few C．a great many D．a lot of
26．A．put B．made C．supply D．noticed
27．A．a way B．ways C．an answer D．a key
28．A．for B．by C．at D．in
29．A．man-making B．man-make
C．man-made D．man made
30．A．boating B．to boat C．to boating D．on boating
31．A．must B．could C．needed D．had to
32．A．as B．with C．for D．to
33．A．water enough B．enough water
C. crops enough D．enough crops
34．A．off B．of C．away D．out of
35．A．it’s B．its C．one’s D．his
三、阅读理解（共15题，每小题2分共30分）
A
People need to relax and enjoy themse1ves．One way they can have a good time is to watch a baseball game or another sports event．Even thousands of years ago，groups of people gathered to watch skilled athletes（运动员）．
Over 2000 years ago in Greece，certain days in the year were festival days．These were holidays when people stopped work and enjoyed themselves．They liked to watch athletes take part in races and other games of skill．
The most important festival was held every four years at the town of Olympia．It was held in honor of the Greek god Zeus（Zus）．For five days，athletes from all parts of the Greek world took part in the Olympic Games．At the Olympic Games，people could watch them box，run，jump and so on．There was a relay race between two teams of men in which a lighted torch（火矩）was passed from runner to runner．The Olympic Games were thought to be so important that cities which were at war with one another had to stop fighting．People were allowed to travel to the games safely．Thousands of people came to Olympia from cities in Greece and from her colonies（殖民地）in Africa，Asia and Italy．They met as friends to cheer their favorite athletes and to enjoy themselves．
36．What happened in Greece over 2000 years ago？
A．People stopped work and enjoyed themselves．
B．The cities there were often against one another．
C．People watched baseball games．
D．People didn’t go to any games at all．
37．What were those countries in Africa？
A．Friends． B．Enemies．
C．Colonies． D．Other cities．
38．What did people do at the games？
A．They fought． B．They just talked to friends．
C．They cheered for good athletes． D．They tried to find friends．
39．Greek cities then were fighting so they_____．
A．were weak B．were strong
C．couldn’t go to other cities freely D．could see each other
40．The best title for the story is“_____”．
A．Greece at War B．Together for the Games
C．Stop Fighting D．Sport
B
Henry Ford was the first person to build cars which were cheap，strong and fast．He was able to se11 millions of models because be could produce them in large numbers at a time；that is，he made a great many cars of exactly the same kind．Ford’s father hoped that his son would be come a farmer，but the young man did not like the idea and he went to Detroit（底特律）where he worked as a mechanic（机械师）．By the age of 29，in 1892，he had built his first car．However，the car made in this way，the famous “Model T” did not appear until 1908-five years after Ford bad started his great motor car factory．This car showed to be well-known that it remained unchanged for twenty year．Since Ford’s time，this way of producing cars in large numbers has be come common in industry and has reduced the price of many goods which would otherwise be very expensive．
41．Henry Ford was the man to built _____ cars．
A．cheap and strong B．cheap and long
C．fast and expensive D．strong and slow
42．Ford was able to sell millions of cars，because_____．
A．he made many greet cars B．his cars are many
C．he made lots of cars of the same kind D．both A and B
43．The young man became a mechanic，_______．
A．which was his father’s will B．which was against his own will
C．which was against his father’s will
D．which was the will of both
44．The “Model T” was very famous_____．
A．before 1908 B．between 1982 and 1908
C．before 1892 D．after 1908
45．Ford built his own car factory
A．in 1903 B．in 1908 C．in 1913 D．in 1897
C
The city of Venice，in Italy，is one of a kind．It is built on more than 120 islands，just off arrival．After explaining where my new house was，I told him that I had left the key under the doormat．Since I knew it would be quite late before I could get back，I suggested that be make himself at home and help himself to anything that was kept in the refrigerator（冰箱）．
Two hours later my friend phoned me from the house．At the moment，he said，he was listening to some of my records after having had a nice meal．He had found the pan and meat in the refrigerator．Now，he was drinking a cup of tea and hoped that I would join him soon．When I asked him if he bad any difficulty finding the house，he answered that the only problem was that he had not been able to find the key under the doormat，but luckily，the living room window by the apple tree had been left open and he had climbed in through the window．I listened to all this in great surprise．There is no apple tree outside my window，but there is one by the living room window of my next-door neighbor’s house！
46．When my friend arrived，I could not go to meet him because________．
A．we were not good friends B．I was busy at work
C．he had not told me that he would come D．I did not want to see him
47．A doormat is a mat______．
A．used as a door B．for cleaning the bottom of shoes
C. put up on a door as an ornament（装饰物）
D．near a door under which people put their keys
48．I listened to my friend’s phone call in great surprise because____．
A．he had not waited for me to eat together
B．he had eaten too much of the food
C．he mistook my neighbor’s house for mine
D．he had left the house with the window open
49．At last my friend______．
A．did not enter my house
B．entered my house after he opened the door
C．entered my house by climbing through the window
D．entered my house with the help of my neighbor
50．The writer left the key under the doormat so that______．
A．nobody would find it
B．he might not lose it
C．his family could use the same key
D．his friend could easily get it
四. 翻译.(每题3分,共15分)
由于天气不好,他开会迟到了.
汉语的发音与英语的发音有相当大的区别.
应该充分利用这本书.
不管你信不信,中国足球队战胜了伊朗队.
他在英语学习中取得了如此大的进步,以至于老师表扬了他.
四、书面表达（10分）
假定你是一名高中生，一次一位外国朋友问你，除了在学校学习英语之外还有什么其它途径练习英语。请你根据提示用英语写出你参加“英语角” 的情况。提示：1、“英语角” 于两年前成立，许多中学生参加，有时也有些大学生和外国友人来此。2、活动时间：每周六上午。3、活动内容：练习英语口语，谈论大家共同感兴趣的事情，交流学习英语的经验等。4、谈你参加此项活动的体会。
参考词汇：“英语角”：English corner
参考答案
一. 单项选择
1—5:ACDBB 6—10: DAABD 11—15:DBCDA
二. 完形填空
16---20 C A B A B 21--25 C B C A D
26--30 B A D C A 31--35 B C B C B
三.阅读理解
36--40 B C C C B
41--45 A C C D A
46—50 B B C A D
四.翻译
He was late for the meeting because of the bad weather.
The pronunciation in Chinese is quite different from the pronunciation in English.
This book should be made full use of.
Believe it or not, the Chinese football team has beaten Iran.
He made such good progress in English study that the teacher praised him.
五.书面表达 possible version;
I’m a senior student. I like English very much. Besides attending English lessons at school, I often go to the English corner in the park nears my home on
Saturday morning. It was set up (formed) two years ago. Many high school students gather there. Sometimes, some college students and even foreign friends are present at the English corner. There, we practice our spoken English, talk about what we are interested in, exchange our experience in learning English and so on. I’ve learned a lot. I have greatly improved myself in English since I visited it. It is really a great help to me.
必修1
Unit 2 English around the would
A 卷（基础知识卷）
I. 单项选择（15分）
1. Excuse me, I didn’t follow you just now. ________.
A. I beg your pardon B. Please walk slowly
C. It doesn’t matter D. That’s right
2. At the buyer’s __________, the flowers will be shipped by air.
A. request B. question C. call D. problem
3. Hiking is a good way for you to get ________ to nature.
A. closely B. closing C. close D. closed
4. The old man couldn’t hear clearly. I had to ________ the word again and again.
A. talk B. say C. repeat D. speak
5. More than one person ________ made the same mistake.
A. have B. has C. is D. are
6. --I don’t have money with me. Can I pay by credit card?
--__________.
A. Not at all B. No problem
C. Never mind D. Nothing serious
7. The teacher asked us __________ so much noise.（2003北京）
A. don’t make B. not make C. not making D. not to make
8. Actions __________ walking and drinking are quite difficult in the moon.
A. for example B. such as C. including D. liking
9. Most of the students’ time is spend __________ studies.
A. to do B. doing C. in D. on
10. __________ English has changed a lot over time and __________ English spoken between about AD 450 and 1150 was quite different.
A. / ; the B. / ; / C. The ; / D. The ; the
11. The number of people invited __________ sixty, but a number of them __________ absent for different reasons.
A. was ; was B. was ; were C. were ; were D. were ; was
12. All the students in the school don’t come from the town. This sentence means ________.
A. Any of the students in the school don’t come from the town
B. Some students in the school come from the town
C. All the students in the school come from the town
D. None of the students in the school come from the town
13. –________ to go shopping with me tonight?
--But I’ll be busy preparing my lessons.
A. Why not B. Do you like
C. Would you like D. Would you please
14. There are ________ middle-school students taking part in the English contest.
A. two hundred of B. two hundreds
C. hundreds of D. hundred of
15. Neither of them knows the difference ________ the two and neither can we tell one ________the other.
A. between ; between B. among ; from
B. among ; between D. between ; from
II. 完形填空:（30分）
Languages are always changing . 16 English of today is very different from 17 of 500 years ago. In time, some languages become more 18 and others become less important.19 even die out completely. About 1,000 years ago English was a little 20 language.
If a language has a large 21 of speakers, or 22 it is very old, there may be difference 23 the way it is spoken in different areas. 24 , the language may have 25 dialects (方言). Chinese is a good example of dialect differences. Chinese 26 for thousands of years by many millions of 27 . The differences between the dialects of Chinese are 28 great that speakers of Chinese from some parts of China cannot understand each other.
There are other kinds of dialects. In some languages we find words or expressions and even grammatical forms, which are used 29 by men and others used by women. What’s more, each generation 30 its own expressions and grandparents and grandparents and grandchildren may sometimes have difficulty in understanding each other.
16. A. An B. The C. / D. A
17. A. that B. it C. this D. one
18. A. important B. simple C. easy D. impossible
19. A. Anyone B. None C. Any D. Some
20. A. known B. to know C. knowing D. knew
21. A. amount B. deal C. number D. numbers
22. A. if B. as C. as if D. even if
23. A. on B. in C. at D. by
24. A. However B. That is C. But D. So
25. A. few B. several C. no D. little
26. A. has been spoken B. has spoken C. is spoken D. have been spoken
27. A. speakers B. talkers C. tellers D. writers
28. A. very B. too C. such D. so
29. A. both B. only C. neither D. either
30. A. studies B. uses C. produces D. makes
III. 阅读理解（10分）
In today’s world English is the most wildly used language. It is our duty to learn English in the new situation of the reform and opening (改革开放) to the outside world. How can we master the English language ? I’d like to give you some good advice.
First, get interested in it. I enjoy listening to foreign friends talking when I was a child. At the same time I watched the English programme Follow Me on TV. From then on, I kept on learning English. The more I learned, the more progress I made.
Second, practice makes perfect. Many people study English very hard, but they are very shy to speak it in public, for they are afraid of making mistakes. Remember you have to make a mistake before you can correct it. A native English speaker makes mistakes sometimes, too.
Third, the beginners should be encouraged to pay attention to idioms. The English language has many idioms. For example, you should say “ He is as strong as a cow.”
31. The writer wants to tell us ____________.
A. the importance of learning English
B. the new situation of the reform and opening to the outside world
C. some good ideas on how to master English D. the wide use of the English language
32. If we want to learn English, we must first __________.
A. show interest in it B. enjoy listening to it
C. watch English programmes on TV D. practice speaking it
33. When we are learning English, ____________.
A. remember the mistakes and correct them B. try not to make any mistakes
C. avoid mistakes before making them D. don’t be afraid of making mistakes
34. The underlined sentence in Paragraph 3 means “_______________.”
A. Remember to make a mistake before you can correct it
B. You are sure to make a mistake before you can correct it
C. Remember you have to make a mistake and then correct it
D. You’ll make a mistake after you can correct it
35. According to the writer, what is the most important in learning English ?
A. Practising listening and speaking as much as possible. B. Paying attention to idioms.
C. Not being shy to speak in public D. Watching English programmes
Answer sheet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
IV. 把下面的直接引语变为间接引语 (20分)
36. He asked, “How are you getting along with your classmates?”
________________________________________________________
37. Sally asked, “Ben, can you come here tomorrow?”
________________________________________________________
38. He said to the boy, “Don’t cut down the young trees again.”
________________________________________________________
39. My father said to me, “Do be careful when you walk across the road.”
________________________________________________________
40. She asked, “Do you like to go by air or by water, Peter?”
________________________________________________________
41. Rose asked me, “Will you please pass me the dictionary?”
________________________________________________________
42. He asked, “Who has left the key in the office?”
________________________________________________________
43. Jack said, “John, pass me the book, please.”
___________________________________________________________
44. Mr. Smith asked, “Where did you go yesterday?”
___________________________________________________________
45. My mother said to me, “It won’t be long before you leave school.”
___________________________________________________________
V. 完成下列句子，每空一词（25分）
46. 并非所有这里的人都理解他所说的话。
____________ ____________ the people here understood what he had said.
47. 夏天起床不像冬天那么难。
Getting out of bed in summer is ____________ ____________ than in winter.
48. 在这次冲突中至少有8个人被杀，其中包括一名警察。
At least eight people were killed in the fight, ____________ a policeman.
49. 那老人过来向我们要那个空瓶子。
The old woman ____________ ___________ ____________ us and asked for the empty bottle.
50. 他说的和他做的完全不同。
What he said was quite ____________ ____________ what he did.
51. 这部小说是以一个真实的故事为根据的。
The novel is ____________ ____________ a true story .
52. 他喜欢发号施令，但是我们没人愿意听他的。
He likes ____________ ____________ but none of us listen to him.
53. 由于生病，他不得不没结束工作就回来。
____________ ____________ being ill he had to come back before finishing his work.
54. 信不信由你，明天的考试取消了。
____________ ____________ ____________ ____________, the examination tomorrow is cancelled.
55. 联合国在国际关系中发挥着重要的作用。
The UN is ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ in the ____________ relationship.
Unit 2 English around the would
B 卷（综合提高卷）
I. 单项填空（30分）
1.--I have got a nice computer.
--__________?
--I mean that I have bought a new computer.
A. Speak louder, will you B. I beg your pardon
C. What’s that D. Will you repeat it
2. My son stayed in an ________ country for about half a year, so his ________ English is much better than before.
A. English-speaking ; spoken B. English-spoken ; speaking
C. English-spoken ; spoken D. English-speaking ; speaking
3. It’s so nice to hear from her. __________, we last met more than thirty years ago.（2002北京）
A. What’s more B. That is to say C. In other words D. Believe it or not
4. I agree with most of what you said, but I don’t agree with __________.
A. anything B. everything C. something D. nothing
5. She told us __________ story that we all forgot about the time.
A. so an interesting B. such an interesting
C. a so interesting D. a such interesting
6. In my opinion, it’s the best use that could be __________ the space.
A. made up B. made in C. made of D. made from
7. -- Go for a picnic this weekend, OK?
--__________. I love getting close to nature.
A. I couldn’t agree more B. I don’t think so
C. I believe not D. I’m afraid not
8. He agreed with me. Later, __________, he changed his mind.
A. but B. however C. though D. while
9. --Was the teacher strict?
-- Yes. He requested that we __________ television on week nights.
A. must not watch B. didn’t watch C. not watch D. couldn’t watch
10. –Oh, it’s you! I __________ you.
--I’ve just had my hair cut, and I’m wearing new glasses.
A. didn’t recognize B. didn’t know C. don’t recognize D. don’t know
11. They don’t know much about ________ English language but they can speak ________ English well.
A. /; / B. /; the C. the; / D. the; the
12. A number of young people ________ present at the party and the number of them ________.
A. was ; were many B. were ; was many
C. was ; were large D. were ; was large
13. Mr. Brown said that his gold watch ________stolen and he ________ have to call the police.
A. was ; would B. has been ; will
C. had ; would D. had been ; would
14. The book cost me 12 yuan in all, postage _____.
A. included B. including C. includes D. is included
15. –I’m not good at __________ people.
--No wonder you have so few friends.
A. agreeing with B. getting along C. communicating with D. arguing with
II. 完形填空:（30分）
As the Chinese saying goes, each family has its own trouble. But I want to say that some troubles are 16 .
My mother is now 84 years old. She can’t read or write, nor can she understand Putonghua. What’s 17 , she is hard of hearing. 18 she came to live with us from our hometown, our two children gave her new meaning in life and kept her 19 for several years. When the children grew up, she still kept 20 in housework, shopping, and cooking every day.
21 she was getting old, we asked her to keep 22 the road and not go shopping, cook and wash clothes. The more she 23 , the more we worried for her. But she never followed us. Now every day at work, I 24 my mother when I have a few minutes. What is she doing now, I 25 . The modern kitchen appliances(厨房用具) have trained a good 26 into a forgetful cook. She forgets to 27 the gas and we’ll smell rice 28 before we enter our home. Rushing into the kitchen, we’ll see the 29 pot smoking on the stove. We have asked her not to do housework, but she says we don’t 30 her any more and cries and refuses to eat. Then we comfort her as if we were treating a child.
16. A. curious B. glad C. sweet D. troublesome
17. A. more B. that C. better D. wrong
18. A. Since B. Because C. Until D. When
19. A. free B. unhappy C. busy D. worried
20. A. active B. easy C. quiet D. secret
21. A. So B. Though C. What D. As
22. A. away B. off C. on D. up
23. A. did B. kept C. lived D. said
24. A. ask B. see C. call D. miss
25. A. know B. say C. suppose D. wonder
26. A. child B. housewife C. servant D. worker
27. A. close B. shut off C. turn on D. use
28. A. burning B. cooked C. ready D. smell
29. A. grain B. rice C. tea D. water
30 . A. belong to B. care about C. need D. respect
III. 阅读理解（10分）
Two students started quarreling at school. One student shouted dirty words at the other, and a fight began.. what can be done to stop fights like this at school? In some school, the disputants sit down with peer mediators(同龄调解者). Peer mediators are students with special training in this kind of problems.
Peer mediators help the disputants to talk in a friendly way. Here are some of the ways they use:
Put what you think clearly but don’t say anything to hurt the other. Begin with “I feel…” instead of “You always…”
Listen carefully to what the other person is saying. Don’t stop the other person’s words.
Keep looking at the other person’s eyes when he or she talks.
Try to see the other person’s side of the problem.
Never put anyone down. Saying things like “You are foolish” makes the talk difficult.
Try to find a result that makes both people happy.
Peer mediators never decide the result or the winner. They don’t decide who is right and who is wrong. Instead, they help the two students to find their own “win-win” result.
31. The underlined word “Disputants refers to the students ________.
A. who make peace B. who give in
C. who are lazy D. who quarrel
32. When there is a fight at school ________.
A. the peer mediators decide who the winner is
B. the peer mediators and the disputants talk together
C. the students who quarrel decide who the winner is
D. the two students sit down and listen to the peer mediators
33. Peer mediators’ work is ________.
A. to give lessons to disputants
B. to find out who starts a quarrel
C. to give students some special training
D. to help find a way to make both sides happy
34. During the talk, if you say “You are lazy” or “I feel angry”, ________.
A. it’s easy for you to decide who is right
B. it’s hard for you to get a “win-win” result
C. the other person will understand you better
D. the other person will know he or she is wrong
35. Which of the following ways is not used by Peer mediators in finding a “win-win” result?
A. Listen carefully to what the other person is saying.
B. Try to see the other person’s side of the problem.
C. Never say things like “You are foolish” makes the talk difficult.
D. Never keep looking at the other person’s eyes when he or she talks.
Answer sheet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
IV. 根据首字母或汉语提示，写出单词（10分）
36. Mr. Henry is from an English ____________(说) country.
37. The child has a very large ____________(词汇量) for his age.
38. In British ____________ (用法), “petrol” means “gas”.
39. He looks dishonest, but ____________(实际上) he is a thief.
40. The police are trying to find out the ____________ (身份) of the man killed in the accident.
41. I come from China, and Chinese is my n____________ language.
42. He has changed a lot. I could hardly r____________ him.
43. Do you know how many people were p____________ at the meeting?
44. The g____________ calls on every family to have one child in our country.
45. As the living s____________ rises year by year in China, more and more people travel abroad.
V. 写作（20分）
根据下列提示写一篇短文，简要说明学好外语的必要性。
1. 英语特点：活的语言，在世界范围内广泛应用。
2. 学英语的目的：为在工作和交往中使用，学习先进科技和文化。
3. 怎样提高口语能力：积极说，别怕错。
4. 体会：“有志者事竟成”。只要坚持，就能学好。
要求：字数100左右。内容必须包括所有提示要点，不要逐字翻译。
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
参考答案
Unit 2 English around the would
A 卷（基础知识卷）
1~5 AACCB 6~10 BDBDA 11~15 BBCCD 16~20 BAADA 21~25 CABBB 26~30 AADBB 31~35 CADBA
36. He asked how I was getting along with my classmates.
37. Sally asked Ben if/whether he could go there the next day.
38. He told the boy not to cut down the young trees again.
39. My father told me to be careful when I walked across the road.
40. She asked Peter if/ whether he liked to come/go by air or by water.
41. Rose asked me to pass her the dictionary.
42. He asked who had left the key in the office.
43. Jack asked John to pass him the book.
44. Mr.Smith asked where he had gone the day before.
45. My mother said to me it wouldn’t be long before I left school.
46. Not all 47. less difficult 48. including 49. came up to 50. different from 51. based on 52. giving commands /orders 53. Because of 54. Believe it or not 55. playing an important role international
B 卷（综合提高卷）
1~5 BADBB 6~10 CABCA 11~15 CDDAC 16~20 CADCA 21~25 DBACD 26~30 BBABC 31~35 DBDBD
36. speaking 37. vocabulary 38. usage 39. actually 40. identity 41. native 42. recognize 43. present 44. government 45. standard
One possible version
English is a living language like any other languages. It is widely used all over the world. More and more people begin to learn English in order to be able to use it freely at work and learn from other countries. It is not easy for us to learn English well because we don’t have a good condition and our time is too limited. But where there is a will, there is a way. If we keep on speaking it and using it, we can learn it well. Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. We should be active in speaking more. So long as we keep on using it, we can master it.
必修一第1-2单元综合测试题
第一卷（三部分，共105分）
第一部分 听力(共两节，满分30分)
第一节 (共5 小题；每小题1.5分，满分7.5分)
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后，你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
1. What is the probable relationship between the speakers?
A. Husband and wife. B. Customer and waitress.
C. Employer and employee.
2. What do you know about Brown?
A. He is in very good health.
B. He is now in the hospital.
C. He is not very well.
3. How will the man talk with Doctor King?
A. By phone. B. By fax. C. Face to face.
4. What is the attitude of the woman towards not going to the meeting?
A. She takes it very seriously.
B. She doesn’t care very much.
C. She is very angry about it.
5. What can we know about the cafe Pronto?
A. The food is cheap and tasty.
B. The food is very expensive.
C. It is run by an Italian.
第二节（共15小题；每小题1.5分，满分22.5分）
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独白后有几个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前，你将有时间阅读各个小题，每小题5秒钟；听完后，各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段材料，回答第6至8题。
6. What is the woman interested in?
A. She’s interested in the students’ life in Ireland.
B. She’s interested in the students’ life in England.
C. She’s interested in the French students’ life in Ireland.
7. When are they supposed to see a film?
A. On Monday, November 15th.
B. On Tuesday, November 14th.
C. On Tuesday, November 15th.
8. What time can the woman interview the man again?
A. At 8:00 pm Wednesday. B. At 2:00 pm Tuesday.
C. At 8:00 am Monday.
听第7段材料，回答第9至11题。
9. Who is the man?
A. He is the manager of the Reception Department.
B. He is an agent of Star Travel.
C. He is the manager of a company.
10. What’s the man’s telephone number?
A. 87944778. B. 89744778. C. 87947778.
11. How many rooms does the man want to reserve?
A. 6 single rooms and 4 standard rooms.
B. 4 single rooms and 5 standard rooms.
C. 4 single rooms and 6 standard rooms.
听第8段材料，回答第12至14题。
12. How does the woman feel about speaking in public?
A. She dislikes talking and hates to meet new people.
B. She enjoys talking and is fond of meeting new people.
C. She loves talking but is tired of meeting new people.
13. Why doesn’t the woman mind working with young people?
A. She likes helping people and the young need help.
B. She likes to help people that she is familiar with.
C. She likes to help people that she does not know.
14. When will the woman get the result of the interview?
A. In around five days. B. In about a week.
C. In less than five days.
听第9段材料，回答第15至16题。
15. When are they going to have the new house completed?
A. Within 10 days.
B. Before the rainy season comes.
C. Next year.
16. How many bricks do they decide to buy?
A. 1,600. B. 15,000. C.16,000.
听第10段材料，回答第17至20题。
17. What do experts think of ginger soup?
A. The smell can make people feel better.
B. It contains a special chemical.
C. It protects one’s heart.
18. Which of the following wasn’t mentioned by the woman?
A. Green tea. B. Meat. C. Seafood.
19. What did the woman think causes skin problems?
A. Stress and not getting enough sleep.
B. A vegetarian diet. C. Being overweight.
20. How many questions did the man ask all together?
A. 3. B. 4. C. 5.
第二部分 英语知识运用（共两节，满分35分）
第一节 语法和词汇知识 （共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分）
从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
21. — Sorry to have hurt you.
— ____. You didn’t mean to, did you?
A. Forget it B. Take it easy
C. All right D. Don’t say so
22. The patient was warned ____ oily food after the operation.
A. to eat not B. eating not C. not to eat D. not eating
23. The problems at home may have an effect on one’s job. If a man often quarrels with his wife, his work will ____.
A. bear B. suffer C. fall D. lose
24. His face looks brown because he works ____ all day.
A. indoors B. outdoors C. indoor D. outdoor
25. The reporter said that the UFO east to west when he saw it.
A. was traveling B. traveled
C. had been traveling D. was to travel
26. — We are having a party this evening.
— ____
— Thank you.
A. Really? B. How I wish I could go with you!
C. Have fun! D. Come on！
27. Shelly worked every night for her biology examination in order to pass it at her first ____.
A. attention B. purpose C. attempt D. desire
28. Mom said the bed ____ before we leave the room.
A. should be made B. should make
C. be made D. make
29. Stop making so much noise the neighbor will start complaining.
A. or else B. but still C. and then D. so that
30. You daren’t go alone at night, ____ you?
A. dare B. do C. daren’t D. don’t
31. — Who is Jerry Cooper?
— ____? I saw you shaking hands with him at the meeting.
A. Don’t you meet him yet B. Hadn’t you met him yet C. Didn’t you meet him yet D. Haven’t you met him yet
32. He is only too ready to help others, seldom, , refusing when they turn to him for help.
A. if never B. if ever C. if not D. if any
33. — Shall we go out this weekend?
— Oh, with all the work , I don’t know if I’ll have time to go out.
A. to do B. doing C. done D. do
34. You’d better your scores and see if you have passed the exam.
A. add up to B. add to C. add up D. add in
35. The teacher asked a very difficult question. It was Ted who finally ____ a good answer.
A. came up with B. kept up with
C. went through with D. put up with
第二节 完形填空（共20小题；每小题1分，满分20分）
Years ago, in a small fishing village in Holland, a young boy taught the world about the rewards of unselfish service.
Because the entire village 36 fishing, a volunteer rescue team was needed 37 emergency. One night, the winds 38 violently, the clouds burst and a fierce storm overturned a fishing boat 39 . The crew in trouble 40 the SOS. The captain of the rescue rowboat team sounded the alarm and the 41 gathered in the town square 42 the sea. When the team started their rowboat and fought their way 43 the wild waves, the villagers waited 44 on the beach, holding lanterns to 45 the way back.
An hour later, the rescue boat reappeared through the fog and the 46 villagers ran to greet them. Falling 47 on the sand, the volunteers reported that the rescue 48 could not hold any more passengers and they had to leave one man 49 . Even one more passenger would have surely 50 the rescue boat and all would have been lost.
Violently, the captain 51 another volunteer team to go after the lone 52 . Sixteen-year-old Hans stepped forward. His mother asked him not to go, as he was the only son left and his older brother Paul had been lost at sea for three weeks. But Hans kissed his mother, joined the team and disappeared into the 53 .
Another hour passed. The rescue boat dashed through the fog with Hans standing in the bow. 54 his hands, the captain called, “Did you find the lost man?” Hardly able to contain himself, Hans 55 yelled back, “Yes, we’ve found him. Tell my mother it’s my older brother, Paul!”
36. A. lived for B. lived up C. lived on D. lived in
37. A. because of B. in case of
C. as a result of D. instead of
38. A. calmed B. annoyed C. blew D. moved
39. A. at home B. in a river
C. on the sand D. at sea
40. A. set about B. sent out
C. came up with D. took over
41. A. villagers B. parents C. children D. farmers
42. A. overlooking B. following
C. fighting D. struggling
43. A. by B. to C. through D. for
44. A. nervously B. angrily C. fearfully D. badly
45. A. blow B. light C. hear D. find
46. A. promising B. hoping C. cheering D. expecting
47. A. uncomfortable B. exhausted
C. disturbed D. painful
48. A . boat B. team C. girl D. passenger
49. A. back B. behind C. beyond D. front
50. A. overcome B. overthrown
C. overturned D. unsettled
51. A. called for B. called up C. called in D. called at
52. A. survivor B. hope C. life D. existence
53. A. moon B. night C. water D. boat
54. A. Seeming B. Keeping C. Turning D. Cupping
55. A. calmly B. sadly C. excitedly D. angrily
第三部分 阅读理解（共20小题；每小题2分，满分40分）
A
The mobile phone rule is just common polite behaviour. Most people today have a mobile phone. In fact, many people can’t imagine how they ever get along without them. However, many people also complain about mobile phone users. People complain about other people loudly discussing personal matters in public places. They complain when mobile phones ring in movie theaters and concert halls. They complain about people driving too slow, and paying no attention to where they are going because they are talking on a mobile phone. And they complain about people walking around talking to people who aren’t there.
Whenever a new communication technology becomes popular, it changes the way in which society is organized. Society has to invent rules for the polite way to use the new devices. Our rules of politeness for mobile phones are still evolving.
The mobile phone rule applies to most public places. Always try to have your phone ring as low as possible or put your mobile phone on the vibration（振动） mode, so it does not distract the people around you. The basic mobile phone rule includes:
1. Switch it off: Turn it off when you have meetings, worship, and so on.
2. Be brief: When you get a call and you’re with friends, keep the call short.
3. Permission: Often, it is correct and polite behavior to inform others at the beginning of the meeting that you are expecting an important call and get their permission.
4. Be polite: Don’t scream — speak in a lower-than-normal voice.
5. Don’t distract: Avoid talking where you may be distracting to others.
6. Driving: It is not only very dangerous, but also unlawful in most countries to drive and talk on your mobile phone.
56. What is the best title for this passage?
A. How to use a mobile phone.
B. Mobile phone rule.
C. The disadvantages of mobile phones.
D. Mobile phones — making them work for us.
57. According to this passage, we can know that the rules for mobile phones are .
A. far from our satisfaction
B. getting worse
C. making people disappionted
D. developing gradually
58. Which of the tips on using mobile phones properly is mentioned in this passage?
A. Concentrate on what others say.
B. Speak at the top of your voice in order to make yourself heard.
C. Always turn off your mobile phones.
D. Had better not distract others.
59. What is the main purpose of writing the first paragraph?
A. To attract readers to the topic of the passage.
B. To give examples about people’s improper behaviors with mobile phones.
C. To criticize people’s improper behaviors.
D. To show mobile phones have brought people a lot of trouble.
60. What does the word “it” refer to in Paragraph 3?
A. A mobile phone.
B. The ring of the phone.
C. The mobile phone rule.
D. The conversation on the phone.
B
European Union lawmakers are studying a proposed tax on emails and mobile phone text messages as a way to fund the 25-member union in the future.
A European Parliament working group is reviewing the idea, proposed by its member Alain Lamassoure.
Lamassoure is proposing to add a tax of around 1.5 cents on text or SMS messages and a tax of 0.00001 cents on every email sent.
“This is a very small amount of money, but given the billions of transactions every day, this could still raise an extremely large income,” he said.
Currently the EU budget is funded through a combination of import duties(进口关税), value added taxes and direct contributions from member states — the so-called “Gross National Income Resource”, which is calculated according to wealth.
However, after a year-long battle over the current seven-year budget agreed on last December, it has been decided that the way in which the EU is funded should be changed, with new proposals expected by 2008 or 2009.
A single “EU tax” has found support among many of the 25 EU members. Other ideas include a tax on airline tickets and an extra tax on oil companies will be discussed.
In Italy, the concept of a tax on text was floated in the past, as a way to help balance the country’s huge deficit(赤字), although it was directly rejected by the outgoing government.
But Lamassoure argues that with billions of emails and text sent around the world, it’s a new and simple way to raise funds from new technology.
“Exchanges between countries have increased greatly, so everyone would understand that the money to finance the EU should come from the benefits produced by the EU,” he said.
61. Why does the EU propose to tax emails and mobile phone text messages?
A. To support the EU members.
B. To increase transactions between the EU countries.
C. To balance EU’s deficit.
D. To raise funds for the EU.
62. We can learn from the text that .
A. there is a tax on text in Italy now
B. the EU is going to change its ways of getting money
C. the EU members are not satisfied with import duties
D. the seven-year budget hasn’t been decided yet
63. At present, the EU raises its funds through the following ways EXCEPT .
A. donation from its members B. import duties
C. a tax on airline tickets D. value added taxes
64. What would be the best title for this passage?
A. EU’s New Way of Raising Funds.
B. A New Proposal under Discussion.
C. EU to Tax E-mails, Text Messages?
D. EU’s New Proposal about Tax.
65. Lamassoure’s attitude towards the proposal is .
A. negative B. optimistic
C. doubtful D. disapproving
C
Much meaning can be conveyed, clearly, with our eyes, so it is often said that eyes can speak.
Do you have such kind of experience? On a bus you may look at a stranger, but not too long. And if he is sensing that he is being stared at, he may feel uncomfortable.
The same in daily life. If you are looked at for more than necessary time, you will look at yourself up and down, to see if there is anything wrong with you. If nothing goes wrong, you will feel angry toward others’ stare with you that way. Eyes do speak, right?
Looking too long at someone may seem to be rude and aggressive(冒犯的). But things are different when it comes to staring at the opposite sex. If a man glances at a woman for more than 10 seconds and refuses to avert(转移) his gaze, his intentions are obvious: he wishes to attract her attention, to make her understand that he is admiring her.
However, the normal eye contact for two people engaged in conversation is that the speaker will only look at the listener from time to time, in order to make sure that the listener does pay attention to what the former is speaking. As for the listener, he will, to a certain extent, look continuously at the speaker, to tell him that he is attentive.
If a speaker looks at you continuously when speaking, as if he tries to dominate（控制）you, you will feel upset. A poor liar usually exposes(暴露) himself by looking too long at the victim, since he believes in the false idea that to look straight in the eye is a sign of honest communication. Quite the contrary.
In fact, continuous eye contact is confined to(局限于) lovers only, who will enjoy looking at each other tenderly for a long time, to show affection that words cannot express.
Evidently, eye contact should be done according to the relationship between two people and the specific situation.
66. When the writer says eyes can speak, he really means that .
A. eyes can really speak sometimes
B. eyes can express meaning sometimes
C. eyes can understand meaning
D. eyes take part in some conversations
67. According to the text, a teacher should look at students in class in order to .
A. find something wrong with the students
B. make sure that students pay attention
C. show that he or she is very attentive
D. show the sign of honest communication
68. The underlined sentence (Paragraph 6) means .
A. a liar is always a poor thing and so he will be a victim
B. inexperienced liars have a false idea and so are often exposed
C. looking straight in the eye is a sign of honest communication
D. liars often look at others straight in the eye to show honesty
69. Which of the following is TRUE according to the text?
A. People often stare at others on buses.
B. People don’t like being looked at.
C. Men always enjoy looking at women.
D. Eye contact can attract attention.
70. According to the fourth paragraph, we can learn that _____.
A. looking too long at someone is always polite
B. eye contact sometimes expresses your admiration to the opposite sex
C. eyes can help you get someone you love
D. looking at someone is sometimes necessary
D
On November 18, 1995, Itzhak Perlman, the world famous violinist, came on stage to give a concert at Lincoln Centre in New York City. If you have ever been to a Perlman concert, you know that getting on stage is not easy for him. He got polio(小儿麻痹症) as a child, and has to walk with the aid of two crutches(拐杖) now.
That night Perlman walked slowly to his chair. Then he sat down and began to play. But, suddenly, one of the strings on his violin broke. You could hear it break — it broke with a very loud noise.
People thought to themselves, “He would have to get up to either find another violin or find another string for this one.”
But he didn’t. Instead, he waited a moment, closed his eyes and then signaled the conductor to begin again. The orchestra(管弦乐队) began, and he played from where he had stopped. He played with such passion and such power.
Of course, everyone knows that it is impossible to play a symphonic(交响乐的) work with just three strings. But that night Itzhak Perlman refused to know that. You could see him changing and recomposing(重新作曲) the piece in his head.
When he finished, there was a silence in the room. Then people rose and cheered. We were all on our feet, doing everything we could to show how much we appreciated what he had done.
He smiled and then he said in a quiet tone, “You know, sometimes it is the artist’s task to find out how much music you can make with what you have left.”
His words have stayed in my mind ever since I heard them. That is also the way of life. Perhaps our task in this quickly changing world in which we live is to make music, at first with all that we have, and then, when that is no longer possible, to make music with what we have been left with.
71. Holding a concert is challenging for Perlman because ______.
A. he is just a world famous violinist
B. he has never performed on stage before
C. he is physically disabled and getting on stage is difficult for him
D. he has difficulty in moving his body
72. When Perlman had just begun playing, _______.
A. there was something wrong with the violin
B. he fell ill suddenly
C. an accident happened and caused a disturbance
D. a very loud noise arose from the audience
73. If one of the strings suddenly broke, what would an ordinary player do?
A. He would cancel the concert.
B. He would play another violin.
C. Another performer would play instead.
D. The concert would be put off.
74. The audience rose and cheered _____.
A. to show they are satisfied with their life
B. to thank the orchestra for their passionate performance
C. to ask Perlman for another performance
D. to express their appreciation of Perlman’s creative mind
75. The lesson we draw from the story is that ______.
A. we should make the best of what we have
B. what we have is more important than what is lost
C. we should not care about what is lost
D. the way of life is to always live with music
第二卷（共45分）
第四部分 写作（共两节, 满分45分）
第一节 阅读表达（共5小题；每小题3分，满分15分）
We can make mistakes at any age. Some mistakes are about money, but most mistakes are about people. “Did Jerry really care when I broke up with Helen?” “When I got that great job, did Jim really feel good about it, as a friend? Or did he envy my luck?” “And Paul — why didn’t I pick up that he was friendly just because I had a car?” When we look back, doubts like these can make us feel bad. But when we look back, it’s too late.
Why do we go wrong about our friends — or our enemies? Sometimes what people say hides their real meaning. And if we don’t really listen, we miss the feeling behind the words. Suppose someone tells you, “You’re a lucky dog.” Is he really on your side? If he says, “You’re a lucky guy” or “You’re a lucky gal,” that’s being friendly. But “lucky dog”? There’s a bit of envy in those words. Maybe he doesn’t see it himself. But bringing in the “dog” bit puts you down a little.
What he may be saying is that he doesn’t think you deserve your luck.
“Just think of all the things you have to be thankful for” is another noise that says one thing and means another. It could mean that the speaker is trying to get you to see your problem as part of your life as a whole. But is he? Wrapped up in this phrase is the thought that _____________________. It’s telling you to think of all the starving people in the world when you haven’t got a date for Saturday night.
How can you tell the real meaning behind someone’s words? One way is to take a good look at the person talking. Do his words fit the way he looks? Does what he says square with the tone of voice? His posture? The look in his eyes? Stop and think. The minute you spend thinking about the real meaning of what people say to you may save another mistake.
76. What is the best title for this passage? (Please answer within 5 words.)
77. Which sentence in the passage is the closest in meaning to the following one?
These words show that the speaker is a little jealous.
78. Please fill in the blank with proper words or phrases to complete the sentence. (Please answer within 10 words.)
79. Do you think a person is being friendly by saying “You are a lucky dog”? Why? (Please answer within 30 words.)
80. Translate the underlined sentence into Chinese.
第二节 书面表达（满分30分）
假如你叫李华，请写一封信给校长，反映一下学校微机室存在的问题，同时提出你自己的改进办法。
问题：
① 台数不足；
② 部分键盘、鼠标已损坏，软件过时；
③ 关门时间太早。
注意：1. 词数120左右；2. 书信的格式已给出；3. 可适当发挥。
Dear Principal,
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
_____________________________________________
Sincerely yours,
Li Hua
必修一第１－２单元综合测试题听力原文、参考答案及重点解析
听力原文
Ｔｅｘｔ １
Ｍ? Excuse me. Where are the dishes I ordered? I need to go to the airport very soon. Ｗ? Sorry for the delay. They are coming right away. Ｍ? Thank you.
Ｔｅｘｔ ２
Ｗ? How about Brown joining us on our trip? Ｍ? I don’t think he is well enough. Ｗ? But he’s out of hospital. Ｍ? He still needs more rest.
Ｔｅｘｔ ３
Ｍ? I want to make sure what Doctor King really thought of my suggestion. Ｗ? You’d better talk to him face to face. It’s such an important matter after all. Ｍ? I need to fix a time for another talk with him. Ｗ? You certainly do.
Ｔｅｘｔ ４
Ｍ? Didn’t you go to the meeting? Ｗ? No, I had a slight headache. Ｍ? The boss will be angry with us. Ｗ? So what?
Ｔｅｘｔ ５
Ｍ? Do you know any good places for dinner around here? Ｗ? Well, I really like the cafe Pronto. They have wonderful Italian food. Ｍ? Do they? I like Italian food. Is it very expensive there? Ｗ? That’s another good thing about it. It’s not expensive at all.
Ｔｅｘｔ ６
Ｗ? You’re Mathew More from Ireland? Ｍ? Yes, I am. Ｗ? I’m Jane Phil from England. I’m very interested in what you talked about the other day, about the students’ life in Ireland. I wonder if you could tell me more about that. You see I work for a teenager magazine in England. Ｍ? Certainly. But I’m afraid we won’t have time now. Ｗ? No, no, not now. What about this evening? Ｍ? Let me see. Er ... Today is Monday, November 14th. I’m afraid I won’t be free this evening. Perhaps tomorrow evening. Ｗ? But aren’t we supposed to see a French film tomorrow evening?
Ｍ? Oh, yes, French film on Tuesday evening. Ｗ? What about the day after tomorrow? Ｍ? Ur... That’s all right. I have nothing on Wednesday evening. Will that be all right with you? Ｗ? Sure. Ｍ? See you at eight Wednesday evening then.
Ｔｅｘｔ ７
Ｍ? Good morning. Could I speak to the manager of the Reception Department, please? Ｗ? I’m sorry. He’s not in. Who’s speaking, please? Ｍ? Eric Wheeler of Star Travel. Do you know when he’ll be back? Ｗ? I’m afraid he probably won’t be back until next Monday. He’s away for a conference. Would you like to leave a message or would you like to call again next Monday? Ｍ? I’d like to leave a message for him. Ｗ? Would you mind spelling your name, please? Ｍ? Eric Wheeler. That’s W-H-E-E-L-E-R. Ｗ? And your telephone number? Ｍ? He can reach me most easily on 87944778. Ｗ? And what’s the message? Ｍ? Well, I was wondering if he could reserve 4 single rooms and 6 standard rooms for next Wednesday for a tourist group? Ｗ? OK, I’ll let him know that as soon as he comes back.
Ｔｅｘｔ ８
Ｍ? Welcome, Miss Smith. I need to ask you some questions. The first one is, sometimes you have to do some public speaking. How do you feel about that? Ｗ? Oh, I like to talk and I love to meet new people. Ｍ? OK. Do you have a driver’s license? Ｗ? Yes. I have a driver’s license. However, I don’t really like to go long distances. Ｍ? How do you feel about working with young kids? Ｗ? I don’t mind working with young kids. They need help. And I enjoy helping people. Ｍ? What about working late at night? You know we often have to work long hours. Ｗ? I don’t mind working long hours. Ｍ? I see. And how do you feel about working at night? Ｗ? Well, I can work until ten o’clock at night, but after that I’d like to be at home because I like to go to bed early. Ｍ? OK. Thank you very much. We’ll let you know in about a week. Ｗ? Thank you for giving me your time.
Ｔｅｘｔ ９
Ｗ? Darling, I suggest we build a new house, as rainwater always comes in through the ceiling when there are storms. Ｍ? Yeah. We should think about it right away. We have to build it before the rainy season comes. Ｗ? Of course. Let’s figure out what we should prepare to build the house. Ｍ? First, bricks, we have to buy at least fifteen thousand bricks. Ｗ? Erm. Yeah. I think we can go to the South Brickmark to buy sixteen thousand bricks. If they are not enough, we can order some more later. Ｍ? Good. We also have to get some sand and logs and... Ｗ? Well. Finally, we have to get some stones for the base. Ｍ? Yes, I nearly forgot. I will buy the bricks, sand and the stones first, and then I’m going to the wood market for the logs. Ｗ? OK, darling. I will draw some money out.
Ｔｅｘｔ １０
Ｍ? May I ask you some questions? Ｗ? Sure. Ｍ? Does ginger soup really help to fight a cold? Ｗ? Well, for centuries, people have believed that ginger soup is a good cure for colds. Now this may be true. Experts think that it contains a special chemical that stops a cold from getting worse. Ｍ? Is a vegetarian diet healthy? Ｗ? A person who doesn’t eat meat can get enough protein and be healthy by eating eggs, nuts, and certain vegetables. Ｍ? Does chocolate cause skin problems? Ｗ? No. More often the causes are stress and not getting enough sleep. Ｍ? Is tea better than coffee? Ｗ? Many studies in the past 20 years have shown that green tea contains something that can protect your heart, fight cancer and lower fat in your body. Coffee does not do this. Ｍ? Can foods like bread and potatoes make us fat? Ｗ? No, er... They contain less fat and few calories, but eating too much and not exercising can cause a person to gain weight.
参考答案
1-5 BCCBA 6-10 ACABA
11-15 CBABB 16-20 CBCAC
21-25 ACBBA 26-30 CCAAA 31-35 DBACA
36-40 CBCDB 41-45 AACAB 46-50 CBABC
51-55 AABDC 56-60 BDDAB 61-65 DBCCB
66-70 BBBDB 71-75 CABDA
阅读表达(One possible version)
76. Mistakes about people.
77. There’s a bit of envy in those words.
78. your problem isn’t important
79. (略)。
80. 你用来思考别人对你所说的话的真正含义的时间也许能避免你再犯一个错误。
书面表达(One possible version)
Dear Principal,
I’m writing to you to tell you about some problems with our computer room.
I think there are three problems. First, there are not enough computers, and as a result when we have computer classes we have to share computers. Second, many keyboards and mice are broken, and the software is out-of-date. Third, the computer room closes too early. We only have free time after finishing our homework, but sometimes when we go to the room it has already been closed.
I also have some advice for these problems. Firstly, more computers should be bought. Secondly, broken and old equipment should be replaced. Thirdly, it might be a good idea for the computer room to stay open for a longer time, especially on weekends, when we have more free time.
I am looking forward to seeing changes in our computer room.
Best wishes,
Sincerely yours,
Li Hua
重点解析
２５． Ａ。分析语境可知，该句为间接引语，可将其直接引语假设为：When the reporter saw the UFO, he said, “The UFO is traveling east to west.”显然，这里应用过去进行时。２８． Ａ。make和bed是动宾关系，排除B、D。这里不需要用虚拟语气，should在此表示“应当”，选A。３１． Ｄ。 分析语境可知，该句为对话式直接引语，其标准对照时间点应为现在，因此该空表示的是“到目前为止你还没有遇到他吗？”显然，应使用现在完成时。３６． Ｃ。由第一段的in a small fishing village和后面的内容可知整个村庄以捕鱼为生。３８． Ｃ。后文的the clouds burst and a fierce storm overturned a fishing boat at sea描述出了当时的天气状况，据此推断前文是狂风大作。 ５３． Ｂ。由前面的one night和... holding lanterns to light the way back可知是消失在夜幕中。 ６３． Ｃ。由A single “EU tax” has found support among many of the 25 EU members. Other ideas include a tax on airline tickets and an extra tax on oil companies可知这是将要被讨论通过的一项提议。 ６８． Ｂ。这里的poor是指经验不丰富，victim是指欺骗的对象，也就是谎言的“受害者”。他们暴露自己是因为他们的错误观点——对视是诚实沟通的表现。７５． Ａ。考查主旨大意。文章的最后一段表明了作者的写作目的和全文的主旨大意。作者通过小提琴家Perlman的事例谈到了人生的真谛：我们的生活方式就是如此。或许我们的生活目标是要在这个变化莫测的世界中创作音乐，开头是用我们全部的所有，后来就是用我们剩下的东西。ep. Ｍ? Is tea bett?
高一英语第二次月考试卷(无附听力材料)
第一部分：听力（共三节，满分30分）
◎第一节（共5小题；每小题1.5分，满分7.5分）
听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选择项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后，你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
What size does the woman want?
A
Size8.
B
Size10.
C
Size12.
Where does the conversation take place?
A
In a post office.
B
In a hotel.
C
In a bank.
Why is the man going to New York?
A
To live there.
B
To visit a friend.
C
To have a vacation.
4、What are they going to do?
A
Play tennis.
B
Go swimming.
C
Do some cleaning.
5、What is the man doing?
A
Making an announcement.
B
Making an appointment.
C
Making an invitation.
◎第二节（共12小题；每小题1.5分，满分18分）
听下面4段对话。每段对话后有几个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选择项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话前，你将有时间阅读各个小题，每小题5秒钟；听完后，各小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话读两遍。
听下面一段对话，回答第6至第7二个小题。
6、Who is this announcement for?
A
People on a train.
B
People on a plane.
C
People in a restaurant.
7、What time of the day is it?
A
Morning.
B
Noon.
C
Evening.
听下面一段对话，回答第8至第10三个小题
8、What are the speakers doing?
A
Watching a movie.
B
Having dinner.
C
Making soup.
9、What makes the man unhappy?
A
The woman doesn’t cook very well.
B
The woman seldom talks to him at dinner.
C
The woman watches too many commercials.
10、What will the woman do next?
A
Talk to the man.
B
Watch TV.
C
Have dinner.
听下面一段对话，回答第11至第13三个小题。
11、What does the man dislike about his job?
A
Working in a hotel.
B
Working in summer.
C
Traveling all the time.
12、Why doesn’t he want to take the new job?
A
He doesn’t get a good pay.
B
He dislikes working in a seaside town.
C
He hates playing the same piece again and again.
13、What does the woman think of the job the man was offered?
A
Boring.
B
Well-paid.
C
Tough.
听下面一段对话，回答第14至第17四个小题。
14、What are they discussing?
A
What to have for lunch.
B
Where to go for lunch.
C
When to have lunch.
15、What can we learn about the man?
A
He usually doesn’t eat fast food.
B
He often eats in a restaurant near his home.
C
He can’t afford an expensive lunch that day.
16、How long does it take them to go to the restaurant?
A
30 minutes.
B
20 minutes.
C
15 minutes.
17、Where are they probably going right after this conversation?
A
A supermarket.
B
A fast food place.
C
A French restaurant.
◎第三节（共3小题；每小题1.5分，满分4.5分）
听下面一段材料，将18至20三个小题的信息补充完整，每小题不超过三个单词，听材料前，你将有时间阅读各个小题，每小题5秒钟；听完后，各小题将给出15秒钟的作答时间，本段材料读两遍。
Lost Information
Thing lost
a 18. overcoat
Place
on a 19.
Time
20.
第二部分：英语知识运用（共两节，满分45分）
第一节 单项填空（共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分）
从A.B.C.D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项，并把正确答案填在答卷上。
21．I had no one to help me. I had to work_________.
A. all along B. all over C. all alone D. all through
22．---What has Tom been doing recently ?
----I don’t know, _________ care.
A. nor I do B. nor do I C. neither am I D. neither I am
23．The teacher asked Jim _______________.
A. why was he late for school B. why he was late for school
C. how he was late for school D. how was he late for school
24．We were swimming in the lake ________ suddenly the storm started.
A. when B. while C. until D. before
25．__________ the students passed the exam although it was not a little difficult.
A. A great many B. The number of C. A great many of D. A great deal of
26 With the boy _________ the way, we had no difficulty _________ the old man’s house.
A. leads; find B. leading; finding C. led; found D. to lead; to find
27．_______ is very important for us students to learn English well.
A. It B. As C. What D. There
28．I really don’t know _________ I had my money stolen.
A. when was it that B. that it was when
C. where it was that D. it was where that
29．Your composition is quite good __________ some spelling mistakes.
A. except B. besides C. except for D. except that
30．__________ it is to go for a picnic on such a fine day!
A. What a fun B. What fun C. How fun D. How a fun
31．----Shall we go to the cinema this evening ?
----Sorry I can’t. I’m __________ my mum at the airport at 7:00.
A. carrying away B. sending away C. putting off D. seeing off
32．Have you seen the film “Titanic” ________ leading actor is world-famous ?
A. its B. it’s C. whose D. which
33．The ___________ girl was last seen ___________ flowers near the river.
A. missing; picking B. missing; pick C. missed; picked D. missed; to pick
34．The pen _________ I wrote the letter was lost.
A. that B. which C. by which D. with which
35．I couldn’t help ________ when I saw the naughty monkey .
A. to laugh B. laughing C. laughed D. laugh
完型填空（共20小题；每小题1.5分，满分30分）
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从36-55各题所给的四个选项（A.B.C.D）中，选出最佳选项，并把正确答案填在答卷上。
A student went to college(大学) after 36__ all his school examinations. There he put his name down for world geography, 37_ after the first day, he did not go to 38_ any more. The teacher noticed that this student was 39_ absent (缺课) and thought that he had changed to 40 class. He was very 41_ when he saw the boy's name on the list(名单) of students 42_ wanted to take the geography examination 43_ the end of the year.
The teacher had prepared a difficult examination paper, which covered 44 he had taught, and he was eager(急切) to see 45 this student answered the questions. He expected that his answer would be very 46_; but when he examined his paper carefully, he found only one small mistake in them.47_ this surprised him very much, he went through the paper 48_, but was still not able to find 49 one mistake, so he sent 50 the student to question him about his work..
When the student had 51 the room, the teacher said to him, “I know that you came to my class only once on the first day and that you have been absent from all the others. Yet I have found only one small mistake in your paper. 52_ is that?”
“Oh, I'm sorry about that mistake, sir, ”answered the student. “After the examination, I realized 53 I ought to have written. I would not have made that mistake 54 I had not been confused(弄糊涂) by your 55_ lecture.”
( )36. A. having B. taking C. passing D. failing
( )37. A. so B. but C. however D. and
( )38. A. it B. lesson C. college D. class
( )39. A. always B. once C. never D. sometimes
( )40. A. another B. the other C. other D. others
( )41. A. angry B. happy C. sorry D. surprised
( )42. A. that he B. he C. who D. whom
( )43. A. in B. at C. after D. by
( )44. A. everything B. something C. anything D. nothing
( )45. A. what B. when C. how D. why
( )46. A. good B. full C. nice D. bad
( )47. A. For B. As C. So D. Though
( )48. A. two rimes B. twice C. once D. again once
( )49. A. more than B. another C. the other D .second
( )50. A. with B. to C. x D. for
( )51. A. reached to B. arrived to C. arrived into D. come into
( )52. A. Why B. What C. How D. Which
( )53. A. where B. why C. what D. when
( )54. A. unless B .if C. because D. as
( )55. A. first B. last C. latest D. certain
第三部分：阅读理解（共20小题，每小题2分，满分40分）
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项（A.B.C.D）中，选出最佳选项，并把正确答案填在答卷上。
（A）
Of all the things we eat and drink, water is the most important. Not all people realize this, but it is quite true. The human body can live without food for a long time, but two or three days without water usually result in death.
Many people do not understand how much water the human body needs, but many people do not drink enough, especially in the hot weather. Most people drink when they are thirsty but often need more water after exercises.
65 to 70 percent of the human body is water. Water is important in several different ways. Most people need five to seven litres of water every day, but we need not drink this amount because a lot comes from the food we have. If we don’t have enough water, however, we will feel tired and many become ill. Do you know what the best drink is? Yes, you are right. Cold water!
56．Do most people drink five litres of water every day?_______
A. Yes, because water is the most important
B. No, because what we eat contains water
C. Yes, because we can’t live without water
D. No, because we are not thirsty
57．How much water are there in the human body?_________
A. About three fourths of the human body is water.
B. Nearly a half of the human body is water.
C. Less than a half of the human body is water.
D. Almost one fourth of the human body is water.
58．When do we need more water?________
A. In cold weather or after exercises.
B. In hot weather or after exercises.
C. Before breakfast, lunch and supper.
D. When we feel tired or become ill.
59．Which of the following is not right?_________
A. Cold water is the best drink.
B. Few people understand how much water the human body needs.
C. Not all the people realize water is the most important.
D. When we feel tired or become ill, we never need any water.
(B)
Welcome to our school. You can do a lot of things here. Come and join us.
Timetable
Sunday
8:30---11:30
Personal Inventions
You can see many inventions by the students;
you may also bring your own inventions.
Monday
19:00---21:00
Space and Man
Dr. Thomas West
If you want to know more about the universe(宇宙).
Wednesday
19:30---21:00
Modern Medicine
Mrs. Lucy Green
Would you like to know medical science?
Friday
18:30---21:00
Computer Science
Mr. Harry Morison from Harvard University
Learn to use Windows XP.
60. You may have a chance to introduce your inventions on _________.
A. Sunday B. Monday C. Wednesday D. Friday
61. The person who teaches Computer Science is from___________.
A. Canada B. Australia C. New Zealand D. America
62. You may learn something about a disease(疾病) called TB from __________.
A. Dr. West B. Mr. Morison C. Mrs. Green D. Mr. Thomas
63. If you want to learn something about satellites(卫星), you can go to the class from______.
A. 8:30 to 11:30 on Sunday B. 19:00 to 21:00 on Monday
C. 19:30 to 21:00 on Wednesday D. 18:30 to 21:00 on Friday
(C)
One day my wife and I went shopping at the shop. We took the car as we had a lot of things to buy because my brother and his family were going to spend the weekend with us. We stopped the car in front of the shop. An hour later we came back to the car with a lot of things. Then the trouble started. We couldn’t open the car door.“Oh dear,” said my wife. “What are we going to do?”“Let’s ask the policeman,” I said.The policeman was very kind and glad to help us. A few minutes later he got the door open. Just at that moment an angry man came up and shouted. “What are you doing with my car?” We looked at the number of the car and our faces turned very red.
64. The husband and wife went shopping _________. A. in their car B. by bus C. on foot D.It didn’t mentioned 65. __________ opened the car door in the end. A. The policeman? B. The wife C. The husband D.The wise and the husband 66. The owner of the car was very angry ________. A. to find his car opened by others B. not to find his car C. to see a policeman standing by his car D.to see his car broken 67. They didn’t know it was a wrong car till ____________. A. they saw a man coming B. they heard the man’s shout C. they saw a policeman coming D .they saw the number of the car
（D）
All over the world people enjoy sports. Sports help to keep people healthy, happy and help them to live longer.
Sports change with the season. People play different games in winter and summer.
Games and sports often grow out of people’s work and everyday activities. The Arab use horses or camels in much of their daily life; they use them in their sports, too.
Some sports are so interesting that people everywhere go in for them. Football, for example, has spread around the world. Swimming is popular in all countries near the sea or in those with many rivers.
Some sports or games go back thousands of years, like running or jumping. Chinese boxing, for example , has a very long history. But basketball and volleyball are rather new. Neither one is a hundred years old yet. People are inventing new sports or games all the time.
People from different countries may not be able to understand each other, but after a game they often become good friends. Sports help to train a person’s character. One learns to fight hard but fight fair, to win without pride and to lose with grace.
68．According to this passage we know that ________.
A. people began to play about one hundred years ago
B. about 100 years ago people ran or jumped when they played
C. basketball has a long history than volleyball
D. not all the games have long history
69．According to the passage, which of the following isn’t true?______
A. Sports help to train a person’s character.
B. People swim only because there are a lot of rivers in their country.
C. People from different countries may not be able to understand each other before a game.
D. Sports and games can develop the friendship between people all over the world.
70．The writer didn’t tell us in this passage that ______.
A. basketball was invented in America
B. sports change with seasons
C. games and sports often grow out of people’s work and everyday activities
D. football is played all over the world
( E )
Mr Backer is a kind-hearted man. Once he gave some food to a poor woman. Mr White, the boss of the restaurant, found it and became angry. He often gave the leftovers(剩饭菜) to some poor workers. Mr Backers lost his work for it. It was difficult for him to find work in the small country though(虽然) he was an able cook.. The war made all stop. Children couldn't go to school, most shops were closed, even some farmers were hungry. Some people were made to leave their houses and they had to find the safe places. It was an autumn night. Mr Backer hadn't any food to eat and went to bed, but he couldn't fall asleep. suddenly he heard a noise in his room. He saw a man looking for something useful there. He said nothing and watched it carefully. At last the man brought a few old clothes out of a broken paper box and took them away. He got up quickly and followed him gently(文雅地), with his quilt on his back. The man didn't find him and went into a small and wet house. Mr Backer also went in and saw there was nothing in the room.The thief(贼) saw him and was surprised. He asked,“What did you come here for?” “You have carried my things here,”said Mr Backer.“I have to move there, too!”
71.Mr White sent Mr Backer away because .
A、he couldn't cook B、he didn't work hard
C、he didn't like him at all D、he gave some leftovers to the poor woman
72. , so the people in the small country got into trouble.
A、The war broke out(爆发) B、It didn't rain
C、Children couldn't go to school D、Shops and factories were closed
73. Mr Backer couldn't go to sleep because .
A、the weather was cold B、the weather was hot
C、he was hungry D、he was ill
74. Mr Backer said nothing when the thief went into his room because .
A、he wanted to send him to the police station B、there was nothing expensive there
C、he was afraid the man could hurt him D、he hoped the man could help him
75. The word“quilt”in this story means .
A、珠宝 B、钱箱 C、被子 D、鞋带
第四部分：书面表达（共两节，满分35分）
根据所学课文内容填空（共20空；每空0.5分，满分10分, 每空限填一个单词）
Chuck _____1____ the crash and lands on a _____2____ land.
Chuck learns that we need friends to ____3____ happiness and_____4____, and that it is important to have someone to __5___ __6__.
There are more than 42 countries _____7____ the majority of the people speak English.
In China students learn English at school as a foreign language, ___8__ ___9__those in Hong Kong.
___10_____ ___11_____spending your vacation on a bus, in a hotel or sitting on the beach, you may want to try hiking.
You should not go rafting ____12____ you know how to swim, and you should always ___13_____ a life jacket.
Flora heard somebody __14____ . She looked around and saw Jeff ___15__. ___16__ she could move, she heard a loud noise,__17__ grew to a terrible roar.
The next moment the first wave ____18_____her down, _____19_____ the garden . Jeff _____20______ her towards the house.
第二节：书面表达（满分25分）
假设你是凤凰华鑫高中高一年级学生，你将邀请你的美国朋友David下星期天到你家做客，请你给他发一个E—mail告诉他有关的活动安排。
上午：去古城参观名胜古迹，坐船游沱江
下午：讨论美式英语和英式英语的差别
晚上：大家共享妈妈做的风味晚餐，观看影片〈〈英雄〉〉
注意： 1开头已经给出
2 可适当增加细节，以使行文连贯
3. 词数60以上
参考词汇： 安排：arrangement 古城：the old castle
名胜古迹：place of interest 风味食品：local food
Hi, David, long time no see. My parents and I would like to have you with us for a whole day next Sunday. Now let me tell you___________
[参考答案]
听力（每小题1.5分,满分30分）
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
C
A
A
C
C
A
B
B
B
B
C
C
B
B
C
C
A
18. _18. long white 19. __bus____ 20.___yesterday morning_
单项选择（共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分）
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
C
B
B
A
C
B
A
C
C
B
D
C
A
D
B
完型填空（共20小题；每小题1.5分，满分30分）
36---55 CBDAA DCBAC DBBAD DCCBA
阅读理解（共20小题，每小题12分，满分4分）
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
B
A
B
D
A
D
C
B
A
A
A
D
D
B
A
D
A
C
B
C
第四部分：书面表达（共四节，满分35分）
第一节 根据所学课文内容填空（共20空；每空0.5分，满分10分）
1. survives 2. deserted 3. share 4. sorrow 5. care
6. about 7. where 8. except 9.for 10.Instead
11. of 12. unless 13. wear 14. swept 15. swallowing
16. grabbed 17.asked 18.secret 19. owes 20. to
第二节书面表达（满分15分）
Hi, David, long time no see. My parents and I would like to have you with us for a whole day next Sunday. Now let me tell you what we have arranged for you. In the morning, we’ll go to the old castle and pay a visit to the place of interest,then go boating across the Tuo Jiang. In the afternoon,we will talk about the difference between the British English and the America English. we’ll enjoy Fenghuang local food prepared by my mother. After dinner, we’ll go and see a chinese film named “Hero”. I’m sure we’ll have a nice day together. Looking forward to your coming.
Unit 2 English Around the World
Exercises for warming up and reading
【一清--知识扫描】
I．构词法Word formation
1. culture ____________adj
2. actual ____________adv.
3. east____________adj
4. polite____________antonym
5. identity____________v.
6. use____________n.
7. direction____________v.
8. rule____________ n.
II．选词填空
Choose the proper words from the box for the blanks, using the right forms.
direction block usage rapid native recognize request standard identity
1. Noticing there might be danger ahead, she gathered the children around her _______.
2. He has lost his _______ card and is being questioned by the police.
3. The police have _______ the road as a result of an accident.
4. Everyone _______ him to be the lawful heir.
5. The gunshot sent hte birds flying in all _______.
6. Visitors are _______ not to pick the flowers.
7. Columbus thought the _______ of America were Indians.
8. The kilogram is the international _______ of weight.
【二清—能力过关】
III．单选题
1. We all have a part to ________ in the fight against crime.
A. play B. take C. playing D. taking
2. It was not ________ that native speakers don’t know grammar very well.
A. surprise B. surprising C. surprised D. surpises
3. Spring is coming and the grass is just beginning to ________.
A. come along B. come up C. come with D. come through
4. He lives three ________ away from here.
A. blockings B. buildings C. streets D. blocks
5. The boy often ________ money from his grandparents.
A. requests B.orders C. tells D. commands
6. He likes to help others ________ he is very busy.
A. because B. if C. even D. even if
7. The film was made ________ the World War II.
A. base on B. based on C. base in D. based in
8. There are twenty students who are going to have a picnic on Sunday, six girls ________.
A. include B. included C. including D. includes
9. Did you have any difficulty ________ the question?
A. to answer B. answering C. having answered D. answered
10. The number of people invited to the party ________ sixty, but a number of them ________ absent.
A. were; was B. was; was C. was; were D. were; were
【三清—思维拓展】
IV．阅读
What is language for? Some people seem to think it’s for practicing grammar rules and learning lists of words——the longer the lists, the better. That’s wrong. Language is for the exchange of ideas and information. It’s meaningless knowing all about a language if you can’t use it freely.
Many students I have met know hundreds of grammar rules, but they can’t speak correctly or fluently(流利地). They are afraid of making mistakes. One shouldn’t be afraid of making mistakes when speaking a foreign language. Native speakers make mistakes and break rules, too. Bernard Shaw once wrote, “Foreigners often speak English too correctly.” But the mistakes that native speakers make are different from those that Chinese students make. They’re English mistake in the English language. And if enough native speakers break a rule, it is no longer a rule. What used to be wrong becomes right. People not only make history, they make languages, also. But a people can only make its own language. It can’t make another people’s language. So Chinese students learning English should pay attention to grammar, but they shouldn’t overdo it. They should put the communication at the first place.
1. Generally, when an American or an Englishman speaks English, he .
A. never makes mistakes B. often makes mistakes
C. can’t avoid making mistakes D. always makes mistakes
2.The sentence “Foreighers often speak English too correctly” means that .
A. foreighers speak connect English
B. foreigners speak incorrect English
C. foreigners speak English according to the grammar rules
D. foreigners never make mistakes when they speak English
3. When we speak a foreign language, we should .
A. speak in the Chinese way B. speak according to the rules
C. break the rules D. not be afraid of making mistakes
4. What is the most important when speaking a foreign language?
A. Grammar rules. B. Lists of words.
C. Making no mistakes. D. Communication.
Exercise for reading
【一清--知识扫描】
I．词组翻译
1. 在…中起作用（担任角色）____________
2. 因为；由于____________
3. 例如____________
4. 走近；上来____________
5. 以…为根据____________
6. 一个又一个____________
7. 迅速增长____________
8. 互相交流____________
9. 外国语____________
10. 与…不同____________
11. 利用____________
12. 标准英语____________
13. 信不信由你____________
14. 扮演一个角色；参与____________
【二清—能力过关】
II．翻译句子
1.这部电影是以现实生活中的一件事为基础的。
The movie ________ ________ ________ a real-life incident.
2.他因为腿不方便而行走缓慢。
He walked slowly ________ ________ his bad leg.
3.他走到我跟前来借火。
He ________ ________ ________ me and asked for a light.
4.众所周知，英语在国际交流中起重要作用。
As is known to all, English ________ ________ ________ ________ in international communication.
5.乡村生活与城市生活是相当不同的。
Country life is quite ________ ________ city life.
6.这是一个你可以利用来提高英语口语的机会。
This is a good chance that you can ________ ________ ________ to improve your spoken English.
7.即使你不成功，他们也会支持你。
They will stand by you ________ ________ you don’t succeed.
8.在19世纪60年代，美国内战爆发了。
________ ________ ________the American Civil War broke out.
III．课文改编完型
At the end of the ________ century, about five to seven ________ people spoke English. At ________, more people speak English as their ________, ________ or ________ language than ever before. Although there are some ________ between American English and British English, ________ speakers can understand each other. English changes when cultures ________ with one another. Old English was very different ________the English spoken today. English is also spoken as a foreign or second language in ________ Asia, where there are a large ________ of English speakers. In China, the number of people learning English is ________ rapidly and it is supposed that Chinese English will become one of the world Englishes.
【三清—思维拓展】
IV．阅读
Fitting in
(Luis Lopes was a high school student when he wrote this prize-winning essay. It appeared in a collection of student essays called Discovery.)
When I first came to the United States, I made friends with a neighbor who used to live a couple of blocks from my street. We used to visit each other, do some activities, and go out together sometimes. This friend taught me a lot about American culture, but in some cases I had to learn the hard way because we didn’t have enough time together as friends for me to learn all about American culture from him.
One day this same friend invited me to a party. It wasn’t a real party. It was some kind of informal get-together. Since it was summertime he had a cookout where most of his American friends and relatives were known to me, but there were others I had never met before.
It was the most embarrassing party for me when I noticed that everybody was wearing jeans and simple T-shirts for the day, while I arrived in proper dress with my shoes and my hair all fixed for a fancy party. It was hard to explain my embarrassment to the other guests. When one of them turned around and said, “What nice clothes! What’s the occasion?” I felt my face burning hot with embarrassment. I did not answer at all. If she knew how bad I already felt, she wouldn’t have come near me. But she did. Maybe she didn’t ask intentionally to make me feel bad or uncomfortable, but my reaction had to do with the way I already felt. I could have told her I had to go to another party afterward, but I did not want to continue the conversation.
Many times I thought about going home and changing, but I knew that they would notice. It would be even worse for me, because I knew they would quickly think that I felt out of place. So I wanted to pretend that I was okay…
I had already realized their customs were different from mine, but after I talked to my friend, I was more convinced that people here are more casual(随便的). They care less about formality(礼节)，unless it is a special occasion, like a wedding or a very formal invitation.
Decide whether the following statements are true(T) or faulse (F).
（ ）1. The author of this essay was a native of America.
（ ）2. The author felt embarrassed at the party because he knew few of the people there.
（ ）3. The author dressed rather formally because he had to go to another party later on.
（ ）4. It was the difference in custom that caused this embarrassment.
（ ）5. When invited to a wedding, the Americans will dress formally.
Learning about language
【一清--知识扫描】】
I．词型变化
1. When the boss ________ him with a set of golf clubs on his retirement, all the colleagues ________ at the meeting clapped. (present)
2. She ________ permission to film at the White House and her ________ was granted. (request)
3. He didn’t speak ________ English, so he failed to reach the reqired ________, and did not qualify for the speech competition. (standard)
4. When you hear two ________ speakers of English, they may still not spead the same kind of English. But at the same time, some people can speak English like a ________. (native)
5. I’m at your ________--what would you like to ________ me to do? (command)
【二清—能力过关】
II．单选题
1. The teacher asked us ________ so much noise.(2003 北京)
A. don’t make B. not make C. not making D. not to make
2. The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his mother told him ________.(1995 全国)
A. not to B. not to do C. not do it D. do not to
3. All the people ________ at the party were his supporters.(2002北京)
A. present B. thankful C. interested D. important
4. As I know, there is ________ car in this neighborhood.(2001 上海)
A. no such B. no a C. not such D. no such a
5. The English play ________ my students acted at the New Year’s party was a great success.(2004 全国)
A. in which B. for which C. at which D. on which
6. Someone is ringing the doorbell. Go and see ________.
A. who is he B. who he is C. who is it D. who it is
7. He ________ Mr Smith ________ to them.
A. asked; to introduce yourself B. asked; to introduce himself
C. told; introduce himself D. ordered; introduce himself
8. Ask him ________ come with us.
A. if he will B. if or not he will C. that if he will D. whether will he
9. Please tell me ________.
A. what would you like to do B. what you would like to do
C. you like to do what D. you like what to do
10. He asked me _______ with me.
A. what the matter is B. what the matter was
C. what’s the matter D. what was the matter
【三清—思维拓展】
III．完形填空
Do you know how many languages there are in the world? There are about 1500, but many of them are not considered very 1 . English is considered one of most important languages because many people 2 it, not only in England and America, 3 in other countries of the world. About 200 000 000 speak it 4 their own language, and another 230 000 000 use it as 5 language. It is 6 to say how many people are learning it. 7 Boys and girls in schools are trying to do so.
Many 8 children study French. French is also a very important language, 9 children study German, Russian, Japanese and Chinese.
Which is the best 10 to learn a language? We know that we all learnt 11 language well when we were 12 . If we learn a second language in the 13 way, it may not seem so difficult. What does a small child do? It 14 what people say, and it tries to guess what it hears. When it wants something, it has to 15 it. It is using the language, 16 and talking in it all of the time. If people use a second language 17 ,they will learn it 18 .
In school, you learn to read, to write ,to hear and to 19 .It is best to learn all new words through the 20 . You can read them, spell them and speak them later.
1. A. spoken B. happy C. important D. ideal
2. A. like B. use C. operate D. play
3. A. but B. and C. too D. so
4. A. like B. with C. for D. as
5. A. distant B. a second C. the second D. a special
6. A. easy B. again C. difficult D. best
7. A. Millions of B. Hundreds of C. Tens of D. Thousands of
8. A. Chinese B. Japanese C. English D. Asian
9. A. Some B. Thousands C. All D. Much
10. A. time B. way C. thing D.place
11. A. a foreign B. our mothers’ C. other’s D. our own
12. A. born B. children C. grown D. boys
13. A. same B. different C. useful D. good
14. A. talks B. wants C. cries D. follows
15. A. ask B. want C. get D. ask for
16. A. speaking B. writing C. thinking D. doing
17. A. some time B. sometimes C. all the time D. for the time
18. A. fluent B. confident C. freely D. easily
19. A. fight B. sing C. speak D. play
20. A. mouth B. hands C. ears D. eyes
Using the language
【一清--知识扫描】
I．单词拼写
1. Reading will increase your v________.
2. You can always tell the difference between the tourists and n________.
3. He comes form India and speaks English with a strong Indian a________.
4. The police are trying to discover the i________ of the killer.
5. Venice is a beautiful city full of c________ and history.
6. He made such r________ progress that his parents felt very honored.
7. The United Kingdom i________ Northern Ireland and Wales.
8. Every day, I have to use the e________ to go down to the street, because I live in a flat on the 21st floor.
9. John looked calm, but a________ he was very nervous.
10. Shanghai Cooperation Organisation is becoming an increasingly important i________ organization.
【二清—能力过关】
II．单选题
1. He asked ________ for the violin.
A.did I pay how much B. I paid how much
C. how much I pay D. how much I paid
2. The books, ________ the dictionaries, must be put back where they ________.
A. included; were B. to include; are C. including; were D.including; are
3. --Do you know where she comes from?
--Sorry, I don’t know, but her ________ suggests that she is from the North.
A. voice B. appearance C. accent D. sound
4. Although I wore a mask at the evening party, she could still ________ me only by eye-contact.
A. know B. realize C. notice D. recognize
5. If ________ necessary, I will go to see the doctor to make sure that my back is all right.
A. is B. it C. is it D.／
6. Alice didn’t want her parents to know ________
A. what has she done B. what was she doing
C. how she had done D. what she was doing
7. As soon as he comes back, I’ll tell him when ________ and see him.
A. you will come B. will you come C. you come D.do you come
8. Listen, what language ________?
A. did the two boys spead B. were the two boys speaking
C. are the two boys speaking D. have the two boys spoken
9. The general commanded that all the soldiers ________ at attention.
A. stand B. stood C. had stood D. would stand
10.Father told me ________ in public.
A. not to spit B. to not spit C. to spit not D. spit not to
【三清—思维拓展】
III．阅读
Each Indian tribe had a different language. Many Indians never learned any languages except their own. Do you know how Indians from different tribes talked to each other? They had two ways to talk without sound. One way was by sign language; another way by signals.
Sign language is a way of talking by using signs. Indians used sign language when they met strangers. In this way, they could find out whether the stranger was a friend or an enemy. In Indian sign language, signs were made with the hands. One sign meant “man”. Another meant “horse”. To tell the time of day when something happened, an Indian pointed to the sky. He showed where the sun had been at the time.
Indians usually used signals when they wanted to send messages to someone far away. To make signals, an Indian might use a pony(小型马). He might use a blanket. Or he might use smoke, a mirror or fire arrows.
To signal that he had seen many animals, an Indian rode his pony in a large circle. Sometimes the Indian gave a signal like this and then went away to hide. This meant that there was danger.
The blanket signal was visible from far away. An Indian held the corners of a blanket in his hands. Then he began to swing the blanket from side to side in front of him. An Indian could send many different signals with his blanket.
He could also send many signals with a mirror. He usually used the mirror to warn someone of danger. Of course, mirrors could be used only when the sun was shining. At night, Indians used fire arrows for signaling.
Now you can see that Indians didn’t need to learn each other’s language. They could talk to one another by using signals or sign language.
1. The story tells about .
A. people living in Indian
B. the Indians who had many kinds of languages
C. the Indians who didn’t use their languages
D. how Indians communicate between different tribes
2. Sign language is .
A. a language only for Indians
B. a way to express one’s ideas by making gestures
C. a way of taking by signing on paper
D. a secret way of talking to strangers
3. Which of the following is true?
A. When an Indian wanted to say “man”, he pointed to himself.
B. When an Indian wanted to say “horse”, he rode his horse.
C. When an Indian wanted to say “sun”, he pointed to the sky.
D. Indians used sign language to find out whether a stranger was a friend or an enemy.
4. Blanket signals .
A. could be seen at night
B. could be seen far away
C. were used only for warning
D. were considered the best way of sending messages
5. Indians didn’t need to learn each other’s language because .
A. they never met each other
B. they could use signals or sign language
C. they could write messages
D. they thought they could easily make themselves understood
IV．本单元相关主题写作
请你根据下面的提示，写一篇发言稿，说明学好英语的必要性。
英语的特点：活的语言， 在世界范围广泛使用。
学英语的目的：为了在工作和交往中使用。
怎样提高口语能力： 积极说，不怕错。创造环境多说英语。
体会： “有志者，事竟成”。只要坚持，就能学好。
要求：包括所有要点，不要逐句翻译。词数80左右。
【学业评价】必修２第１单元测试
I. Choose the best answers.
1. Few countries ________ the independence of that country.
A. admit B. receive C. realize D. recognize
2. Only ________ his direction can you settle the problem.
A. with B. in C. under D. to
3. The Chinese government ________ dicided to cooperation with the African country.
A. has B.have C. is D. are
4. Good teachers such as Mr Chen ________ always kind to students.
A. is B. are C. does D. do
5. The ________ at the meeting are all worried about the ________.
A. people present; present situation B. present people; present situation
C. people present; situation present D. present people; situation present
6. The patient was warned ________ oily food after the operation.
A. to eat not B. eating not C. not to eat D. not eating
7. Such good use has been ________ his spare time ________ his English has improved a lot.
A. made of; that B. made of ; as C. made in; that D. found in; as
8. --What is the language ________ in New Zealand?
--English. New Zealand is also an English ________ country.
A. spoken; speads B. speaking; spoken C. spoken; speaking D. spoken; spoken
9. I am afraid something urgent has come _______, so I won't be able to see you off tonight.
A. down B. up C. out D. over
10. In China, smokers have to face the reality that _______ people are dying of lung cancer.
A. a great number of B. a great deal of C. a good many of D. the number of
11. Some foreigners were headng in my ______.
A. way B. direction C. place D. side
12.George said _____ to meet the Canadian friends.
A. which he pleased B. he is pleased C. that he was pleased D. what he was pleased
13. Job adviser: Please don't make up information about yourself.
Tom: Pardon?
Job adviser: _______.
A. I said that you don't make up information about yourself
B. I advised you not to make up information about yourself
C. I ordered you not to make uo information about yourself
D. I thought you had made up information about yourself
14. _____ good command of English he _______!
A. What; is B. What a; has C. How; is D. How; has
15. -- Do you think it's going to rain over the weekend?
-- ________.
A. I don't believe B. I don't believe it C. I believe not so D. I believe not
II. Read the passage and then choose the best answer for each blank.
The whole family objected(反对)strongly when I said I was going to Europe over the Christmas holidays with a college friend of mine. Mother said that 1 there was going to be a family reunion(团聚)，I really ought to stay at home. Although I always enjoyed these occasions(场合), nobody could persuade me to 2 my mind.
A week before Christmas, my friend and I 3 to Madrid and then travelled by train through Spain, France and Germany. On Christmas Eve we arrived 4 a small town in southern Germany and were greatly 5 to find so much activity in the town. The streets were crowded with people, and the shop were full of all kinds of interesting things. We walked around for hours and just before the midnight we went to listen to Christmas 6 sung by children around the 7 lighted tree in the main square. We returned to our 8 late that night, looking forward to the next day when we planned to have Christmas dinner at the best 9 in the town.
However, in the morning 10 people were to be seen in the street. To make the matter 11 , every shop was 12 up tight(紧紧地), even the restaurants. We searched uselessly for hours and 13 had to return to our hotel feeling unhappy and 14 . Our Christmas meal was a bag of fruit that my friend had happened to buy the day before. Our thought sadly turned to home. At that moment, our families must have been 15 us “Merry Christmas”!
1. A. once B. since C. while D. unless
2. A. accept B. advise C. change D. make
3. A. walked B. ran C. flew D. swam
4. A. in B. at C. to D. for
5. A. moved B. surprised C. encouraged D. interested
6. A. records B. songs C. dances D. radios
7. A. brightly B. heavily C. sadly D. happily
8. A. street B. home C. hotel D. house
9. A. house B. shop C. office D. restaurant
10. A. many B. no C. some D. other
11. A. better B. worse C. bigger D. easier
12. A. filled B. opened C. closed D. made
13. A. in fact B. really C. soon D. finally
14. A. lonely B. funny C. friendly D. worried
15. A. telling B. wishing C. shouting D. crying
III. Read the passages and then choose the best answers.
第一节：阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项，并在答题纸上将该选项标号涂黑。
A
In the US, people prefer waiting for a table to sitting with people they don’t know. This means a hostess may not seat a small group until a small table is available, even if a large one is. If you are sitting at a table with people you don’t know, it is impolite to light up a cigarette first asking if it will disturb them.
At American restaurants and coffee shops you are usually served tap water before you order. You may find the bread and butter is free, and if you order coffee, you may get a free refill.
Most cities and towns have no rules about opening and closing time for stores or restaurants, though they usually do make rules for bars. Especially in large cities, stores may be open 24 hours a day.
Serving in restaurants is often large; too large for many people. If you can’t finish your meal but would like to enjoy the food later, ask your waitress or waiter for a “doggie bag”. It may have a picture of a dog on it, but everybody knows you’re taking the food for yourself.
Supper and dinner are both words for the evening meal. Some people have “Sunday dinner”. This is an especially big noon meal.
Tips are not usually added to the check. They are not included in the price of the meal, either. A tip of about 15% is expected and you should leave it on the table when you leave. In some restaurants, a check is brought on a plate and you put your money there. Then the waiter or waitress brings you your change.
1. Which statement is TRUE?
A. American people like sitting with people they don’t know.
B. Hostess always seats a small group at a large table.
C. American people never sit with people they don’t know.
D. American people would not light a cigarette if the people who sit at the same table mind their smoking.
2. What is served before you order?
A. Bread. B. Butter.
C. Coffee. D. Cold water.
3. What do American people always do when servings are too large for them?
A. They take the food home with a doggie bag for their dogs.
B. They leave the food on the table and go away.
C. They take the food home with a doggie bag and enjoy the food later.
D. They ask the waitress or waiter to keep the food for them.
B
If you ask people to name one person who had the greastest effect on the English language, you will get answers like “Shakespeare”, “Samuel John,” and “Webster”, but none of these men had any effect at all compares to a man who didn’t even speak English---William the Conqueror.
Before 1066, in the land we now call Great Britain lived peoples belonging to two major language groups. In the west-central region lived the Welsh, who spoke a Celtic language, and in the north lived the Scots, whose language, though not the same as Welsh, was also Celtic. In the rest of the country lived the Saxons, actually a mixture of Anglos, Saxons and other Germanic and Nordic peoples, who spoke what we now call Anglo-Saxon (or Old English), a Germanic language. If this state of affairs had lasted, English today would be close to German.
But this state of affairs did not last. In 1066 the Normans led by William defeated the Saxons and began their rule over England. For about a century, French became the official language of England while Old English became the language of peasants. As a result, English words of politics and the law come from French rather than German. In some cases, modern English even shows a distinction(区别) between upper-class French and lower-class Anglo-Saxon in its words. We even have different words for some foods, meat in particular, depending on whether it is still out in the fields or at home ready to be cooked, which shows the fact that the Saxon peasants were doing the farming, while the upper-class Normans were doing most of the eating.
When Americans visit Europe for the first time, they usually find German more “foreign” than France because the German they see on sighs and advertisements seems much more different from English than French does. Few realize that English language is actually Germanic in its beginning and that French influences are all the result of one man’s ambition.
4. The two major languages spoken in what is now called Great Britain before 1066 were________.
A. Welsh and Scottish B. Nordic and Germanic
C. Celtic and Old English D. Anglo-Saxon and Germanic
5. Why does France appear less foreign than Germany to Americans on their first visit to Europe?
A. Most advertisements in France appear in English.
B. They know little of the history of the English language.
C. Many French words are similar to English ones.
D. They know French better than German.
6. What is the subject discussed in the text?
A. The history of Great Britain.
B. The similarity between English and French.
C. The rule of England by William the Conqueror.
D. The French influences on the English language.
C
Happy birthday
The China National Opera(CNO) will give a concert to celebrate its 50th birthday.
Different generations of CNO vocalists(声乐家), like Li Guangxi, Yao Hong and Ma Mei, will present the concert which will feature both songs from famous operas like “The White-haired Girl” and “The Hundredth Bride”, as well as arias(独唱曲) of such Western opera classics as “Madame Butterfly”, “La Traviata” and “Rigoletto”.
Time/Date:7:30pm, September 7,8
Location: Tianqiao Theatre
Tel:65514787,83156170
Tickets:60～500 yuan(US $7.3～60.2)
Folk music
A concert will be held to feature some recently-composed traditional Chinese music works.
The concert, given by the Folk Orchestra of China Opera and Ballet Theatre, will include such pieces as “Memory of Childhood”, “Memorial Ceremony for God ” and “Wine Song”.
Time/Date:7:30pm, September 13
Location: Concert Hall at the National Library of China
Tel:68485462, 68419220
Tickets:30～200 yuan(US $ 3.6～24.1)
Moon music
A concert of traditional Chinese music will be given on the eve of the Moon Festival which falls on September 21 this year.
The concert will featyre a number of famous pieces centered on the theme of the moon, such as “Moonlight”, “Spring Night on a Moonlit River” and “Lofty Mountain and Flowing River”.
A number of established traditional Chinese music performers, like Zhou Yaokun and Fan Weiqing, will play solos as well as collaborate(合作) with the folk music orchestra.
Time/Date:7:30pm, September 20
Location: Grand Theatre of the Cultural Palace of Nationalities
Tel :66068888, 66069999
7. If you want to buy tickets for listening to the music “Memory of Childhood”, you will dial .
A. 65514787 B. 68485462
C. 83156170 D. 66069999
8. Which statement is TRUE according to the passage?
A. Li Guangxi, Yao Hong and Ma Mei stand for the same generation of CNO vocalists.
B. “Rigoletto” is a famous piece on the theme of the moon.
C. “Lofty Mountain and Flowing River” is a traditional Chinese music.
D. Zhou Yaokun will play solos and Fan Weiqing will collaborate with the folk music orchestra.
9. “Madame Butterfly” is .
A. a Chinese opera B. a Western opera
C. a piece of music D. a song
D
Once an Englishman named Jack Brown went to Russia for a holiday. He stayed there for several months and then came home again. Some of his friends visited him a few days after he got back. “I had a very dangerous trip while I was in Russia,” Jack said to them. “I wanted to see a friend of mine in the country and bad weather made me very late. So I was still traveling through a forest in a sleigh(雪橇) when the sun went down. It was a long way from my friend’s house when about twenty wolves began to follow my sleigh. It was very dark in the forest. There was thick snow on the ground. It was cold, and there were no houses for miles and miles. First I heard the wolves. The noise was terrible! The horses heard them, too. They were frightened and began running faster. Then I saw long, gray forms among the trees, and soon the wolves were near us. They were running very fast, and they didn’t seem to get tired like the horses.”
“What did you do?” one of Jack’ friends asked.
“When the wolves got very near,” Jack answered, “I put out my gun and shot the first wolf. The sleigh was moving about, but I hit the animal and killed it. Then all the other wolves stopped and ate it, so our sleigh got away from them for a few minutes.”
“Then they finished their meal, and I heard them coming again. The moon was shining brightly on the snow now, and after a few minutes I saw them running among the trees once more. They came nearer again, and then I shot another of them, and the others stopped once more to eat it.”
“The same thing happened again and again, and my horses became more and more tired and ran slower and slower until, after about two hours, only one wolf was still alive and following us.”
“Wasn’t it too fat to run?” one of his friends asked.
10. In the sentence “They finished their meal”, “meal” here means______.
A. the food Jack had brought with him
B. the meal prepared by Jack’s friend
C. the wolf which had been killed by Jack
D. the dead animals on the way
11. According to what Jack said, the last wolf_______.
A. was the strongest of all
B. ran much faster than the other wolves
C. had eaten many wolves
D. was very fat and didn’t run fast enough
12. From what Jack’s friend said we know that_______.
A. all the wolves had been shot by Jack
B. the last wolf was too fat to run
C. the friend did not believe what Jack had said
D. Jack was telling the truth
第二节：下面是一次民意测试结果,分析一年多来英国人对伊拉克战争的支持率的变化情况。根据文章内容，从A.B.C.D.E.F六个选项中选出正确的选项完成表格。选项可以重复使用;有多余选项.
Support in Britain for the Iraq war has fallen to a record low, although about three fifths of interviewees believe Iraqi elections will take place as planned on Jan.30, according to a poll issued by The Times newspaper Wednesday.
The poll showed that fewer than 29% now believe that the war was the right thing to do, compared to 53% who think it was wrong.
British support for the war peaked at 64% in April 2003 and has been on a steady decline over the past 18 months, contributing to a big fall in British Prime Minister Tony Blair's personal approval ratings.
It is also for the first time that more Labor voters think that the war was the wrong rather than the right thing to do, by 44% to 37%, the poll suggested.
However, nearly 58% believe that the elections will go ahead and fewer than 29% believe that it will postpone.
A random sample a 1,506 adults aged over 18 was interviewed by telephone over the weekend for this poll.
British Attitude to the Iraq War
At present
In April, 2003
Rise or fall
%
Rise or fall
%
For the war
↓
13.____
For the war
16.____
64%
Against the war
14.____
15.____
Against the war
↓
17.___
A.53% B.29% C.unknown D. 37% E. ↓ F. ↑
第二卷
IV.Complete the following sentences with the correct forms of the words.
1. Car ________ is predicted to increase every year. (use)
2. The children are taught to respect ________ differences between different countries. (culture)
3. It’s ________ to speak with food in mouth. (polite)
4. The street is too narrow. It does not allow cars from opposite ________ to pass. (direct)
5. She changed a lot and I had great difficulty ________ her at first.(recognize)
V．Choose the proper expressions from the box for the blanks, using the right forms.
because of make a list of play the part of believe it or not
such as base on communicate with play a part of
1. Please____________things before shopping.
2. We are used to ________________ each other by e-mail nowadays.
3. I ____________ a policeman in that play.
4. The report ____________ figures from six different European cities.
5. It’s so nice to hear from her. ____________, we last met more than thirty years ago.
VI. Complete the following sentences.
1.1919年，许多青年学生参加了五四运动。
In 1919, ________ ________ ________ of young students joined in the May 4th Movement.
2.他喜欢体育运动,如踢足球和打篮球.
He enjoys sports _______ _______ playing footballand basketball.
3. 信不信由你,(世界上)没有什么标准英语.
_______ _______ _______ _______, there is no such thing as standard English.
4. 中国国家足球队能否进入世界杯决赛.这只好由时间回答了.
Will China's national football team enter for the finals of the World Cup?_______ _______ _______ _______ .
5.你可以经常和外国人说话来锻炼口语,然后你就可以和世界各地的人交流了.
You can practice your spoken English more often with a native speaker, and then you can _______ _______ people around the world.
VII. Write an English composition in about 100 words according to the instructions given.
假设你叫王小英,现在在英国工作,你的朋友陈立写信告诉你他打算赴英留学,想知道如何提高他的英语水平.请你用英语给他写一封回信,欣的内容应包括:
1.可能会遇到的困难:语言方面的障碍,饮食的不习惯,想家孤独等;
2.鼓励他并表示愿意帮助他.
注意:信的开头已为你写好,不计入总词数
Dear Chen Li,
I'm glad to hear from you. You asked me about the difficulties you may meet with when you get here in the UK.
Unit 2 English Around the World
Exercises for warming up and reading
I．构词法
cultural; acurally; eastern ; impolite; identify; usage; direct; ruler
II．选词填空
rapidly; identity; blocked; recognized; directions; requested; natives; standard
III．单选题
ABBDA BBBC
IV．阅读
CCDD
Exercise for reading
I．词组翻译
play a role in; because of ; such as; come up; bese on ; one another; increase rapidly; communicate with ; be different from; make use of ; standard English; believe it or not ; play a part in
II．翻译句子
is based on; because of; came up to; plays an important role/part; different from; make use of; even if/though; In the 1960s
III．课文改编完型
16th; million; present; first; second; foreign; difference; native; communicate ;from; South; number; increasing
IV．阅读
FFFTT
Learning about language
I．词型变化
presented; present; requested; request; standard; standard; native; native; command; command
II．单选题
DAAAA DBABD
III．完形填空
CBADB CACAB DBADD CCDCC
Using the language
I．单词拼写
vocabulary; natives; accent; identity; culture; rapid; includes;elevator; actually; international
II．单选题
DDCDD DACAA
III．阅读
DBDBB
IV．本单元相关主题写作
English is a living language and is widely used all over the world. More and more people begin to learn English in order ot be able to use it freely at work and communicate with people from other countries.
It is not easy for us to learn English well. But if we make every effort to speak it and use it, we can learn it well. We should be active in speaking more English and answer the questions in English in class. After class we’d better talk to our classmates in English.
As the old saying goes: “Where there is a will, there is a way”. As long as we study hard, we can speak it well and use it freely.
【学业评价】必修２第１单元测试
I. Choose the best answers.
DCAAA CBCBA BCBBD
II. Read the passage and then choose the best answer for each blank.
BCCBB BACDB BCDAB
III. Read the passages and then choose the best answers.
第一节： DDC CCD BCB CCC
第二节：BFAFC
第二卷
IV.Complete the following sentences with the correct forms of the words.
usage; cultural; impolite; direction; recognizing
V．Choose the proper expressions from the box for the blanks, using the right forms.
make a list of; communicating with ; played the part of ; is based on; Believe it or not ;
VI. Complete the following sentences.
a great number ; such as; Believe it or not; only time will tell; communicate with
VII. Write an English composition in about 100 words according to the instructions given.
Dear Chen Li,
I'm glad to hear from you. You asked me about the difficulties you may meet with when you get here in the UK. Now, I'd like to tell you something about it.
First, you may have the problem about the language you think you are well prepared. You may find it difficult to communicate with the natives, because many of them have a strong accent. Besides, you may not get used to the western food here or even hate to have it. What's more, you may feel lonely and misss your family and friends, especially inthe very beginning.
However, you needn't worry about it. Several weeks later, you will get used to everything here and love the place, and I'll also try my best to help you when necessay.
Best wishes!
Yours,
Wang Xiaoying
课件41张PPT。Language data bank
Language points for Reading I.
2. Language points for Reading II.
Language points for reading Ibackbecause of 因为，由于 …
voyage 航行，航海
native 本国的，本土的
come up （to) 到…(去） actually 实际上，事实上
base 以…基础
at present 目前
gradually 逐渐地
rule 统治
Danish 丹麦语
vocabulary 词汇make use of 利用 …
spelling 拼写
latter 后者
identity 身份
fluent 流利 的
Singapore 新加坡
Malaysia 马来西亚
such as 比如 Do you know that there is more than one kind of English in the world?
你知道世界上不止有一种英语吗？◆more than one +名词单数, 后面的谓语动词用单数。Eg. ______________（不止一个学生想）to go to swim.More than one student wants◆more than 还可以与名词、形容词、副词、动词、动名词连用，意为 “不只是，非常”Eg.他们俩远不只是同学, 他们是知心朋友。
Both of them are______________________. They are______________.much more than schoolmatesclose friends…and because of that, English began to be spoken in many other countries. because of (复合介词) + 名/代/宾从
We have made such great progress because of
your help.
She didn’t come to the party because of what you had said.
The football match was put off because of the rain.
because (连词)+ 原因状语从句
I was worried because Mary was late.
He couldn’t walk as fast as the others, because his leg was injured.He realized she was crying_______ what he had said.
A. because B. because of
C. as D. sinceBToday, more people speak English as their first, second, or foreign language than ever before.
today / yesterday / tomorrow
Than ever before “比以往任何时候”
The science of tomorrow.
It’s colder than ever before.
lily study harder than ever before.
ever since 从那以后
as ever as one can 尽可能
for ever 永远Native English speakers can understand each other even if they don’t speak the same kind of English.
native adj. 本国的, 本地的
They are native people.
Taisan is my native place.
She returned to her native land.be native to “动植物---特有的’
This is a plant native to the eastern US.
be native of “出生在---的人/ 原产于---的”
The panda is a native of West China.even if= (even though)是连词词组， 用来引导让步状语从句，意为 “尽管；即使” (=though, although)Eg. 尽管他很忙，他还是愿意帮我们。
即使今天下雨，我也要回家，因为我很长时间没有回家了。He likes to help us even though he is very busy.__________,I will go home because__________Even if it is raining todayI haven’t been home for a long time.e.g.
He likes to help us ________________he is very busy.
_________we have learned “even though”, we still find it difficult to use.
He will not let out the secret ________he knows it.
We won’t give up _________ we should fail 10 times.
A. even if B. since C. whether D. untilAeven thoughEven ifeven ifYes. I’d like to come up to your apartment.come up
1 (人)走近;上来
2 (of the sun) to rise
3 引起注意
4 (指意想不到地)发生 to occur; arise
5 出席, 参加
6 (of plants) to appear above the soil
come out 出现; 结果; 出版 /
come to 达到; 谈到 I'll be late home--something's just come ___ at work.
A. about B. up
C. out D. overBSo why has English changed over time?那么， 英语在一段时间里为什么会起变化呢？Over :贯穿， 经过（一段时间）e.g Over the years, he has become more patient.经过这些年， 他边得更有耐心e.g 周末她会来杭州。She will come to Hangzhou over the weekend.e.g圣诞节时你在家吗？Will you stay at home over Christmas?over 超过(=more than)， 再三 (again)
over 2 minutes over and overActually all languages change and develop when cultures meet and communicate with each other.
actually = in fact
communicate vi.
It’s necessary that young and old people should communicate with each other.It was based more on German than the English we speak at present.(1) base on / upon… 以…为基础(be based on)
这部电影以事实为基础。
__________________________
(2) present (adj.) 目前的, 现在的
你应该看清楚当前形势。
________________________________________This movie is based on facts.You should look clearly the present situation.e.g 他出席了昨天的会议。
_______________________He was present at the meeting yesterday.He bought me a computer as my birthday present.present n. 礼物present adj.出席的，到场的，出现的at present(=at the present time)目前
in the present situation 在目前形势下
be present at … 出席…，在场present v.给，提出，展现，显现
present sb. with sth.或present sth. to sb.
把…交给,颁发,授予
Eg. On his birthday,his friends________
(送给他一套读本)presented him with a series of readers.
presented a series of readers to him.present adj.目前的, 现在的;出席的，到场的，出现的
n. 礼物
v. 给，提出，展现，显现…because those who ruled England
spoke first Danish and later French.
rule n. 规则，统治
v. 支配，统治
He does everything by rule.
He makes it a rule to walk a half hour
before breakfast
The queen ruled the country.
His reason ruled him anger.
Danish n. 丹麦文
adj. 丹麦的，丹麦人的，丹麦文的Eg.我们应该充分利用好我们的资源。
_________________________________.
每一分钟都应该很好地利用。
______________________________________We should make good use of our resourcesEvery minute should be made good use of. Shakespeare made use of a wider
vocabulary than ever before.
莎士比亚使用了比以前更为广泛的词汇量。
◆make use of 利用，使用
◆ make good / full use of
充分使用，很好地利用
◆make no use of sth. 没有利用许多人已经来了。无家可归的人的数量在上升。◆ the number of …的数目
（其后谓语动词用单数）
The number of homeless people has increased. India has a very large number of fluent English speakers….. 印度有很多能讲流利英语的人….。
◆ a number of 大量的（后接可数名词复数）
（其后谓语动词用复数）
A number of people have came.The number of people invited ________ fifty,
but a number of them ________absent for
different reasons.
were ; was B. was ; was
C. was ; were D. were ; wereCAs a result of destroying the forest, a large______
of the desert______ covered the land.
A. number; has B. quantity; has
C. number; have D. quantity; haveBsuch as / for example 都是用于例举事物
such as 放中间, 但不等于总和(部分例举)
He knows several languages, such as
English, French and German.
that is / namely (全举)
for example (例举同类中的一个)
Some students, for example, John, didn’t
finish homework.Some English programs, _____ English on Sunday, Follow Me, are very helpful to us.
A. for example
B. according to
C. such as
D. because of
Noise, ____, is a kind of pollution.
A. such as
B. take for example
C. like
D. for exampleCDrapidly
rapid adj.
quickly / fast / rapidly
*动作敏捷,毫不迟疑
*运动着的人或物体的速度
*一个一串动作迅速,敏捷,着重动动本身
She dressed _______and went out.
The train’s running five minutes______.
Do you understand the _______changing world of computer technologyquickly fastrapidlyrequest (for sth. / that) 请求;要求
request sth. (from / of sb.)
request sb. to do sth.
Your request will be granted.
We received many requests for the book.
I request him to help me.
I requested that he (should) come
an hour earlier.
ask / beg / requestOur English teacher requested that the homework ______ tomorrow morning.
A would be handed in
B be handed in
C hand in
D must be handed in
Tony is going camping with _____ boys.
A little two other
B two little other
C two other little
D little other twoBDIn the end the tennis champion's greater experience began to ____ , and he won easily in the end.
A. talk B. speak
C. say D. tell
The beauty of Hangzhou is ____ words can describe.
A. more
B. more than
C. no more than
D. containedDBThe boy became upset and cried for help. However the man told him that if he stood still he would be safe. The bear moved away. The man told the boy relax as the danger was over.Language points for Reading IIback1. standard
n.&adj.标准，规格；标准的，规格的
phrases: come up to the standard
meet standards
set a standard
standard of living
by international standards
from the standards
on a standard
a car of standard size
a standard composer2.expect
Vt.(理所当然)期望，预料，认为，预期
usage: expect sb to do sth
expect +that-clause
expect sth
expect to do sthI expect so. 我想是这样。I expect not. I don’t expect so.我想不是这样。expect & wait for
expect 主要指心理状态（a state of mind），含有期盼的意味。
wait for 则指另一种行动（a sort of activity），特别指什么都不干而专门等待。3.specially & especially
adv.尤其，特别地（可缩写为esp.）
specially: 指为某一特殊目的而专门采用的某一个方式。
especially:指有意突出到显眼或例外的程度，表达某事不寻常，过分或特别重要。4. eastern
adj. 南方的，南部的；东方的，东部的
eastern一类的词与east一类的词辨析
专有名词，尤其是所表示的地方具有明确的固定范围的专有名词，特别是政治区分，一般用east。普通名词和所指的地方没有明确的固定范围的专有名词多用eastern。
east 重点在形容方位或从哪个方向来的；而eastern则指从某一固定的地方看某一个方向，或指某物来自何方或某地朝哪个方向。5.recognize
Vt.辨认出来，承认，公认
phrases: recognize one’s voice
recognize sb to be ……被承认为……
be recognized to be……
recognize that……
注意：recognize是一个终止性动词。是指原来很熟悉，经过一段时间的间隔或别的原因后又重新认出来。Sentence patterns1.believe it or not ,……
e.g.. Believe it or not, there is no such a thing as standard English .
在应用such，so（如此）时应特别注意，如果作定语的词是no ，all，most，some，any，another，many，much，a few，few，little，a little，several，one.等词语的时候，应用such，such应放置于这些词之后；若为其他形容词，such 则应该放置于这些词之前。如果修饰名词的形容词是many，much，few，little时，不能用such，而要用so，且so 要置于这些词之前。2.play a part in
1>be involved in an activity. 参加某活动.
e.g. She plays an active part in local politics.
2>make a contribution to sth; have a share in sth. 对某事起作用，有贡献；参与
e.g. She played a major part I the success of the scheme.
We all have a part to play in the fight against crime. 3>be related with; have effect on sth. 与某事有关，对某事有影响
e.g. Geography also plays a part in making dialects.1 subway
2 elevator
3 petrol
4 official
5 voyage
6 conquer
7 native
8 come up
9 because of
10 apartment
11 actually
12 at present13 gradual
14 enrich
15 vocabulary
16 make use of
17 spelling
18 latter
19 identity
20 fluent
21 frequent
22 usage
23 command
24 request25 dialect
26 expression
27 midwestern
28 African
29 Spanish
30 play a role (in)
31 recognize
32 accent
33 lightning
34 stright
35 block
36 cabback课件36张PPT。Learning about language because of 因为，由于 …
voyage 航行，航海
native 本国的，本土的
come up （to) 到…(去） actually 实际上，事实上
base 以…基础
at present 目前
gradually 逐渐地
rule 统治
Danish 丹麦语
vocabulary 词汇Reviewmake use of 利用 …
spelling 拼写
latter 后者
identity 身份
fluent 流利 的
Singapore 新加坡
Malaysia 马来西亚
such as 比如 1.petrol
2.voyage
3.gradually
4.frequently
5.identity
6.the latter
7.actually
8.fluentwho or what somebody or something is
a word for gas in British English .
not sudden
in fact
the second of two things or people already mentioned
often
long trip by sea or in space
able to speak or write a language well
Match the new words and expressions with their meanings1It is not easy for a Chinese person to speak English as________ as a ________ English speaker. One reason is that English has a large _________. It also has different usage in different English speaking countries. If you say “flat" instead of “_________”, people in America will know you have learned British English. If you use the word _______ instead of “lift" in Britain, people will know you have studied American English.Complete this passage with the words from the warming up and Reading.vocabularyapartmentelevatorfluentlynative2Add these phrase to the rhyme so that it makes sense.such as make use of because of come up at present“Will you____________ to my flat?” asked the spider to the fly. “____________ it’s so pleasant to look down from so high. ____________ the clear sky it’s possible to see Buildings ___________ theatres and hotels by the sea. So won’t you please ___________ this chance to look?” The fly agreed immediately without a second thought. But as soon as she went up with a step so light that day, The spider caught and ate her and she was seen again!come upAt presentBecause ofsuch asmake use of3Sometimes British and American people use different prepositions for the same idea. Choose a pair of prepositions. Then compare them.at/on past/after in/on from/thanThere are so many people ________ the street.
They are going to a party ________the weekend.
We will leave for the airport at a quarter ________five.in/onpast/afterat/on4His brother is _______ the most famous
football team in England.
5.As we know, British English is a little
different __________American English.
6.Are there many children playing ______
the playground?in/onfrom/thanin/onRequests and CommandsDirect speechRequests: Do ... , please.
Can you... ?
Could you ... ?
Will you ... ?
Would you ... ? Commands: Do ...
Don’t ...Indirect speech Requests: A asked B to do sth.
A asked B not to do sth.Commands: A told/ordered B to do sth.
A told/ordered B not to do sth.Can you find the following command and request from Reading ? Let’s see how to retell them in indirect speech.EXAMPLES“Look at this example,” the teacher said to us.
The teacher told us to look at that example.
“Would you like to see my flat?” she asked.
She asked me to see her flat.1Rules and practice of direct and indirect speech 当直接引语为祈使句时，转换为间接引语要用一个带动词不定式的简单句表示： 祈使句 直引：主语+动词+“祈使句”
间引：主语+动词+to Verb
e．g． The teacher said to me, “Come in .”
---The teacher told me to go in 。
John said to me , “Please shut the window。”
---John asked me to shut the window。
The teacher said to me, “ Don’t be late again.”
---The teacher advised me not to be late again. 特别提醒 1.祈使句变为间接引语，主要使用动词不定式。
2.谓语动词要做一定变化。
表示命令，用tell，order，command等。
表示请求，用ask，beg，request等。
表示忠告，用 advise。 Open the window.Direct speechIndirect speechMiss Hu told ** to
open the window.Will you please
open the window?Miss Hu asked ** to
open the window.toldtoaskedtoDon’t open
the window.Miss Hu told ** not
to open the window.not“Write a letter to your parents.”
“Don’t play games in the classroom.”
“Can you pass on the book to Tom?”
“Will you please not smoke here?”The teacher told me to write a letter ….The teacher ordered me not to play games ….The teacher asked me to pass on …The teacher asked me not to smoke there.Try to do this:“It is a fine day. Let’s go to the country for a picnic.” Peter said to me.Peter said that it was a fine day and
asked me to go to the country for a
picnic with him.Peter told me that it was a fine
day and let us go to the country
for a picnic.? 感叹句 直引：主语+动词+“感叹句”
间引：主语+动词+陈述句
e.g. He said, “ what a fine day it is !”
He said , “ How fine the day is !”
He said what a fine day it was .
He said how fine the day was .
He exclaimed that it was a fine day. 特别提醒1. 间接感叹句的动词应该是cry 或exclaim 。
2. 可以仍用what，how 等词，语序不变，也可以用that 从句，把动词 say 改为cry，shout，exclaim 等。 1.He said to Tom, “Don’t do the work any more.”He told Tom not to do the work any more.Practice2.Mrs. Green said, “Please sing us a song, Miss White.”
3. “Be quiet, children.” said Mrs. Wilson.Mrs. Green asked Miss White to sing them a song.Mrs. Wilson told the children to be quiet. 4. All the people cried, “What magnificent
clothes these are!”All the people cried what magnificent clothes these were.Summary of Requests and CommandsLend me your book, please.
Open the door, please. Could you help me with my work?
Would you please come back on time?
Will you go there with me?Give me your money.
Do it again.“Come
here quickly”.
“Get up
early”. She told me
to go there
quickly.
She told me
to get up
early.“A asked B not to do something”
“A told B not to do something.” “Will you lend me some money?”
“Close the windows, please”.She asked me to lend her some money.
She asked me to close the windows.“A asked B not to do something.”
“A told B not to do something.” In English you use a command or a request when you want someone to do something. Please look at the three sentences and tell the difference.CommandRequestNot politeVery politeOpen the windowPlease open the window.Would you please open the window?2Look at these expressions and classify them into Commands and Requests.Correct your spelling mistakes.
Please ….
Can I sit here and wait for the doctor?
How do you spell that please?
Go and …!
Would you please …?Do that now!
Can I please?
Hold that elevator!
Say that again!
Would you please speak more slowly?
Could you repeat the sentence?
Go and buy some more petrol!
Take the dog for a walk!Read these sentences and decide which is a command and which is a request.
Then retell them in indirect speech.The children said to their teacher: “Would you please sing a song for us?”
The mother said to her child: “Turn off the radio!”
The dentist said to a patient: “Open your mouth please, so I can see the bad tooth clearly.”RCRThe children asked their teacher to sing a song for them.The mother told her child to turn off the radio.The dentist asked his/her patient to open his/her mouth so that he/she could see the bad tooth clearly.3The secretary said to the woman on the phone: “Could you hold on for a minute?”
John said to his classmate: “Can I borrow your pen please?”
The teacher said to his student: “Come up to my office! ”RRCThe secretary asked the woman on the phone to hold on for a minute or two.John asked his classmate if he could borrow his penThe teacher told his/her student to come up to his/her officeMake some dialogues using commands and requests and retell them in indirect speech.A bear is moving towards a boy. What do you say to the boy to make sure that he is not hurt?
An English teacher is telling her students what they must do for homework. A student cannot hear the teacher very clearly. What should he say to his classmate to find out what to do?4S1: Stand still! Don’t move!
S2: What’s the matter?
S1: Don’t get excited but there’s a bear behind you!
S2: Oh help! What should I do?
S1: Stay still and the bear will move away. Yes, he’s doing that. It’s OK. You can relax now!Simple dialogue for situation oneA man saw a bear coming towards a boy. He wanted the boy to stand still and not move. The boy was puzzled and wondered what was wrong. The man told him that a bear was coming up behind him but that he was not to get excited. Situation one in indirect speechT: Now listen to me. This is your homework for tonight. I would be grateful if you brought it to me as first thing tomorrow morning.
S1: What’s that she said? Please help me. I couldn’t hear her properly.
S2: The teacher said that this was our homework and we must finish by tomorrow morning.
S1: Thank you. I couldn’t have managed without your help.Simple dialogue for situation twoThe teacher gave the class some homework and asked them to give it to her the following morning. One boy said he could not hear her clearly and asked his classmate to tell him what she had said. The classmate repeated the teacher’s instructions and the boy was grateful to him.Situation one in indirect speech
We won’t give up _______ we should fail 10 times.
A. even if B. since C. whether D. until
2. — I don’t have any change with me. Will you pay the fare for me?
---- ________ .
A. That’s fine B. Nothing serious
C. Never mind D. No problem
3. ---- Do you mind if I keep pets in this building?
---- _______ .
A. I’d rather you didn’t, actually
B. Of course not, it’s not allowed here
C. Great! I love pets D. No, you can’t
高考链接：4. The teacher asked us ____ so much noise.
A. don’t make B. not make
C. not making D. not to make
5. Visitors ____ not to touch the exhibits.
A. will request B. request
C. are requesting D. are requestedAssignment1. Try to remember the rules of direct and indirect speech.
2. Finish the exercises on WB.
3. Prepare for the next class. 课件26张PPT。Using languageUnit 2back?How many dialects are there in China ?dialects family in China 北方方言吴语闽南语客家话湘语赣语粤语Chinesedialects in
Guangdong province粤方言客方言闽方言代表地区
梅州地区
广州代表代表地区
潮汕地区English dialects in different countriesBritainThe U.S.ACanadaAustraliaIndiaNew ZealandWarming upDo you think there are some dialects in English?Fast reading Read the text on page 13 for 1 minute and answer the following question.
Is there standard English?Skim the passage for main idea of each paragraph.Paragraph 1.Believe it or not,there is no such thing as standard English.Paragraph 2.American English has many dialects.Paragraph 3.Geography also plays a part in making dialects.Detailed Reading Read the text for 3 minutes and answer the following question.
1.How many dialects of American English have been listed in the text?
2.Why do people from both Northeastern and Southeastern of U.S. speak with almost the same dialect? And what kind of dialect is it?
3.Why are there so many dialect in American English?1.How many dialects of American English have been listed in the text?
midwestern, southern, African American, Spanish2.Why do people from both Northeastern and Southeastern of U.S. speak with almost the same dialect?
Because when Americans moved from one place to anther, they took their dialects with them.3.Why are there so many dialect in American English?
That’s because people come from all over the world. And geography plays a part in making dialects.Read the passage again and try to find out important or difficult sentences.1.Believe it or not,there is no such thing as standard English.
2.Geography also plays a part in making dialects.
3.Although many Americans move a lot,they still recognize and understand each other’s dialects.backListeningBefore you listen, look at the picture below and read the exercises. In doing so, you can get some idea about the listening and predict the content. Discuss your ideas with your partner.1Imagine that you are in Houston, Texas, a city in the American South. This is an example of the local dialect. Listen and read through the text and take note of the accent and intonation.Listen again and put these sentences in the right sequence.
_______Lester climbed a tree.
_______Buford, Billy Bob and Lester went swimming.
_______Lester thought the catfish would eat him.
_______Buford and Billy Bob laughed.
_______Lester saw a catfish.
_______Now Lester is too afraid to visit the place.12345623Answer the following questions after listening.1. What does Buford think of Texas? How do you know?
2. How large was the catfish?
3. How did Lester get out of the water so quickly?
4. Why did Buford and Big Billy Bob laugh?
He believes it’s almost a different country from the USA. The listening text tells us.The boys thought that the catfish was almost the size of house.He thought the catfish would eat him.They laughed because Lester believed the catfish would hurt him.4Speaking and WritingReading and speakingRead the dialogue and circle the words that mean the same.AMY: Excuse me, ma’am. Could you please tell me where the nearest subway is?
LADY: Er … the underground? Well, go round the corner on your left-hand side, straight on and cross two streets. It’ll be on your right-hand side.1AMY: Thanks so much.
FRIENDS: What did she say, Amy?
AMY: She told us to go around the corner on the left and keep going straight for two blocks. The subway will be on our right.Amy (American)Lady (British)subway
left
keep going straight
two blocks
rightunderground
left-hand side
go straight on
two streets
right-hand sideWork in pairs. Choose one of the situations and make a dialogue. Use the following expressions to help you. Pay attention to the intonation you use while talking.2Pardon?
I beg your pardon?
I don’t understand.
How do you spell that?
Could you say that again please?
Could you speak more slowly please?
Sorry, I can’t follow you!
Could you repeat that please?You and your friend are American. You have arrived in a strange city in England to watch a football match. You need to find a cab/taxi to take you to the football ground.
You and your friend are British. You are visiting America. Your car needs some more petrol but you cannot find a petrol station. Ask directions to the nearest one.Sample dialogue for situation 2:S1: Excuse me sir. Could you tell me where the nearest petrol station is?
S2: You mean gas station/ Yes of course. It’s straight ahead till you reach the traffic lights. Then turn left and cross one street. Then you’ll see it on your left.
S1: What’s that again? I don’t understand. How many blocks is that?S2: Blocks? There are no blocks! You just go along this road till you reach the traffic lights.
S1: I see – for one block? Can you speak more slowly please? I want to write this down.
S2: See those traffic lights? Go straight ahead until you reach them and turn left.S1: Yes, I see. That’s two blocks. Then do I take a left?
S2: Yes and then cross one road and it’s on your left-hand side.
S1: Thanks. I go one block and it’ll be on my left. Thanks so much.课件52张PPT。Unit 2
English Around the WorldWarming up and Reading Words and expressionsWhy should I
learn English?to use for business.to use in school.to write to pen friends.to talk to
native speakers.to read
English
books.to listen to English
music and movies.How much do you know about the English language?1. It is an international language and widely used.
2. It is the official language of many countries and the UN.
3. It plays an important role as a first or second language.
4. It is learned by people in many non-English speaking countries.in an international talk/meetingIn what situations is English used?in schoolson the air
(on TV, on the radio…)When we sing English songs.When we listen to English.Native language: It is the language that one or both your parents speak. You learn it as your first language /your native language/mother tongue.English as a second language: It is the language used by government,schools, newspapers and TV, but people speak the language of their own country at home. English as a foreign language
It is the language learnt as a school subject.EnglishAmericaIrelandChinaCanada The U.k.PakistanPhilippinesSouth AfricaNew ZealandNigeriaWhich countries used English as the official（官方语言） / native (本土语)/ foreign (外语)language?Countries speak English as their mother tongueBritain(UK)America (USA)CanadaAustraliaNew Zealand South Africathe USACanadaNew ZealandAustraliaSouth Africathe United KingdomIreland AMERICAN ENGLISHANDBRITISH ENGLISHWhat are the two main groups of English?B.E and A.ELet’s go to the pictures!Ok. But how shall we go to the movies?Do you know the difference between B.E and A.E?Why not go by Underground?Er, but the subway station is far away.British English
American English vselevator/lift in a team/on a team rubber/eraser petrol/gasCome on!Yeah!Do you want to come to my flat?How far is your apartment? It is beautiful?Shall we go to the pub to celebrate your birthday?Wow, bar is a nice place.Wow, I want a tin of Coko, some biscuits and sweets. What about you, Obama ?Well, I want a can of milk tea, some cookies and some candy.Hey, let’s go and see a soccer game. It is very exciting.Great. I like football match very much.Time to go home. Let’s go to the elevator together.Oh no, the lift must be full of people this time. Try to write down the words.flatapartmentpubbartincansweetscandybiscuitcookieliftelevatormatchgamefootballsoccerautumnfallpetrolgas1.Do you think that people from Britain and American can understand?
Why do you think so?2.Is there any differences in written and spoken English in the countries?colour color centre traveledtravelledcenterdancenot[d?ns][da:ns][nat][nэt]autumnfallI thinkI guessspellingpronunciationwordsexpressionsDifference 1Difference 2Which language do you prefer,
American English or British English?
Why?DiscussionFree talk Suppose girls are from Britain , and boys come from America. Talk about the differences between American English and British English with your partner.Pre-readingWith your partner, list the countries that use English as an official language.
Which country do you think has the most English learners?* 英国 * 澳大利亚 * 巴哈马群岛 * 博茨瓦纳 （但国语是Setswana） * 加拿大 （连同法语） * 斐济 （但是国语是斐济语） * 香港 （连同汉语） * 印度 （连同孟加拉语， 泰卢固语， 马拉地语， 泰米尔语， 乌尔都语， Gujarati， Malayalam， 埃纳德语， Oriya， Punjabi， 阿萨姆语， 克什米尔语， Sindhi， 梵语） * 肯尼亚 （连同Kiswahili） 以英语作为官方语言的有 :* 基里巴斯 * 尼日尔利亚 * 巴基斯坦 * 爱尔兰 （但是第二语言，第一语言是爱尔兰语） * 南非 （连同南非荷兰语， Ndebele， Northern Sotho， 梭托语， 斯威士语， Tsonga， 茨瓦纳语， Venda， 班图语，祖鲁语） * 新西兰 （习惯上的官方语言；其它法律规定的是毛利语） * 新加坡 （连同马来语， 泰米尔语和汉语。国语是马来语） * 菲律宾 （但国语是菲律宾语） * 冈比亚 * 美国 For those that speak English as their first language the USA or India must have the largest number of native speakers as they have the largest populations.
For those who learn English as their first foreign language China must have the largest number as it has the largest population.PredictionRead the title “The road to modern English” and predict (预测) what the passage is mainly about?Scan the text to find or make out a
key sentence for each paragraph.SkimmingParagraph 2Many people all over the world speak English.Native speakers can understand each other even if they don’t speak the same kind of English.Paragraph 1Paragraph 3Paragraph 4Why has English has changed over time? Finally by the 19th century the language was settled.Paragraph 5English is now spoken wide in Asia.English had the most speakers in the 17th century.
English developed when new settlers and rulers came to Britain.
Languages frequently change.TFFRead the passage carefully and decide whether the statements are true or false and explain why.1Careful readingThe language of the government is
always the language of the country.
5.English is one of the official
languages used in India.
6.This reading describes the
development of the English language.TTFMake a timeline of the development of English, using the passage to help you.2During the 5th century ADBetween AD 800 and 1150By the 1600sEnglish was based more on German.English was influenced by Danish and French invaders.3.Shakespeare used a wider vocabulary than ever before.1620From 18th century1765-1947By 19th century4.British settlers moved to America in the “May flower”.5.British colonized Australia.6.English spoken in India.7.Dictionaries standardized the spelling of English.1. Why do so many people want to learn English?use computers and the internet
to trade
to learn in western universities
to read academic journals
……3In pairs discuss these questions.as a result of China’s growing economic power
as a result of China’s growing influence in the UN
to trade with China
to move some branches of Western companies into China.
…….2.Why do you think more people in the world now want to lean Chinese?Development of Englishthe end of the 16th century the next century today ConclusiontimeplaceLanguage can change with time.Language can change when cultures communicate with each other.DiscussionHow does a powerful country influence a language, such as the USA.
Will Chinese English become one of the world’ English? Why?
Has Chinese changed over the time? How? Why?
Choose any one of it to have a discussion.Assignment1. Try to remember the English meaning of the new words in Reading I.
2. Prepare for the next class.
3. Finish the exercises on WB. Some backgrounds of Am. E & Br. EAmerican English and British EnglishThe differences between American English and British English
How come the differences:1. At first the language in Britain and America was the same.2. In 1776 America became an independent country.The language began to change.The language in America stayed the same,while the language in England changed.3.At the same time, British English and the American English stared borrowing words from other languages, ending up with different words.4.In 1828 Noah Webster published the first American dictionary. And he changed the spelling of some words.英语与美语的差异课件43张PPT。Workbook LISTENING Page 481. Before you listen , look at the map on the right. It shows some of the places in the world where English is spoken as an official language. Guess what this listening is about. Listen to the tape and see if you are right.2. Listen to the tape again. Work out the name of each student’s country and find the hints that help you identify them.I live in South Asia. My country is thousands of years old and now has more than a billion people. Unlike many other countries. Our people speak a lot of languages. So we use English, which we got from British rulers hundreds of years ago. Of course, we have our own way of using English.scriptWell, I live on a huge green island in western Europe. Hundreds of years ago, my people spoke a very different language from English. Then the British rulers came. Now the old language is spoken in only a few villages in the western part of my country.My country has more than 7000 islands. Some of them are very large but most of them are quite small. Hundreds of years ago, the Spanish rulers changed the way live. Much later, the American rulers taught their own kind of English in our schools. Nowadays, we speak a kind of English that borrows words from American English but is mostly our own.My country is very small. In fact it’s really a city. It is in southeast Asia and is very rich. People come from all over Asia to do business here. Today , you can hear our kind of English spoken everywhere in the city and on many ships that come here.USING WORDS AND EXPRESSIONSWork with a partner to complete the word puzzle. Use the clues to help you.agreed, said or done by the government
like a line or road that goes in one direction
national, local way of pronouncing words
a polite way of asking for something
the way that the words are used in a languageofficialstraightaccentrequestusage1Page 496. the northern central area of the USA
7. someone’s name or a strong feeling of being part of a group, race, etc
8. a powerful flash of light in the sky
9. the way in which a word is spelled
10. truck
11. __________________midwesternidentifylightingspellinglorryfrequentlyPlay the game “Find the odd one out”. Pick out the one that does not fit each group.2actor elevator visitor doctor director
eastern western northern modern midwestern
windy lorry lucky sandy cloudy
imagine important impolite improve immediatelyfluently July gradually frequently actually
unhappy unfriendly untidy unless unnecessary
afraid alone awake aloud alive
natural capital national official traditionalTranslate the following sentences into English, using the words and expressions in brackets3博物馆要求参观的游客不得在馆内拍照。(request)
邓小平在中国经济的发展过程种起着非常重要的作用。(play a part; economy)Visitors are requested not to take photos
in the museum.Deng Xiaoping played an important part
in developing the economy in China.记者问作家他作品种的人物是以谁为原型的。(base)
她说：“我会穿一件红色的长大衣，这样你肯定能认出我来。”(recognize)The reporter asked the writer who he
based his characters on.“I will be wearing a long red coat so you will be sure to recognize me,” she said.沿着这条路走三个街区，然后右转，医院就在你的左边。(block)
我们有很多工作要做，所以要利用好时间。(make use of)Go along the road for three blocks and then turn right. You will see the hospital on your left.We have a lot of work to do, so we have to make good use of time.他直接去了纽约，没在香港停留。(straight)
这座城市在初夏季节常下雨.(frequent)He went straight to New York, without stopping in Hong Kong.Rains are frequent in this city in early summer.Read the passage on Page 51, then answer the questions and fill in the following form:Reading Taskon page 511).Why were dictionaries invented?
2).Who played an important part in making English dictionaries?
3).The Oxford English dictionary is the largest dictionary. Who is the editor? How many years did it take to complete the dictionary? Make notes about Murry’s lifeNo formal education; taught himself while workingWorked in a bank before beginning to compile the OED1.worked in a shed in his garden and behind his house
2.very cold as it was one meter underground
3.no heating; he had to wear a coat and put his feet in a box to keep warm
4.no electric light; he worked at night with candles1.commitment
2.perseverance
3.accuracyat first just james murray; later his two daughters; finished by other editors after his death 1928first edition took forty; four years to compileLISTENING TASKDo you also practise your English outside class? What do you usually do to improve your listening? Discuss with your partner.1Listen to what Wang Ting and Chen Peng have to say and find out how they improve their English. Write down the main idea.2Wang Ting and Chen Peng are discussing how they improve their English listening outside class.Listen again and answer the following questions.What is Wang Ting going to do this weekend?
What does Wang Ting think about listening to English songs?3Wang Ting is going to buy some CDs to improve her English.She likes to listen to English songs to learn idiomatic English expressions.3. Did Chen Peng often watch English
films? Does he watch them now?4. What does Chen Peng like watching on
CCTV 9?No, he used to watch English films. He doesn’t wath them now as he thinks they are too hard without Chinese subtitles.He likes listening to Chinese people and reading the English subtitles.5. What does Wang Ting ask Chen Peng to do?
6. What does Chen Peng’s teacher say about
learning English? What does she mean?She asks him to listen to native speakers more often.The teacher asks him to learn “little and often”. She means that he should do a little extra listening every day to make the best improvement.Write down the three ways Wang Ting suggests to improve English skills.Listening to _____________is an easy way to ______ some idiomatic __________ .
Watching ________________________ is a good way to _______ your _____________ of English.
Listening to ______________ can improve your ____________ .4English songslearnexpressionsthe news and the interviewspractiseunderstandingnative speakerslistening skillsSPEAKING TASKImagine that the leaders of your hometown have asked your school to help beginners to learn English. They have suggested these three methodsListening to English programmers on the radio.Watching English filmsReading English newspapersNow make your recommendation. Compare your idea with another pair and make a final decision. Tell your teacher your idea and your reason for choosing it.S1: Now what helped us most to learn English?
S2: I remember extra reading helped me. Why don’t they read newspapers?
S1: Yes, a good idea. I found they helped me increase my vocabulary, but I found listening the most difficult.S2: Perhaps they could listen to the radio. I like to listen to native speakers but they used to speak rather fast for me. Now I’ve been listen every day for some time I can understand the different accents better. That has been very good practice.S1: What about watching English films? Did that help you?
S2: The action films are very good to watch. Sometimes the accents made it difficult, but it doesn’t matter. You can follow the story and understand some of the English through the action. Did you find that?S3 and S4: I did! I did!
S1: So we should say that we learned our English by listening to native speakers on the radio, by extra reading that was not too difficult and by watching films. That seems very clear. So let’s fill in the chart.hear native speakers get used to different accentsthey speak rather fastaction films are easy follow, you can understand some of the Englishthe language may be spoken too fastit helps improve your Englishthey may use infamiliar vocabularyNow make your recommendation. Compare your idea with another pair and make a final decision. Tell your teacher your idea and your reason for choosing it.WRITING TASKPage 53What problems do you have in learning English?Make a note about your problems or difficulties.
Share your problems with your friends and discuss how you can solve them.
List your solutions to two of your problems.
Decide a title and draft your composition.1Read the sample writing and study how the text is organized. Then write about your problems in your English study.2Ways of improving listening
Of the four skills, I think listening is the hardest. I like watching English films but I can’t understand them without the Chinese subtitles.
I am not satisfied with this situation, so recently I had a talk with my friend Wang Ting. She told me some good ways of improving listening. She suggested using CDs to listen to English songs and learn English expressions, watching the news and interviews on CCTV 9, and trying to listen to native speakers.
I will do as she advised. I’m sure I will gradually make progress.Studying the textText type: personal recount
Paragraph1: the main problemParagraph2: suggestions on how to solve the problemListen to CDs
Watch CCTV 9
Listen to native speakersParagraph3: conclusionMake a brainstorming map My problems
Ideas for improvement
ConclusionListening
Writing
Words
…….Listen to BBC.
Get an e-pal.
Memorize new words every morning.
……Paragraph1Paragraph2Paragraph3I’ll …
I should…
I’m sure…
It’s necessary…
…….My experience of improving EnglishPara 1 My problems in learning English.
Para 2 How can I can improve my English.
Para 4 How I hope to make use of my English.I have a great progress in English learning. But at first, I had many difficulties in learning English. I found listening really hard. Sometimes, it was just impossible to understand. Besides, my written English was not very good. And it was hard for me to memory new words.My experience of improving EnglishHow could I improve my English? Take listening as example. I bought a radio and listened to BBC English every morning. The more you listen to English, the easier it becomes. At the same time, I got an English e-pal and my written English improved quickly. My dream is to be a doctor. It’s necessary for a doctor to be good at English. I love English. It will help me realize my dream.Meanwhile, I made a plan to memorize new words. Every evening I memorized twenty new words and reviewed them the next morning. Then put them up on the wall to review in my spare time.AssignmentReview all the new words and expressions.
Finish the exercises on the exercise books.
3. Prepare for the next class.
